Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
E N G L IS H
• Study and Thinking Skills 7
Prof, Merry Ruth M. Gutierrez
Prof. Ma. Jhona B. Acuna
• A cadem ic W ritin g ................................. .............................................. 2 4
Prof. Ma. Concepcion Y. Raymundo
Prof. Ali G. Anudin
• Speech and Oral C o m m u n ic a tio n ................................................. 4 3
Prof. Alice M. Karaan
Prof. Maria Teresa L. Manicio
• Philippine L itera tu re .............................................................................6 9
Prof. Victor Rey Fuinar
• W orld Literature..................................................................................... 9 4
Dr. Ma. Antoinette C. Montealegre
F IL IP IN O
• Kom unikasyon sa A kadem ikong Filipino 123
Dr. Arscnia R. Emperado
• P agbasa at Pagsulat tungo sa Pananaliksik. 140
Dr. Arsenia R. Emperado
• Masining na P agpapahayag ........................... 166
Dr. Arsenia R. Emperado
M A T H E M A T IC S
• Fundam entals o f M athem atics 188
Atty. Antonio V. Ferrer
• C ontem po rary M athem atics 203
Dr, Gladys C. Nivera
W M p n U LET Reviewer
S CIENCE
• Natural S c ie n c e .......................... ..................................................2 1 6
Dr. Leticia V. Catris
SOCIAL SCIEN C E
• Politics and Governance
with the Philippine Constitution................................................. 2 4 4
Dr. Benjamin C. Domingcil Jr.
• Philippine History ........................ ...... ..................... ...... .........2 7 1
Prof. Remedies C. Ong
• Basic Economics with Agrarian Reform .............................. 2 8 4
Prof. Jerick C. Ferrer
Dr. Benjamin M.Domingcil Jr.
• Society and Culture with Family P la n n in g ............................. 2 9 9
Dr. Diony V* Varela
Prof. Minda I. Valencia
• Rizal’s Life and Works and other Heroes and Heroines . . 3 1 3
Dr. Evangeline L. Martin
• P hilosophy......... ............. .............................................................. 3 2 5
Prof. Michael M. Nael
• Introduction to Humanities: Appreciation of the A r t s .......3 6 3
Dr. Anita Navarro
• P sychology.................................................................................. . . 3 7 7
Dr. Priscilla B. Dizon
Dr. Teresita T. Rungduin
A N S W E R K EYS
General Education _ _ _ _ _ ______
Study and
Thinking Skills
Prepared by:
Prof. Merry Ruth M. Gutierrez and Prof. Ma. Jhona B. Acuna
Competencies:
General:
Comprehend written text in English
Specific:
Use strategies to efficiently search
for information and learn from
written texts in English
A. Remembering Information
1. Repetition - saying or writing information a number of times
2. Mnemonics - a technique to remember details such as:
a. Acronyms are words that are formed by combining some parts
(usually the first letters) of some other terms. The term is also
used to refer to initialisms, which are combinations of letters
representing a longer phrase.
b. Abbreviations (from Latin brevis “short”) is strictly a shorter form of
a word, but more particularly, is a letter or group of letters, taken
from a word or words, and employed to represent them for the
sake of brevity.
c. Pegwords are words that rhyme with numbers and are used to
build associations with the information to be remembered.
d. Keywords are familiar words that lead the reader to the new
words to be learned. They can be used to create mental images to
remember new words and definitions.
B. Underlining/Highlighting
Highlighting and underlining engage the reader to select words, phrases
and sentences, as well as, selecting the most important ideas and details
in a reading. It makes information stand out so that you can find it easily
when you go back to the text to study for a test. Systematically using
different colored highlighter pens can make the review process even
easier. Familiarity with the techniques is helpful to find rapidly what the
reader needs when rereading the passage.
Method for Underlining/Highlighting
1. Mark the main ideas and the major details differently. Underline the
main ideas with a double line, and the major details with a single line.
Or use a different color high-lighter pen for each.
2. Find main-idea sentences. Underline the sentences or parts of
sentences that state the main idea of a paragraph. If the main ideas
are only implied, write your own main-idea sentence in the margin.
Find major details and underline these.
3. Circle key words. Use brackets [ ], asterisks (*), or any other symbol to
mark parts that are especially interesting or important to you.
4. Write notes or comments to yourself in the margin. The margins are
good places to put down your own thoughts as you read. Margin notes
can help you connect ideas from different parts of the selection. They
can also help you connect a passage with other material you have
read, comments your teacher has made, or your own experience.
Title Title
I. 1.
II. 2.
A. 2.1
1. 2.1.1
2. 2 .1 .2
a. 2 .1 .3
b. 2.2
3. 2.2,1
B. 2 .2 .2
1. 2 .2 .3
2. 2 .3
III. 3.
F. Test-taking Strategies
1. Read to comprehend - concentrate on the main idea of t! e passage
and avoid fixating on details
2. Interact with the passage - predict the topic and activa e schema;
monitor and self- correct
3. Anticipate - read first sentence carefully, it usually gives cl tes of what
is to come
4. Relax - plan your time and concentrate
5. Recall - remind yourself of the author’s main point
6. Understand major question types - testy questions foi ow certain
predictable patterns ________ ______ ______
PNU LET Review r 11
English - Study and Thinking Skills
a. Main Idea Questions - ask to identify the author’s main point
b. Detail Questions - check your ability to understand material that
is directly stated in the passage
c. Implied Meaning Questions - deals with the attitudes and
feelings of the writer that emerges behind or between words
wherein favorable and unfavorable descriptions suggest positive
and negative opinions towards the subject
d. Purpose Questions - the purpose of the passage is not usually
stated but implied and is related to the main idea
e. Vocabulary Questions - tests general knowledge as well as the
ability to figure out meaning by using context clues
7. Multiple-Choice and True-False Tests
a. Read all options
b. Predict the correct answer
c. Avoid answers with “ 100 Percent” Words
d. Consider answers with qualifying words
e. Do not Overgeneralyze
f. True statements must be true without exception
g. If two options are synonymous, eliminate both
h. Figure out the difference between similar options
i. Use logical reasoning when two answers are correct
j. Look suspiciously at directly quoted pompous phrases
k. Simplify double negatives by canceling out both
I. Certain responses are neither true or false
m. Validate true responses
n. Recognize flaws in test taking
• Grammar
• Clues from other parts of the test
• Length
• Absurd ideas and emotional words
A. Critical Reading
1. Recognize the author’s purpose or intent
a. To inform. Authors use facts to inform, to explain, to educate, and
to enlighten.
b. To persuade. Authors use a combination of facts and opinions to
persuade, to argue, to condemn, and to ridicule.
c. To entertain. Authors use fiction and non-fiction to entertain , to
narrate, to describe, and to shock.
2. Recognize the author’s point of view or bias
a. Point of view refers to the opinions and beliefs of the author or of
the reader, and a critical reader must recognize how those beliefs
influence the message.
b. Bias is a word closely related to point of view but tends to be
associated with prejudice, and thus it has a negative connotation.
It is an opinion or judgment that may be based on solid facts or on
incorrect information but leans to one side, unequally presenting
evidence and arguments.
3. Recognize the author’s tone
The author’s tone describes the writer's attitude toward the subject. To
determine the tone, pick up clues from the choice of words and details.
As a critical reader, tune in to the author’s tone by letting attitude
become a part of evaluating the message.
4. Distinguishing fact from opinion
a. Fact is a statement that can be proven true or false. It is an
observation that can be supported with direct evidence and is
something own by actual experience.
b. Opinion is a statement of feeling that cannot be proven right or
wrong. It can be a commentary, position, or observation based
B. Functional Reading
Readings often contain more than just words. Graphics accompany the text
and knowing how to read these visual aids help the reader how to relate it
to the ideas of the selection.
1. Photographs - to interpret photographs, you need to be able to
identify what is being represented and then to infer moods, attitudes,
and relations that help give life to the pictures, particularly if they are of
people.
2. Diagrams - are drawings with labeled parts. Notice what the separate
parts represented and see how they work together. Labels and captions
usually point out the key features and explain how the parts relate to
each other.
C. Active Reading
1. The main idea of a passage is the core of the material, the particular
point the author is trying to convey. The main idea of a passage can be
stated in one sentence that condenses specific ideas or details in the
passage into a general, all-inclusive statement of the author’s message.
Steps in determining the main idea
a. Recognize general and specific words - look for specific ideas
presented in the sentences and decide on a general topic or
subject under which ideas can be grouped. The general term
encompasses or categorizes the key ideas and is considered the
topic of the list.
b. Recognize general and specific phrases - topics of passages are
more often stated as phrases rather than single words.
c. Recognize the General Topic for Sentences - study paragraphs are
composed of sentences that develop a single general topic.
d. Recognize General and Supporting Sentences - sentences are
related to a single subject, with two of the sentences expressing
Doing the three steps given will help the readers to come up with a
main idea even prior to the reading of the actual text. The formula to
construct or state the main idea is:
mi = p + f + 1
Where
mi = main idea
p = pattern of organization
f = focus of discussion
t = topic
Evaluate the notes you have written, and synthesize the ideas you
gathered from steps 1-4 to summarize the informational text in two or
three sentences. The formula for summary of an expository text is:
S e t = m i + si + (sd)
Where
Set= summary of expository text
mi = main idea (p + f + 1) ■
si = support idea
sd = support detail
P A R T II - A N A L Y Z IN G T E S T IT E M S
A. S a m p le Test Ite m s
Directions: Read the portion of a proposal on smoking written below. Then decide
who could have written each proposal. Choose and copy the letter of the best
answer for each item.
1. Proposal A:
I strongly propose that colleges and universities allow smoking among students in
the campus during break as a way of easing pressure and tension caused by heavy
academic demands.
A. a psychologist C. a student who smokes
B. a parent D. a student leader
This is a question on critical thinking, specifically on noting point o f view. The
proposal requires sensitivity to the speaker's word choice and stand on the issue. The
words campus, break, academ ic pressure and tension suggest that a person is very
familiar with college life, and the stand is not against, but for smoking. Although choices
A, B, and D are also familiar with university life, not all o f them would fight for smoking.
The best answer is C - the one who is a university student and who smokes would be
the mostlikely to propose the idea.
2. Proposal B:
Smoking increases the chances of having fire accidents not only in schools but
also in all public places - parks, hotels, markets, and villages. It could be a way of
endangering the lives of people whose interest the government has promised to
serve and protect.
A. a physician C. a fire chief
B. a store owner D. a teacher
The analysis done in 1 can be used here, too. Word choice will give a clue as to who
is speaking - words such as accidents, places, markets, hotels, government, serve,
and protect. Take note that the person's stand is not for, but against smoking. Choice
A, physician will not talk about the risks o f smoking in this manner and perhaps would
not encourage smoking. Choice B, store owner, might cite other reasons and might be
ambivalent about the issue - either to fight for or against smoking. A teacher, choice
D, might not advocate smoking, but will offer different explanations. The best answer is
choice C. Among the choices, only a fire chief would explainreasons the way it was done
in the proposal because o f which smoking is not viewed positively.
3. How would a tobacco grower explain the reason of the proposal for smoking?
A. Smoking indirectly boosts the country’s economy.
B. Smoking relaxes the nerves and this helps control negative emotions.
C. Smoking has always been a part of male identity and superiority over
women.
D. Smoking benefits the people who consider the plant as their source of
income.
This is a thinking skill question which requires an analysis o f the person's character
as basis for identifying perspective and point o f view. Notice that the person involved
is a tobacco grower who would encourage smoking for business reasons. Choice A is
perhaps from an economist's view, while Choice B could be made by a plain smoker
trying to justify the act. Choice C might be a statement by a sociologist talking about
gender issues. Choice D is the correct answer because the tobacco grower depends on
the plant for a living, and so he/she airs a view from a business or labor perspective.
Read the selection and answer the questions that follow. Write only the letter of the
best answer for each item.
1 Forjail his ability to travel over a sandy desert without water, the camel has a nasty
temper and the spirit o f revenge. He's not happy until he pays back a wrong, actual or
seeming. Knowing this, camel drivers and others who use camels a lot have devised an
interesting way o f letting the camel settle his scores without the person getting hurt.
2 When a driver has made a camel angry in some way or other, he immediately runs
out o f sight. He hides near the road on which the camel will pass. He then takes off his
clothes and throws them down on a heap, which vaguely resembles a sleeping person.
3 Along comes the camel. He sees and smells the clothes o f the one who hurt him. Then
he pounces upon the pile, shakes every piece and tramples ail over everything. Satisfied, he
walks away. The driver comes out of hiding, mounts the avenged beast, and rides off.
4 It makes one think of the baby who bumps its head against the leg o f the table, turns
around, and hits the leg in punishment.
It is said:
That there is hardly a bar o f music which Beethoven did not rewrite a t least a dozen
times.
That Bryant rewrote THANATOPSIS a hundred times.
That Gibbon rewrote his AUTOBIOGRAPHY nine times.
That Plato wrote the first sentence o f his REPUBLIC nine times.
That Virgil spent 12 years writing his AENEID.
- from 1000 Stories You Can Use by Frank Mihaiic
Chance walked through the rooms, which seemed empty; the heavily curtained
windows barely admitted the daylight. Slowly he looked at the large pieces o f furniture
shrouded in old iinen covers, and a t the veiled mirrors. The words that the Old Man
had spokeh to him the first time had wormed their way into his memory like firm roots.
Chance was an orphan, and it was the Old Man himseif who had sheltered him in the
house ever since Chance was a child. Chance's mother had died when he was born. No
one, not even the Old Man, would tell him who his father was. While some could learn to
read and write, Chance would never be able to manage this. Nor would he ever be able
to understand much o f what others were saying to him or around him. Chance was to
work in the garden, where he would care for plants and grasses and trees which grew
there peacefully. He would be as one o f them: quiet, open hearted in the sunshine and
heavy when it rained. His name was Chance because he had been born by chance. He
had no family. Although his mother had been very pretty, her mind had been as damaged
as his; the soft soil o f his brain, the ground from which his thoughts shot up, had been
ruined forever. Therefore, he could not look for a place in the life led by people outside
the house or the garden gate. Chance must lim it his life to his quarters and to the
garden; he must not enter the other parts o f the household or walk out into the street.
His food would always be brought to his room by Louise, who would be the only person
to see Chance and talk to him. No one else was allowed to enter Chance's room. Only
the Old Man himself might walk and s it in the garden. Chance would do exactly what he
was told or eise he would be sent to a special home for the insane where, the Old Man
said, he would be locked in a cell and forgotten.
Chance did what he was told so did black Louise.
21. “It was the Old Man himself who had sheltered him in the house since Chance
was a child.” What does this suggest about their relationship?
The Old Man was Chance's
A. guardian C. father
B. brother D. landlord
i P A R T III - E N H A N C IN G T E S T T A K IN G S K IL L S
i
Read the selection and answer the questions that follow. Copy the letter of the besl
answer for each item.
1 What must occur to enable us to remember a friend's name, a fact from history,
or an incident from our past? The act o f remembering requires the successful completion
of three processes: encoding, storage, and retrieval. The first process, encoding, involves
transforming information into a form that can be stored in memory. Sometimes we encode
information automatically, without any effort, but often we must do something with the
information in order to remember it. For example, if you met someone named George at a
party, you might associate his name with George Washington or George Bush. Such simple
associations can markedly improve your ability to recall names and other information. The
careful encoding o f information greatly increases the chance that you will remember it.
2 The second memory process, storage, involves keeping or maintaining information in
memory. For encoded information to be stored, some physiological change in the brain must
take place - a process called consolidation. Nonnally consolidation occurs automatically,
but if a person loses consciousness for any reason, the process can be disrupted and a
permanent memory may not form. That is why a person who has been in a serious car
accident could awaken in a hospital and not remember what has happened.
3 The final process, retrieval, occurs when information stored in memory is brought to
mind. Calling George by name the next time you meet him shows that you have retrieved
his name from memory. To remember, we must perform all three processes - encode the
information, store it, and then retrieve it. Memory failure can result from the failure of any
one o f the three.
4 Similar steps are required in information processing o f computers. Information is
encoded (entered in some form the computer is able to use), then stored on disk, and later
retrieved on the screen. You would not be able to retrieve the material if you had failed to
enter it, if a power failure occurred before you could save what you had entered, or if you
forgot which disk or file contained the needed information. Of course, human processing
is far more complex than even the most advanced computer systems, but computer
processing provides a useful analogy to memory if not taken too literally.
Music Can Heal Mental Wounds but Only in the Right Hands
By Eva DorotheeSchmid
1 Human beings have known about the healing properties o f music since Biblical
times - according to the Old Testament for example. David soothed King Saul's aching
brow by reaching for his harp.
2 There are also many references to the healing potential o f music in texts left
behind by the ancient Greeks.
3 The same properties are not put to good use in the modern field o f music therapy.
Music therapy is psychotherapeutic procedure which does not compete with traditional
medicine but rather tries to complement it.
4 Music arouses emotion, soothes, comforts and can lead to changes in behavior. It
can also encourage the healing process, increase a person's ability to tolerate pain and
help them overcome their fears.
5 A ll o f this can result in changes in the body's chemistry.
6 Studies show that the right sort o f music causes the body to release an increased
amount o f so-called endorphins with the results that the person becomes less sensitive
to pain and feels much better.
Acid rain refers to all types o f precipitation - rain, snow, sleet, hail, fog - that is
acidic in nature. Acidic means that these forms o f water have a pH lower than 5.6
average o f rainwater. Acid rain kills aquatic life, trees, crops and other vegetation,
damages buildings and monuments, corrodes copper and lead piping, damages such
man-made things as automobiles, reduces soil fertility and can cause toxic metals to
leach into underground water sources.
Rain is naturally acidic because carbon dioxide, found normally in the earth's atmosphere,
reacts with water to form carbonic acid. While “pure" rain's acidity is pH 5.6 to 5.7,
actual pH readings vary from place to place depending upon type and amount o f other
gases present in the air, such as sulfur oxide and nitrogen oxides.
The term pH refers to the free hydrogen ions (electrically charged atoms) in water
and is measured on a scale from 0 to 14. Seven is considered neutral and measurements
below seven are acidic while those above it are basic or alkaline. Every point on the pH
scale represents a tenfold increase over the previous number. Thus, pH 4 is 10 times
more acidic than pH5 and 100 times more acidic more so than pH 6. Similarly, pH 9 is
10 times more basic than pH 8 and 100 times more basic than ph 7.
Not much is known about the early history o f printing with movable type. There
is evidence, however, that hand-set printing with movable type was first invented in
China and Korea. A t a later time, it was developed in Europe. In the 1400s, Laurens
JanzoonKoster o f Holland, and Panfilo Castaldi o f Italy, are thought to have made the first
European use o f printing with movable type. It is Johann Gutenberg's name, however,
that is now associated with the invention of the movable type printing press. Although
the separate elements o f printing (the type, the ink, the press, and the paper) were not
Gutenberg's own invention, his contribution was that he printed a large quantity o f work
o f high quality.
Born in Mainz, Germany, in about 1397, Gutenberg was trained as a goldsmith,
but he became a partner in a printing office in about 1436. It was in his hometown o f
Mainz that he began the project he is most famous for: printing o f the Mazarin Bible. To
finance this great project, he borrowed money from a lawyer named Johann Fust and
form a printer. He was unable to pay back the money, however, and as a result lost both
his printing press and the types to Fust, who carried on Gutenberg's work.
Gutenberg's method dominated the printing industry for almost 400 years. It
required hand-setting particular pieces o f type, locking them into place, and then printing
on wooden flatbed handpresses. The rate was slow compared to modern printing; 300
to 500 sheets a day printed on a single side was considered a good rate production.
Though not much is known about Gutenberg's life, his name lives on as a person who
contributed significantly to the technology o f human communication.
Academic
Writing
Prepared by:
Prof. Ma. Concepcion Y. Ray in undo and Prof. Ali G. Anndin
Competencies:
I. C O M M O N SENTENCE ERRORS
A. Fragments
SENTENCE FRAGMENT fails to be a sentence in the sense that it cannot stand
by itself. It does not contain even one independent clause.
There are several reasons why a group of words may seem to act like a
sentence but not have the wherewithal to make it as a complete thought.
Dependent Words
after if, even if when, whenever even though
although, though in order that where, wherever until
as since whether who, whose
because that, so that which, whichever how
before unless while /- what, whatever
The crowd cheered loudly when the band emerged from the backstage,
Eric stood quietly.
Fused Sentences
The bus stopped suddenly. I spilled coffee all over my shirt.
Mario told everyone in the room to be quiet his favorite show was on.
In other run-ons, known as comma splices, a comma is used to connect, or “splice"
together, the two complete thoughts. Some stronger connection than a comma
>■alone is needed.
Comma Splices
The bus stopped suddenly, I spilled coffee all over my shirt.
Mario told everyone in the room to be quiet, his favorite show was on.
Dangling Modifiers
Other times we write descriptive phrases that point to or modify words that are
not clearly stated in our sentences, making our sentences illogical. We call these
phrases dangling modifiers. For example, in "Walking to college on a subzero
morning, my left ear became frozen,” the underlined phrase modifies "my left ear.”
This doesn’t make sense; some person must have been doing the walking. We can
clarify the sentence by putting a logical word after the phrase: for example, “Walking
to college on a subzero morning, I froze my left ear.” Or, we can change the phrase
so that it has a logical subject and verb in it: “When I was walking to college on a
sub/ero morning, my left ear became frozen.'’
( I he world was not watching the moon; the world was watching the astronauts.)
2. Attei seeing the benefits of reduced employee turnover, absenteeism, and lateness,
onsite daycare, is being provided more frequently as a perk for working parents.
(Onsite daycare is not seeing the benefits of reduced turnover, absenteeism, and
lateness; companies are seeing these benefits as a result of onsite daycare.)
4. An author who did not receive much attention until after her death, readers of
all ages enjoy Emily Dickinson’s poetry today.
or
Readers of all ages enjoy Emily Dickinson’s poetry today, an author who did not
receive much attention until after her death.
Revision
Today, readers of all ages enjoy the poetry of Emily Dickinson, an author who
did not receive much attention until after her death.
(The phrase, an author who did not receive much attention until after her death,
should modify Emily Dickinson rather than readers or Emily Dickinson’s poetry.)
(The example doesn’t make sense as it is written. Someone must have submitted
the form late. According to the revision, Susan submitted the form late.)
7. When purchasing a cellular phone, the wide variety of calling plans and features
overwhelms many people.
Revision
When purchasing a cellular phone, many people become overwhelmed by the
wide variety of calling plans and features.
(The calling plans and features aren’t purchasing cellular phones. People purchase
cellular phones.)
D. Faulty Parallelism
Words in a pair or series should have parallel structure. By balancing the items
in a pair or series so that they have the same kind of structure, you will make
the sentences clearer and easier to read .
(Balanced verbs and word order: We painted. , . ; a professional put up. ..)
E. Faulty Coordination
F. Subordination
Subordination, however, emphasizes the idea in the main clause more than the
one in the subordinate clause. Generally, the patterns look like these:
m a in c la u s e + 0 + s u b o rd in a te c la u s e
s u b o rd in a te c la u s e + , + m ain c la u s e
When you connect two main clauses with a coordinating conjunction, use a comma.
The pattern looks like this:
Here is an example:
While I am at work, my dog Floyd sleeps on the bed , and my cat Buster naps
in the bathtub.
You can also use a coordinating conjunction to connect any two items. These items
can be any grammatical unit except main clauses. The pattern looks like this:
When you have three or more items in a series, you generally use a comma before
the coordinating conjunction. Some handbooks and style guides will tell you that this
comma is optional, but my advice is to put it in. The pattern looks like this:
Here is an example:
Swatting olives off the kitchen counter, dragging toilet paper streamers through
the house, and terrorizing Jacques Cousteau, the parakeet, have consumed
another of Buster’s days.
Subordinating Conjunctions
A subordinating conjunction joins a subordinate clause to a main clause.
II. T H E T O P IC S E N T E N C E A N D T H E P A R A G R A P H
A good paragraph contains several related sentences that support one main
idea, which is limited to and focused in one sentence. This sentence helps
guide the reader through the related sentence in the paragraph. The term used
to identify this main idea is topic sentence.
You could use each one of these sentences as a topic sentence because each main
idea is limited to and focused into two essential parts: a topic (key word or phrase)
and a general direction (conclusion or opinion) about the topic:
Topic Direction or General Word
Doing housework is very boring.
Browsing in a library is an exciting experience.
The paragraph
A paragraph has three parts:
1. a topic sentence
2. support sentences *
3. a conclusion
Completeness
A paragraph must have enough information in it to give the reader a clearer picture
or a full discussion of its main idea ( the topic sentence). A paragraph without
details or examples will be vague and unconvincing . A paragraph that does not
have enough information is called incomplete or undeveloped.
Dancing can be good exercise. The constant arm and leg movements are
like aerobics. They can be a really good workout if the dance lasts long enough.
If the dance requires lots of quick movements, many calories can be used up,
and more fat will be burned. Some dances require movements that are like
stretching, so flexibility and muscle tone will be increased. Dancing can help
maintain weight and can be beneficial exercise to everyone.
Logical Order
All the support sentences should be in clear, logical order. Sometimes the order
of these supporting details does not matter. Other times, however, it does matter
because if the sentences are not in logical order, the reader misses the main point
of the paragraph.
Logical Order
I walked up the front steps to my front door.
I opened the front door of my house and went inside.
Unity
All sentences in a good paragraph relate to the topic sentence (main idea). When
any idea doesn’t relate specifically to the topic sentence, then that paragraph lacks
unity or is not unified.
American scientists are working hard to gather facts about sea turtles
called leatherbacks. The observers work, no matter what the weather is like-
on clear days or in pouring rain. They count the turtles as they come ashore.
When the turtles lay their egg, the scientists walk up and down the beaches
for many hours at a time. They count the eggs in the sand. Then, later,they
count the eggs that hatch. These biologists know that they are collecting
information that will someday be important to other scientists.
Coherence
One of the most important considerations in writing a paragraph is coherence-
the way all the sentences should be clearly connected to each other. Without
connecting words or phrases , supporting ideas may be hard to follow and
sometimes may even seem to be unrelated to the topic sentence and to each other.
When Sue was a child, she learned from her dad how to be a hard worker.
For example, she always helped in the yard. Many times they mowed the lawn
together. Sue emptied the grass catcher ( which her dad did not overfill), and
he did the heavy part by lifting the barrels full of grass. Working together,
they did not quit until the job was done. She and her dad worked even after
the sun was gone, making sure the edges of the lawn were n ea t. In this way,
Sue learned to stay with a job until she had done well and could feel proud
of her effort.
You can tell if your thesis is strong if you can answer the following:
• Do I answer the question? Re-reading the question prompt after constructing
a working thesis can help you fix an argument that misses the focus of the
question.
• Have I taken a position that others might challenge or oppose? If your thesis
simply states facts that no one would, or even could, disagree with, it’s
possible that you are simply providing a summary, rather than making an
argument.
• Is my thesis statement specific enough?Thesis statements that are too vague
often do not have a strong argument.
• Does my thesis pass the "So what?” test? If a reader's first response is, “So
what?” then you need to clarify, to forge a relationship, or to connect to a
larger issue.
• Does my essay support my thesis specifically and without wandering? If your
thesis and the body of your essay do not seem to go together, one of them
has to change.
• Does my thesis pass the “how and why?” test? If a reader’s first response is
“how?” or “why?" your thesis may be too open-ended and lack guidance for
the reader.
• Expository: This is the simplest of all types of thesis, the expansionary thesis
principally puts forth some facts and simplified explanations regarding a
specific idea, in front of the people.
Example: Watching too much television may lead to physiological and
psychological problems.
• Argumentative: The third type is that of the argumentative thesis and presents
arguments between two view points.
Example: Smoking should be banned in all public places.
There are various Writing Genres or Patterns of Paragraph Development, and each
pattern or genre has a specific function. Often, these genres are merged with each
other to make the written output more effective.
Narration
• Use narration to establish a series of events that tells the reader what happened.
Narration follows a chronological pattern of development. It is a convincing
mode of paragraph development to the extent that it tells a coherent story.
Larry suddenly woke up from a deep sleep. The sun was dazzling his half-open
eyes, and he couldn't figure out what time it was. The door to his room was closed; the
house was immersed in some sort o f reckless silence. He slowly got out o f his bed and
approached the bench right next to the window. For a moment, he thought, he heard a
tapping sound coming from the attic. Then again he heard the sound only this time it
seemed to be somewhat closer. He looked outside the window and saw a man going by
the left side o f the road. On seeing Larry, the man approached his garden's fence and
whistled. A t this point, Larry recognized Nick and waved his hand. He quickly got dressed
and was about the get down to open the gate, but he again heard someone murmuring
in the other part o f the house. Larry decided to go to the attic and see what was causing
this, now buzzing, sound. He got to the second floor o f his house and looked toward the
attic. He quickly opened its door and looked inside. Nothing was found. He was about to
turn back and attend to his guest when he, suddenly, slipped on the stairs and fell. He
called out to Nick to help him get up.
My most valuable possession is an old, slightly warped blond guita r-th e first
instrument I taught myself how to play. It's nothing fancy, ju st a Madeira folk guitar,
a ll scuffed and scratched and finger-printed. A t the top is a bramble o f copper-wound
strings, each one hooked through the eye o f a silver tuning key. The strings are stretched
down a long, slim neck, its frets tarnished, the wood worn by years of fingers pressing
chords and picking notes. The body o f the Madeira is shaped like an enormous yellow
pear, one that was slightly damaged in shipping. The blond wood has been chipped
and gouged to gray, particularly where the pick guard fell o ff years ago. No, it's not a
beautiful instrument, but it still lets me make music, and for that I will always treasure it.
The writing process has four distinct phases. (2) The first is invention, which is
aided by any number o f techniques, including free-writing, mind-mapping and outlining.
(3) In this first stage, it's important for a writer not to edit but to let ideas flow and to
simply get them down on paper. (4) After invention, comes the first draft— the stage
where the ideas start to take shape. (5) Many writers use a sentence outline at this stage
to see where they need to cut and where they need to add material. The first draft is
also where writers should develop a tentative thesis to guide the structure o f their essay.
(6) The next stage o f the process is when both the second and third drafts are done.
(7) Here, ideas and structure are refined, and the thesis is revised until it becomes the
unifying idea o f the paper. (8) Finally, comes the last stage, that o f editing. (9) Writers
should take care a t this stage that all sentence structure and punctuation is correct, and
they should make corrections to documentation format as needed. (10) Writers often
repeat these four phases more than once, or skip a phase and go back to it, making the
writing process more cyclical than linear.
Comparison-Contrast
Block Arrangement
A scientist and a poet both strive for perfection: the poet refines his sensibilities,
while the scientist reduces everything to precise measurements. Both share the beauty
o f a rainbow; but while the poet imagines a pot o f gold a t the end o f it, the scientist
wants to spell it out in angstrom units measuring wavelength.
Cause-Effect
The tropical rainforests o f West Africa, Brazil, Latin America and Southeast Asia
are some o f the most important environmental regions o f the world because they hold
millions o f unique plants, animals, and people. However, they are being destroyed
rapidly for agriculture, mining and logging. This essay will examine the causes o f this
destruction and outline its effects on our lives.
One o f the main causes o f this is logging for timber. Millions o f hectares o f trees are
cut down every year, often illegally. The most valuable wood is taken and not replaced,
and landless people move in along the new logging roads.
Argumentative
Because o f the pressing issues regarding global economic recession, it is high time
that the government support programs that would boost the country’s economy. We
should set aside moral issues and start thinking of ways to curb to growing problems in
finance. One way to deal with this is by legalizing prostitution.
We all know that this is the oldest profession and legalizing this will allow more
revenues. How? Well, basically, legalizing prostitution Is tantamount to taxation. Each
prostitute will be taxed. Hence, a portion o f their profits will contribute to the needs of
the nation.
P A R T II.- A N A L Y Z IN G T E S T IT E M S
. jsp . ’ -• ^
S a m p le T est Ite m s
1. Oliver jumps every New Year season. Believing that he will become taller. The
error in these statements may be corrected using the following versions, except:
A. Because he believes that he will become taller, Oliver jumps every New
Year season.
B. Oliver jumps every New Year season, and he believes that he will become
taller.
C. Oliver jumps every New Year season. He believes that he will become taller.
D. Believing that he will become taller, Oliver jumps every New Year season.
The answer is C. Options A, B, and D present subordination, i.e. the idea presented
is a “reason." However, the sentence should present a “result" idea, i.e. what the
demonstrators did because o f their anger.
10. Which sentence in the paragraph does not support the main idea in the topic
sentence?
1. Adult reentry students often have special needs. 2.They may have time
restraints caused by families and jobs as well as by school. 3. Reentry students
are willing to put in the extra time to be successful. 4. Since they sometimes
work slowly than younger students, they may require more time to complete
tasks. 5. As adults grow older, their vision is not as keen so classroomsjneed
excellent lighting with little glare. 7. Also, reentry students may experience
hearing problems, making it hard for them to hear everything that is said in
the classroom. 8.These problems, although not serious, do not need to be a
barrier to education.
A. Sentence 2 < |2 se n te n c e 4
B. Sentence 3 ' ndt Sentence 5
11. All of the following are parallel except:
A. She left me angry, frustrated, and wearing a frown.
B. We have things to do, people to see, and places that should be visited.
0 I enjoy the job because of the opportunities it offers, the fringe benefits I
receive and I earn a good salary.
D. My father prepared the main course and fixed the dessert.
12. "Which would be the appropriate subordinator to be used to complete this
sentence?
______ _______she finally grew accustomed to the dark, she noticed a small
chest in the corner of the room.
@ When While
B. Where D. Because
13'. All of the following show faulty use of coordinating conjunctions except:
A. Marian sings in the choir, for she is a soprano.
( D The clock chimed nine times, but JC knew he had overslept.
C. I studied the children, and they were watching in awe as theparade floats
went by.
D. I tried to sleep, yet the thought of tomorrow’s math exam kept me awake.
P A R T III - E N H A N C IN G T E S T T A K IN G S K IL L S
A. Similarly C. Furthermore
B. Likewise ( I p On the other hand
2. When quoting a source, what should be done if a writer encounters an
erroneous statement, such as the one below?
This philosophies is very essential in curriculum designing, because they serve
as the guiding principle of curriculum designers.
Change ‘philosophies’ into ‘philosophy.’
B. Insert the Latin abbreviation ‘sic’ at the end of the statement.
C. Insert the Latin abbreviation ‘sic’ after ‘philosophies'
D. Insert the Latin abbreviation ‘sic’ after ‘philosophies’ enclosed in square
brackets.
3. What should be done to correct the error in the sentence below?
In Middle Eastern countries Jor instance, women are required to serve the
groom’s family.
A. Insert a comma after ‘countries'
Insert a comma after ‘instance’
Insert a comma after ‘countries’ and ‘instance’
D. Insert a comma after ‘countries’ and ‘women’
After choosing the flavor that best suits your taste buds, the second step is making
sure that your kitchen houses some necessary equipment for making the Kool-Aid. Find
a two-quart pitcher. Plastic is nice, but glass pitchers allow the liquid to shine through
and add festive coloration to any refrigerator shelf. Next, find a long-handled wooden
spoon, a one-cup measuring cup, a water faucet that spouts drinkable water, usable
white sugar, and an ice cube tray full o f ice. Then, you are ready to mix.
A. Comparison C. Addition
B. Description D. Contrast
6. All the options may be applied to correct the statement below, except
In the seventh grade every young boy goes out for football. To prove to himself
and his parents that he is a man.
A. In the seventh grade, every young boy goes out for football to prove to
himself and his parents that he is a man.
To prove to himself and his parents that he is a man, every young boy goes
out for football in the seventh grade.
C. Proving to himself and his parents that he is a man, every young boy goes
~ out for football in the seventh grade.
D. Every seventh grade boy goes out for football to prove to himself and his
parents that he is a man.
7. What error is committed in the sentence below?
Having eaten their supper, the cook told the men to clear the table.
A Fragment C. Faulty coordination
™ Dangling modifier D. Faulty parallelism
Until better sources of energy are found, nuclear power is the answer to our growing
energy needs. Given the enormous demands by industry and private consumers for
electrical power, conventional means o f generating power are no longer adequate. Water
power and coal have proved too costly or clean as power sources, and in the foreseeable
future, the world's supply o f petroleum will be depleted. The use of solar energy and the
development o f synthetic foods may prove valuable, but they are still in their infancy.
Nuclear power plants are available today. Although they are expensive to construct, they
are efficient and economical in the long run because breeder reactors can recycle nuclear
waste. Though everyone looks forward to safer and more efficient sources o f energy,
nuclear energy is the best choice for today.
20. Which sentence io4he following paragraph states the topic sentence?
A. First ''(E p Second C. Third D. Fourth
1 Dancing and chanting to the rhythmic beat o f the drums, Polynesian students give
visitors to the Polynesian Culture Center a glimpse o f Hawaii's past. 2 Through its
exhibitions, the Polynesian Culture Center shows visitors the many elements o f Hawaiian
culture brought to Hawaii by its inhabitants, the Polynesian. 3 For example, the Center
shows the similarities between Polynesian and Hawaiian villages with life-size models.
4 In additbn, the Center dramatizes Hawaiian legends o f ancestors journeying across
the ocean in large canoes of hollowed logs, gardens o f bananas, sweet potato, taro, and
plants exhibit the food carried by the ocean travelers to their new home.
25. If you are to arrange the sentences below to make a sound paragraph, which
sentence do you think should be the thesis statement?
A. A special concern is whether movies and television make children and
society more violent.
B. I believe that movies and television do influence our behavior, both for the
better and for the worse.
C. Do movies affect our behavior?
D. Noneof.above.
Competencies:
PART I - C O N T E N T U PD A TE
GRAMMAR
I. T h e P a rts o f S p e e c h
The parts of speech fall into two categories: 1) the content words (also called
form classes because they are best identified by form rather than by functions)
are nouns, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs; and 2) the structure words most
of which do carry some meaning but which also serve to form a structural
framework so that words can fit into sentences.
ASPECT
• PROGRESSIVE (also called continuous)
The progressive aspects give the idea that an action is in progress
during a particular time. It begins before, is in progress during,
and continues after another time or action.
Present progressive - an action began in the a. Beth is sleeping
(am/is/are + V-ing) past, is in progress right now.
at the at the present
time, and probably will
continue
Past Progressive - an action began before b. Beth was
(was/were + V-ing) and was in progress at sleeping when I
a particular time in the arrived.
past.
Future Progressive - an action will begin c. Beth will be
(will/shall + be + before another action, sleeping when we
V-ing) and it will be in arrive.
progress at a particular
time in the future
NOTE: WILL vs. BE GOING TO
• To express a PREDICTION: Use either will or be going to.
• To express a PRIOR PLAN: Use only be going to.
• To express WILLINGNESS: Use only will.
e.g. 1. According to the weather report, it will be cloudy tomorrow.
According to the weather report, it is going to be cloudy tomorrow.
(Prediction)
2. Why did you buy this paint?
I am going to paint my bedroom tomorrow. (Prior plan)
3. I will do it for you. (Willingness)
• PERFECT
The perfect aspects all give the idea that one thing happened before another
time or event.
Present Perfect - an action happened a. Gary has already
(has/have + V-en sometime before now eaten.
(past participle) at an unspecified time
in the past. The exact b. 1have been
time is not important. here since seven
(Adverbs like ever, o’clock.
never, already, yet, still
and just are frequently c. 1have known him
used with the present for many years.
perfect)
NOTE the difference
- a situation that began in between since and for.
the past and continues
to the present (usually FOR + a duration of
used with for or sinctf time
SINCE + a particular
time
Past Perfect - an action was a. Gary had already
(had + V-en (past completely finished eaten when his
participle) before another activity friend arrived.
or time in the past.
Future Perfect - an action will be b. Gary will already
(will/shall + have + completely finished have eaten when
V-en (past participle) before another time in his friend arrives.
the future.
• PERFECT PROGRESSIVE
The perfect progressive aspects give the idea that one event is in progress
immediately before, up to, until another time or event.
Present Perfect - an event is in progress. a. Abet has been
Progressive It happened before now delivering the
(has/have + been + up to now. speech for 30
V-ing) minutes now.
Past Perfect - emphasizes the b. Abet had been
Progressive duration of an activity delivering the
(had + been + V ing) that was in progress speech for 30
before another activity minutes before the
or time in the past. President arrived.
Future Perfect - an event is in progress. c. Abet will have
Progressive It happened before been delivering
(will have + been + another event in the the speech for 30
V-ing) future and will last for a minutes by the
particular period of time time the President
arrives.
B. Stative Verbs
• Describe states, conditions or situations that exist.
• When verbs have stative meanings, they are usually not used in
progressive tenses, (e.g. This food tastes good. I like it very much.
Tastes and like both describe a state that exists; therefore, it is incorrect
to say “This food is tasting good. I am liking it very much.’’)
Some examples of dynamic verbs are eat, drink, go, type, read, write, listen,
speak, watch, say, grow, melt, work, sleep, cook, talk, etc.
Rule 1: A compound subject joined by or, or nor requires a singular verb if each
part is singular; if the parts differ in number or person the verb agrees
with the subject nearer to it.
e.g. My aunt or my uncle is arriving by train today.
The book or the magazines are on the shelf.
Rule 3: When one of your two subjects is I, put it second and follow it with the
singular verb am.
e.g. Neither she nor I am going to the festival.
Rule 4: Compound subjects joined by and require a plural verb, but when the
parts refer to the same person or have some other close relation, they
take a singular verb. Also, if the parts of the compound subject are
modified by each, or no, a singular verb is required,
e.g. Her professor and thesis adviser is here, (same person)
Every branch and twig was covered with dust.
No one is here.
Rule 5: Sometimes the subject is separated from the verb by words such as
along with, as well as, besides, or not. Ignore these expressions when
determining whether to use a singular or plural verb.
Rule 7: With words that indicate portions— percent, fraction, part, majority,
some, all, none, remainder, etc.— look at the noun in your of phrase
(object of the preposition) to determine whether to use a singular or
plural verb. If the object of the preposition is singular, use a singular
verb. If the object of the preposition is plural, use a plural verb,
e.g. Fifty percent of the pie has disappeared.
Fifty percent of the pies have disappeared.
All of the pie is gone.
All of the pies are gone.
Some of the pie is missing.
Some of the pies are missing.
Rule 8: When either and neither are subjects, they always take singular verbs,
e.g. Neither of them is available to speak right now.
Either of us is capable of doing the job.
Rule 9: The words here and there have generally been labeled as adverbs even
though they indicate place. In sentences beginning with here or there,
the subject follows the verb.
Rule 10: Use a singular verb with sums of money or periods of time,
e.g. Ten dollars is a high price to pay.
Five years is the maximum sentence for that offense.
Rule 11: Sometimes the pronoun who, that, or which is the subject of the verb in
the middle of the sentence. The pronouns who, that, and which become
singular or plural according to the noun directly in front of them. So if that
noun is singular, use a singular verb. If it is plural, use a plural verb,
e.g. Charlene is the scientist who writes the reports.
The word in front of who is scientist, which is singular.
Therefore, the verb writes is singular.
He is one of the men who do the work.
Men preceding who is plural. The verb do is likewise plural.
Rule 12: Collective nouns such as team and staff may be either singular or plural
depending on their use in the sentence,
e.g. The staff is in a meeting.
The staff are in disagreement about the findings.
Nouns
Nouns are names of anything that exists or that can be conceived, referring to a
person, place, thing or idea. They can also be categorized based on the following:
1. the kind of thought or perception they convey (abstract or concrete)
2. the type of matter they name (common or proper)
Possessives
1. An apostrophe is added to form the possessive case of singular and
plural nouns ending in
-s or -z; ‘s to those not ending in -s or -z.
2. An of phrase is used after nouns not related to people..
e.g. the tires of the car the surface of the road
the roof of the house the leaves of the tree
3. Nouns connected with people and human activity usually take the ‘s
form.
e.g. Proper names: Abraham Lincoln’s speech
Personal nouns: the girl’s dress
Collective nouns: the team’s success
Relating to human activity: the body’s ability
Institution: the museum’s members
4. Many phrases of time take th e ‘s form.
e.g. a month’s pay two weeks’ vacation
a year’s work season’s greetings
5. Certain idioms take th e ‘s form.
e.g. our money’s worth an arm’s length
6. Higher animals can take th e ‘s form.
e.g. a dog’s life the kitten's cry
a bird’s nest the horse’s mane
7. Double possessives using both of and the ‘s form are common with
proper nouns when reference is definite and personal.
e.g. a novel of Conrad’s a painting of Picasso’s
Plurals
8. The plural of most nouns are generally formed by adding final -s when
the singular form can be pronounced without adding a syllable, or a
final -es if the singular form ends in -s, -ch, -z, and -x that cannot unite
with s to form one syllable.
9. Plurals of figures, signs, and letters used as words add ‘s.
10. There are nouns generally used in the singular and therefore require a
singular verb. Among these are beard, food, fish, fruit, grass, hair.
11. The following nouns do not have their plural form: baggage, chalk,
furniture, jewelry, scenery, information, machinery, pottery
12. The following nouns are always plural: trousers, binoculars, scissors,
means, refreshments, forceps, pliers and falls
13. Nouns ending in -ic s are singular when they denote scientific subjects
such as Physics, Mathematics, Linguistics
14. Nouns ending in -ic s are plural when they denote activities or qualities
such as acoustics, acrobatics, athletics
15. Hyphenated nouns or compound nouns usually attach -s to the
element that is actually being pluralized: mothers-in-law, officers-in-
charge, editors-in-chief, mayors-elect.
16. Foreign plural:
E. Indefinite brick
another paper
any, each coat
either skirt
enough
much
neither
no
some
what (a)
which
whose
IV. P R O N O U N S
PLURAL we us ours
you you yours
they them theirs
The noun being referred back to is called the “antecedent” (e.g I read a book. It
was good.) The pronoun “it” refers to the antecedent noun “book”)
Possessive pronouns are not followed immediately by a noun; they stand alone,
(e.g. That book is hers.)
Possessive pronouns do NOT take apostrophes.
Possessive determiners are followed immediately by a noun; they do not stand
alone, (e.g. Her book is here.)
It has no apostrophe when used as a possessive determiner, (e.g. A bird uses its
wings to fly.)
It’s is a contraction of it is or it has.
V. A D J E C T IV E S
A. Degrees of Adjectives
Only the comparative and superlative adjectives show degrees. We use the
comparative for comparing two entities and the superlative for comparing
three or more entities.
Gladys is a rich woman, but Josie is richer than Gladys, and Sadie is the
richest woman in town.
From The Oxford Dictionary o f American Usage and Styleby Bryan Garner. Copyright 1995
by Bryan A. Garner. Published by Oxford University Press, Inc., www.oup-usa.org, and used
with the gracious consent o f Oxford University Press.
C. Collective Adjectives
D. Irregular Comparisons
E. Kinds Of Adjectives;
1. Possessive Adjectives
• modify a noun by telling whom it belongs to
• answer the question “W hose?"
• include his, her, its, my, our, their, and your
e.g.: You can share my rice.
Have you seen their house?
2. Demonstrative Adjectives
• include that, these, this, those, and answer the question
“Which?"
• used to modify a noun or pronoun
e.g.: I’m going to open that present.
Those socks look warm.
3. Interrogative Adjectives
• include what and which used in a question.
• may look like an interrogative pronoun, but it is used differently in
the sentence: it is an adjective used to modify a noun or pronoun,
e.g.: What movie do you want to see?
Which leaves turn color first?
4. Indefinite Adjectives
• An indefinite adjective gives indefinite, or general information.
• Often, it answers the question “How much?"
• Some common indefinite adjectives are all, any, each, every,
few, many, and some.
e.g.: Many children like dinosaurs.
Did you want some bananas?
A. Types of Adverbs
1. Adverbs of Manner
• provide information on how someone does something
• placed after the verb or entire expression (at the end of the sentence).
e.g. Jack drives very carefully.
Their teacher speaks quickly.
2. Adverbs of Time
• provide information on when something happens,
e.g. We’ll let you know our decision next week.
3. Adverbs of Frequency
• provide information on how oftensomething happens.
• placed after the verb or entire expression (at the end of the
sentence).
e.g. They usually get to work at eight o’clock.
4. Adverbs of Degree
• provide information concerning how much of something is done.
• placed after the verb or entire expression (at the end of the
sentence).
e.g. They like playing golf a lot.
She’ll attend the meeting as well.
5. Adverbs of Comment
• provide a comment, or opinion about a situation.
• placed at the beginning of a sentence.
e.g. Fortunately, there were enough seats left for the concert.
Luckily, I was able to come to the presentation.
USES EXAMPLES
months, years, seasons in December
in 2009
in autumn
IN enclosure in a landmark in the box
special expressions in the meantime
in addition
in contrast
days of the week and dates on Wednesday
ON on the fifth of July
contact with a surface
time at six o’clock
AT
place as a point of orientation at the corner
FROM separation from a point of orientation away from me
AND addition
BUT shows contrast
YET but at the same time
SO therefore
FOR because
OR one or the other of two alternatives is true
NOR conjoins two negative sentences, both of which are
IX. M o d a ls
Basic modals: can, could, may, might, must, ought to, shall, should, will,
would
Phrasal modals: be able to, be going to, be supposed to, have to, have got to,
used to
Modals do not take a final - s even when the subject is singular.
Correct: She can do it.
Incorrect: She cans do it.
Modals are followed by the simple form of the verb. (The only exception is
ought, which is followed by an infinitive (to + simple form of the verb)
Correct: She can do it.
Incorrect: She can does it.
X . Tag Q u estio n s
A tag question may be spoken (a) with a rising intonation if the speaker is truly
seeking to ascertain that his/her information, idea or belief is correct, (e.g.
Ann lives in an apartment, doesn’t she?}, or (b) with a falling intonation if the
speaker is expressing an idea with which s/he is almost certain the listener will
agree (e.g. It’s a nice day today, isn’t it?).
X I. B asic V erb F o rm s U s ed in C O N D IT IO N A L S E N T E N C E S
E N G L IS H P H O N O L O G Y
Effective oral discourse means being able to use grammatical structures accurately;
having the ability to express ideas, messages, and intentions meaningfully; and
observing rules of use appropriately when interacting with others in various social
contexts. In other words, a competent speaker has good pronunciation and correct
intonation, forms grammatical sentences, and uses language appropriately when
communicating with others.
• The important points o f articulation are the upper lip, the upper teeth, the
alveolar ridge (the gum behind the upper teeth), the hard palate (the bony
roof of the mouth) and again, the velum. Except for the velum, these parts
are non-movable. They are the parts of the speech apparatus near which
or against which the articulators are placed in the production of the various
speech sounds.
• The vocal cords/bands. They are two short bands of elastic flesh and
muscle located inside the larynx (Adam’s apple). The opening between
them is called the glottis. The glottis may be opened so as to cause no
obstruction in the passage of air as in normal breathing, completely closed,
or partially closed. Speech sounds produced with an open glottis are said
to be voiceless. When the vocal bands are brought so close together than
the air passing through causes the glottis to vibrate, the speech sounds
produced are said to be voiced. When the vocal bands are pressed together
so tightly as to resist considerable air pressure from the lungs, the sound
produced is a glottal stop.
B. The Phoneme
• The phoneme is a minimal significant or contrastive unit in a language. This
speech sound signals a difference in meaning, e.g., /p/, /b/, and /f/ as in
pan, ban, and fan. Note that a phoneme is enclosed in slants / /.
• A phoneme may be pronounced in different ways, depending on its position
in the utterance, and still remains the same phoneme. These variations in
pronunciation, called allophones, are enclosed in square brackets [ ]. For
example, the phoneme /p/ is pronounced differently in the following words:
pin, spin, nip. It is aspirated in pin [p"in], unaspirated in spin [spin], and
unreleased in nip [nip- ].
The first set of consonant sounds in English are the stops /p, b, t, d, k, g. They
are produced by a stoppage of air. The sounds /p, t, k/ are voiceless because
the vocal cords do not vibrate. On the other hand, /b, d, g/ are voiced. The /p,
t, k/ sounds are aspirated when they occur initially in a stressed syllable. For
example, the /t/ sound in the words ten and attend are aspirated or produced
with an accompanying puff of air. The sound M in cat and recount are likewise
aspirated. The same is true with the /p/ sound in pen and append.
The second set of sounds are the fricatives / f v 8 6 s z s z h/. They are
produced by an obstruction of the airstream causing audible friction.
Further, English has two affricates /c/ and /j/, three nasals /m n r]/,a lateral /I/,
a retroflex /r/ and two semivowels /w v/. The retroflex and the semivowels are
sometimes referred to as glides.
The following table shows the consonant sounds of English in two transcription
systems.
Awareness of certain sounds are crucial in pronouncing noun plurals, and noun
possessives as well as the third person singular inflection of regular verbs.
Similarly, it is also significant in pronouncing the regular simple past inflection.
To illustrate:
Noun plurals are spelled a s -s or -es. This plural inflection can be pronounced
in three different ways, i.e., /- s/, /-z/, or I- qtJ as shown below
The pronunciation rules defined for the plural above also apply to noun
possessives and third person singular forms of regular verbs.
Likewise, the regular simple past tense inflection -ed has three variants,
namely /t, d, ad/
/9 d / ocurs after N and /d / as in planted, hated, needed, and raided
N occurs after voiceless sounds except /t/, e.g., liked, surprised,
realized, and cooked
/d / occurs aftervoiced sounds as in loved, played, owned, and
belonged
E. S u p ra s e g m e n ta l P h o n e m e s a n d P ro so d ic P a tte rn s in English
1. Stress
• Stress refers to the degree of prominence a syllable has. In the word
forgive, the syllable -give sounds more prominent than for-. There may
be as many degrees of stress as there are syllables, but some of the
differences may be imperceptible.
• For individual words, three stress phonemes are significant. These are:
' primary stress
' mid stress
” weak stress (usually not indicated)
The word legendary illustrate all these stress.
• In words of more than one syllable, there will be one syllable which
is more heavily stressed than the others. This syllable carries the
primary stress (eg. remedy, develop, understand). In some longer
words, other syllables may carry secondary stress, e.g. legendary. The
most important thing is to recognise where the primary stress is. The
assignment of primary stress can change between words derived from
the same base (eg. photograph, photographer, photographid.
• In word groups and sentences, there are four degrees of stress:
‘ primary stress
" secondary stress
' tertiary stress
- weak stress (usually not indicated)
O R A L C O M M U N IC A T IO N a n d L A N G U A G E F U N C T IO N S
There are three elements in oral communication: the speaker, the message,
and the audience. The purpose of the speaker’s message must be appropriate
to the occasion and the intended audience. Oral communication process may be
illustrated as one-way or two-way as shown below.
ONE-WAY TWO-WAY
Public Speech Conversation
Storytelling Discussion
Announcement Interview
A. Group Communication
2. Types of Speeches
• An informative speech increases the audience’s understanding or
awareness by imparting knowledge. It provides audience with new
information, new insights, or new ways of thinking about a topic, and
introduces new ideas, events, people, places, or things.
• A persuasive speech attempts to influence the attitudes, beliefs,
values, and acts of others. It limits alternatives, seeks a response, and
respects audience choices.
• Special Occasion Speeches I
Expressions of Advice
1. Gabriel slept_________________________________________ .
A. last night in his air-conditioned room soundly.
B. soundly last night in his air-conditioned room.
C. in his air-conditioned room soundly last night.
D. soundly in his air-conditioned room last night.
Adverb in a series should follow this sequence: Manner - Frequency - Place - Time
- Cause/Reason. Choice A is incorrect because last night is an adverb o f time. Choice
B is also incorrect. Even if the choice begins with an adverb o f manner, what follows
somehow is an adverb o f time. Choice C is not the correct answer because it obviously
does not begin with an adverb o f manner. The correct answer is D because it follows
the proper order o f adverbs in a series.
3. You watched the concert last night, didn’t you? The correct response would be
Choices A and C are incorrect because the tag question made use o f a do form.
Choice B is also not correct because o f a mismatch, "yes ” is affirmative and “didn V is
negative. Therefore, the best answer is D.
5. Ross is French but Gerald isn’t; he’s Mexican. Based on the sentence, which
one is true?
A. Gerald is French.
B. Ross isn’t Mexican
C. Gerald isn’t Mexican.
D. Gerald and Ross are both Mexican.
B E G IN HERE:
P A R T III - E N H A N C IN G T E S T T A K IN G S K IL L S
DIRECTIONS: Write the letter of the word or phrases that best completes the
sentence.
1. What intonation contour or pattern applies to the question “Who will join the
parade?”
A. 232— B. 2 231 C. 231 i D. 233t
2. Which sentence is marked as 2331231 i ?
A. Do you like to join torch parade
B. We want peace, good health, and a happy family life
C. Diane, as well as her friends, are planning a trip to the north
D. Do you prefer to go swimming or jog in the park
3. Which of the following sounds in the Trager and Smith Transcription System
would you consider a critical sound for Filipino learners of English?
A. /a/ B. /iy/ C. I\l D. /uw/
4. Every woman, man or child____________the right to live.
A. have f B. has C. had D. do have
5. The excellent speaker can____________ even the most complicated ideas.
A. get across '67? get through
B. getaway D. get along
6. I drive mv neighbors up a wall with the loud banging of my new set of drums.
The underlined phrase means______
A. bump into my neighbor's fence
B. make them envious
C. annoy
D. let them listen and enjoy
7. I was simply making a tonoue-in-cheek remark. I didn’t mean to offend her. The
underlined idiom means____ .
A. impossible $ !) joke C. lie D. sketch
8. How did the students react when the teacher _ _ _ _ _ the mistakes on
their test papers?
A,_ provided for C. picked out
ffr . pointed out D. gave away
9. This book concludes with pages___________useful hints to correcting common
errors in English.
^ that contain C. that is containing
'\B. 1that contains D. that are containing
10. All political parties promise to turn the economy_____ if elected, but they
never do.
A. over B. around C. in D. on
11 . ________I prefer to live in an apartment, my husband wants to buy a house.
A. Until .■ B .) Because C. Whereas D. When
12. If you had come'to'the theater last night, you_____________ the play.
A. would enjoy C. will have enjoyed
B. will enjoy ( 1 x ) would have enjoyed
13. The students never cheated on the examination,__________
A. is there? C. do they?
B. didn't they? B' did they?
14. More of our teammates now __________ with the new policies.
(A. are agreeing C. agree
B. agrees D. is agreeing
15. By this time tomorrow, w e ________________________________ the meeting.
A. shall have C. would have
B. will have had D. have had
16. The class decided to give their teacher aIn _________________ handbag on
_ her retirement.
A. latest long-wished black leather Louis Vuitton elegant
B. black latest long-wished Louis Vuitton elegant leather
C. long-wished elegant latest black Louis Vuitton leather
0. latest elegant black long-wished leather Louis Vuitton
17. The instructor expects students_________ ________________ _
A. to attend every class, to be doing all the assignments; and hand in
homework on time.
B. to be attending every class, to do all assignments, and hand in homework
on time.
, C .; to attend every class, to do all the assignments and to hand in homework
'~on time.
D. to attend every class, to do all the assignments; and to be handing in
homework on time.
18. Which sentence contains an error?
A. The card catalogue has a subject listing for reference purposes.
B. There are certain books that can be found without using the library card
catalogue.
If a student cannot find any information lead in the author listing of the card
catalogue, they should ask the librarian.
D. Every book in the library has a call number.
19. Which of the following does not have the same meaning as the other sentences?
A. The problems about marriage and married life are what a young wife
should know in this book.
B. What a young wife should know about marriage and the possible problems
of married life are contained in this book.
C. This book contains what a young wife should know about marriage and the
possible problems of married life.
D. Contained in this book are information about marriage and possible
problems of married life which a young wife should know.
Philippine
Literature
Prepared by:.
Prof. Victor Rey Fumar
Competencies:
P A R T l-A - C O N T E N T U P D A T E
It is the theme that poets sing about and glorify in sublime and immortal poetry. It is
the wine that intoxicates. It is one o f the greatest events in life - when two passionate lips
dip into the sweet realm o f the cup o f love, while Cupid stands smiling and the angels in
heaven sing o f the faith o f two loving souls, blessing them with ineffable happiness.
Father and I hastened to the hut. He was proud o f me, but he had no intention of
making me marry that girl, he explained. He had better hopes for me. He opened his coconut
shell in which he kept his money and tool out all he had saved for years. Then we ran to
town, where my mother lived with my two sisters. Father explained what had happened.
• Stevan Javellana published his novel W ithout Seeing the Dawn, a war novel
comparable to Rizal’s masterpieces.
Her words felt like a bolt o f thunder in his ears and he could not think clearly for
some time. The boy, how had he looked? Did he ever come to learn to call his name,
saying, “Tatay - Father?" He wanted to ask her but he did not. He had come home
expecting to find peace in the bosom of his family. Peace did not welcome him, but Grief
sat there on its haunches at his doorstep.
• Jose Garcia Villa's collection of poems Have Come, Am Here revealed great
power both in thought and expression and elicited the warmest praises from
American and English critics.
Pre-War Poetry
» S.P. Lopez, prophet of socially committed literature, influenced as he
was by the social protest movement sweeping the USA at about that
time in the wake of the great economic collapse and the depression
wrote:
The real artist has a deep compassion for the suffering o f the oppressed and anger at
the oppressors. The highest form o f art is that which springs from the wells o f man's
deepest urges and longings ... his love o f his own kind and his longing to be free... of
all the ends to which he (the artist) may dedicate his talents, none is more worthy than
the improvement o f the condition o f man and the defense o f freedom.
• Jose Garcia Villa, on the other hand, believed in "art for art’s sake” : that
in art, craft comes before meaning, that poetry should never be useful
and propagandistic, that it must only arouse pleasure in the beautiful,
must lead to contemplation, not action.
• Prior to the 20’s, the poems that were written were nothing more
than mere versifications, exercises in rhetoric, using specific classical
moulds or patterns and poetic forms more for discipline than for art.
Pre-War Fiction
• Prior to the 20’s, Leopoldo Yabes said, “ the short stories are better
classified as tales rather than stories."
• The Philippine Free Press encouraged writers through its short story
contest involving a cash award of one hundred pesos for the winning
piece, aside from the regular twenty-peso publication royalty.
• By the end of the 30’s, Filipino short stories written in English already
showed more carefully crafted pieces:
a. the unified single impression or effect through atmosphere, tone,
and style
b. plausible characterization
c. a well-defined plot structure
d. control of language as medium
e. interesting situation and a significant theme
Post-War Poetry
• Modernism in poetry started in the 1950’s. The modem poet
experimented in techniques of versification, rhythm, music, and
imagery.
Post-War Fiction
• Carlos Bulosan’s Am erica Is in the H eart pursued literature’s
commitment to social problems in the choice of subject matter, the
peasants, the laborers, the interface of economic conditions and
politics.
• NVM Gonzales published Seven H ills Aw ay in 1947.
• Francisco Arcellana joined the ranks of the finest writers with his
Divide By Two by showing his artistic ingenuity in point of structure,
emotional impact, subtle manipulation of symbols, and the powerful
rhythm of his language.
• Bienvenido Santos wrote You Lovely People, his first book of short
stories about Filipino exiles in America.
“Look, ’ I said it, “one o f these days, very soon, I hope, I'll be going home. I could go
to your town. ”
‘ No," he said softly, sounding very much defeated but brave, ‘ Thanks a lot. But,
you see, nobody would remember me now."
Then he started the car, and as it moved away, he waved his hand.
‘ Goodbye," I sa id , waving back into the darkness. And suddenly the night was
cold like winter straying early in these northern wood lands.
It’s bad enough having poor around us all the time, bu t not use them their loyalty,
to fail to harness them for a man or a cause that can bring the country and themselves
much good - A ll right, we pander to their greed but if you want to ensnare people's
minds, you must dangle a bit o f bait before them.
The Essay
• The political essay became popular and most suited for the discussion
of ideas and timely issues. Nationalist writers included Renato
Constantino, Petronilo Daroy, Luis Teodoro, Jose Lacaba, Bienvenido
Lumbera, Epifanio San Juan, and Dolores Feria.
• Nick Joaquin as Quijano de Manila (his pen name) wrote many essays.
Travel essay became popular with Cristina Pantoja Hidalgo leading the
pack.
Literary critics wrote reviews and became members of the Manila
Critics Circle, among them Isagani Cruz, Alfred Yuzon, Alfrado Salanga,
Alice Guillermo, Doreen Fernandez, Rio Alma, and Ophelia Dimalanta.
B ien ven id o L u m b e ra an d C y n th ia N o g ra le s L u m b e ra in
P h ilippine Literature: A H isto ry a n d A n th o lo g y (!982 , revised
1997)) ch ro n ic le d P h ilip p in e lite ra tu re in English into:
• Literature during Pre-colonial Times (_-1564)
• Literature Under Spanish Colonialism (1565-1898)
• Literature Under American Colonialism (1898-1945)
• Literature Under the Republic (1946-1985)
• Literature After EDSA (1986-1995)
Literatura
ng Pilipinas
Inihanda ni
Prof. Victor Rey Fumar
Competencies:
P A R T l-B - C O N T E N T U P D A T E
I. A ng L iteratu ra ng Pilipinas
• Sumasaklaw sa pasalita o pasulat na pagpapahayag ng mga damdaming
ukol sa mga gawi at kaugaliang panlipunan, paraan ng pamumuhay,
kaisipang pampulitika at mga kapaniwalaang pangrelihiyon, ang mga
adhikain, ang mga pangarap - mula pa sa bukangliwayway ng kanilang
kabihasnan hanggang sa kasalukuyan
• Maaring naisulat o naisalimbibig sa iba’t ibang wikain sa Pilipinas o mga
salin sa panitikang banyaga o naisulat ng Filipino sa wikang dayuhan
Mayroon ding mga tula na may sukat at walang tugma (blank verse) at
mayroon pa ring walang sukat at walng tugma (free verse).
TOMIN: Uban, kung ibig mo sana, / dinggin mo kung mabuti na ang itatapat kong kanta
/k a y Menanggeng aking sinta.
UBAN: Kanta yata sa ambahan / di ko na ibig pakinggan.
TOMING: Marikit na kantang bayan / bago kong pinag-aratan
UBAN: Baya! Kantahin mo agad, / totonohan ko ng lundag
Mahiwalay man sa kumpas / magagamot na ng tuwad.
C. Ang Tanaga - tulang palasak nabago pa man dumating ang mga KastHa.
Binubuo ito ng apat na taludtod na may sariling pantigan.
78 PNU Li T Reviewer
General Education
“Ako'y maharlika," ang sabi ni Somusun sa Alongan kay Pilandok. ‘Ako ang anak
ng Solotan sa Agama Niyog. Kung pababayaan mong patunugin ko ang batingaw ay ■
bibigyan kita ng isang sakong ginto. "
“ Tatanggapin ko iyan kung pababayaan mo muna akong makaalis bago mo
patunugin ang batingaw."
“Sige, ‘ sabi n i Somusun sa Alongan. Ibinigay niya kay Pilandok ang sako ng ginto
at nagtatakbo si Pilandok paalis.
“Si Pilandok at ang Batingaw"- Abdullah T. Madale
b. kantahing-bayan
oyayi o holoborin - awit pampatulog ng sanggol
diona o ihim an - awit pangkasal
soliranin o ta lin d a w - awit pamamangka
kundim an - awit ng pag-ibig
tagumpay, kum intang, o tikam - awit-pandigma
c. karunungang-bayan
bugtong at palaisipan
salawikain at kasabihan
Bugtong Salawikain
Langit sa itaas, Ang kalabaw na apat ang paa, nadudulas pa.
Langit sa ibaba,
Tubig sa gitna. Ang unti-unting patak,
Sa bato nakaaagnas.
Bongbong kung liwanag,
Kung gabi ay dagat. Madali maging tao,
Mahirap ang magpakatao.
Itinanim ng gabi
Sa umaga inani.
2. Panahon ng Epiko
a. Microepic - kumpleto at maaring matapos sa isang upuan lang
b. Macroepic - ipinakikita lamang ang particular na batiagi, nag-
iisang awit
c. Mesopic - maraming masalimuot na insidente
d. Epiko ng mga Kristiano - Lam-ang, Ibalon, Labaw Donggon
e. Epiko ng mga di-Kristiyano - Alim, Tuwaang, Darangan, Agyu,
Sandayo, Bantugan
c. tuluyang pang-aliw
Barlaan at Josaphat
Mga Buhok na Nangungusap
Tandang Basio Macunat
d. dulang pang-aliw
duplo - tagisan ng talino ng dalawang pangkat sa pamamagitan ng
pagtula at ang mga kaisipang taglay ng berso ay kadalasang buhat sa
mga awit, korido, salawikain, at kasabihan.
karagatan - mimetikong laro batay sa alamat ng bisang prinsesang sa
hangad na makaisang dibdib ang binatang mahirap na kanyang iniibig
ay ihinulog sa dagat ang kanyang singsing upang sisirin ng lahat ng
kanyang manliligaw.
pangangaluluwa -
tibag - paghahanap at paghukay sa krus na pinagpakuan kay Kristo
santacruzan - marangyang parade ng mga sagala na kumakatawan
sa iba’t ibang tauhan sa Bibliya
moro-moro o komedya - paglalaban ng mga Kristiyano at mga Muslim
karilyo - binubuo ng mga papet na nilikha buhat sa ginupit na mga
karton at pinagagalaw sa harap ng puting tabing kung saan makikita
ang mga anino ng papet bunga ng ilawan sa likod ng talon
senakulo - pagsasadula ng buhay at kamatayan ni Hesus
panunuluyan - ang paghahanap ng matutuluyan nina Maria at Jose
salubong - pagsalubong ni Maria at ng muling nabuhay na si Heus
sarswela - dulang musical, binubuo ng pagsasalaysay na sinaniban ng
mga sayaw at tugtugin at may paksang mitolohikal at kabayanihan
c. Nobela o Kathambuhay
o Banaag at Sikat ni Lope K. Santos
o Pinaglahuan ni Faustino Aguilar
o Pinuno ng Tulisan ni Patricio Mariano
o Bulaklak ng Kalumpang ni Roman Reyes
o Madaling-Araw ni Inigo ed Regalado
d. Dula at Dulaan
o Severino Reyes - “ Mga Kuwento ni Lola Basyang,” “Walang
Sugat” , Gran Compana de Zarsuela Tagala
RELIGIOSO 1: Ah, si Capitang Luis. Ito tagaroon sa amin. Masamang tao ito.
MARCELO: Mason po yata among.
RELIGIOSO 1: Kun hindi man mason, marahil filibustero, sapagka’t kun siya
sumulat maraming K, kabayo ka.
MARCELO: Hindi po ako kabayo Among.
RELIGIOSO 1: Hindi ko sinasabi kabayo ikaw, hindi kun isulat niya an kabayo may
K, an lahat nan C pinalitan nan K. Masama tao iyan, mabuti
Mamatay siya.
RELIGIOSO 2: Marcelo, si Capitan Piton si Capitan Miguel at an Juez de Paz, ay
Daratdagan nan racion.
MARCELO: Hindi sila makakain en.
RELIGIOSO 2: Hindi na racion ang sinasabi ko sa iyo na dagdagan ay an pagkain,
Hindi, ano sa akin kundi sila kumain. Mabuti nga mamatay silan
lahat. An racion na sinasabi ko sa inyo ay an palo, maramin palo
na kailangan.
Nangagtigil
ang gawain
sa bukirin
napahinga
ang makina
sa pabrika.
Natiwangwang
angdaunga't
pamilihan.
A t sa madia
ay nagbanta
ang dalita.
LET Reviewer
General Education
P A R T II - A N A L Y Z IN G T E S T IT E M S
Read the excerpt in the box to answer the item below. Choose the letter of the best
answer.
The old people had ordered that the dancing should stop a t ten o'clock but it was
almost midnight before the carriages came lining up to the front door, the servants
running to and fro with torches to light departing guests, while the girls who were
staying were promptly herded upstairs in bedroom...
“May Day Eve" - Nick Joaquin
A. alliteration C. anaphora
B. assonance D. rhyme
5. What literary device is used in the closing paragraph of "Harvest,” a short story
written by Loreto Paras Sulit?
He was speaking to Tinay jokingly “Soon a ll your sampaguitas and camias will be
gone my dear aunt because I shall be seeing Milia every night... and her father. ’ He
watched Fabian cleansing his face and arms and later wondered why it took his brother
that long to wash his arms why he was rubbing them so hard as that...
A. personification C. simile
B. hyperbole D. metaphor
7. The narrative below is set during the
A trio of planes roared dangerously low. Shakily Lina and I dived into a shelter where a
Chinese consul and his family crouched and bitterly they reproached us for crowding them
in the already cramped space. Mother had run into another hole and ran out screaming
for there was in it a man with half his face shot off. Outside the shelter we could hear Boni
begging Please don't leave me... We were scattered in all directions.
"People in the War" - Gilda Cordero Fernando
A. EDSA uprising
B. Vietnam War
•^T ) Japanese Occupation
D. Philippine Revolution of 1896
What is being developed in the excerpt taken from “Morning in Nagrebcan” by
Manuel Arguilla?
Am bo was almost as tall as his older brother and he had a stout, husky legs. He ate
the banana without peeling it.
“You foolish boy, remove the skin," Baldo said.
“I will not, "Ambo said. “It’s not your banana." He took a big bite and swallowed it with
exaggerated relish.
“But the skin is tart. It tastes bad."
"You are not eating it, "Ambo said. The rest of the banana vanished into his mouth.
A setting C. conflict
characterization D. dialogue
Miss Mijares was quite sure she had boarded the right jeepney but the driver, hoping
to beat the traffic, had detoured down a side alley, and then seeing he was low in gas, he
took still another shortcut to a filling station. After that, he rode through alien country.
With confident imagination he sees a vision of Earth whole and entire the globe
revolving on its axis journeying around the sun through October and December and
the months of the summertime. Earth: he pronounces the word to himself as if to
savor its taste upon his tongue. Third planet from the sun... America Asia and Europe
westward... the cities and the towns and the villages and all the people millions o f them
living now on earth... And all the stars in the sky.
A. scientific observation
B. personal experience
metaphysical theme
Dl heavenly vision
so a ding-dong sell
and a ding-dong buy
imported cars and buses
to transport the younger pop
ulace to point of demonstration
A. anaphora X . consonance
B. assonance \T)) onomatopoeia
21. What rhythmical device is used in this line from The Small Key? “ .. .even the
low square nipa house that stood in unashamed relief against the gray green
haze of grass and leaves.”
alliteration C. consonance
B. assonance D. anaphora
22. “A bamboo flute is heard far away. Once more we hear the turtle crying.” What
sense imagery isused in this description of the scene?
A. visual (ft) auditory C. tactile D. olfactory
23. “SABINA (Irt monotone)'. Outside love, nothing lives! . . . ” What does Sabina
mean by this line?
A. Her love for Mr. George is forever.
B. Her relationship with a married man causes her humiliation and
embarrassment.
(fT ) It is better for her to die than to lose Mr. George.
D. She hates Mr. George for lying to her.
25. What does Gonzalo mean by “a little longer” in this excerpt from Guerrero’s
Three Rats?
Adrian: (Laughing)-. I expect to live a little longer, Gonzalo.
Gonzalo: A little longer is right. (Adrian’s face slowly begins to get red. He feels
a giddiness in his head - he presses his temples.)
A_ He wants Adrian to apologize for his affair with Nita.
( B y The cyanide in Adrian’s coffee is taking effect.
C. Adrian is getting drunk and incoherent.
D. His wife's infidelity makes him suffer in silence.
P A R T III - E N H A N C IN G T E S T T A K IN G S K IL L S
A. bayan C. brawnawt
B. bahay 0 bilangguan
2. Alin sa mga sumusunod ang hindilotoo hinggil sa sarswela?
A. isang dulang musikal
B. sinasaniban ng sayaw at tugtugin
(& ) karaniwang paksa ang pag-aalsa
W unang umunlad sa Espanya noong ik a -17 dantaon
3. Ang batutian ay isang mimetiko at satirikong pagtatalong patula na may
kayarian ng isang dula. Ito ay ipinangalan sa makatang si
A. Francisco Baltazar
< i> Jose Corazon de Jesus
C. Jose de la Cruz
D. Crisostomo Sotto
A. Panahon ng Amerikano
C. Panahon ng Hapones
(By Panahon ng Kastila
u. Panahon ng Batas ng Militar
5. Mula sa anong mga mamamayan ang tulang ito?
Alam natin ang katotohanan
tayo man ay nasaan:
pagsapit ng hapon
iumulubog ang araw.
"Ambahan Tungkol sa Paggawa"
A. Tagalog C. Ivatan
H i) Mangyan D. tlocano
6. Basahin ang mga linyang sumusunod._________ __________
Huwag ninyo akong alukin
ng mga taludtod
kung ang tula ay isa lamang
pumpon ng mga salita.
f f ij pagbabalatkayo C. pagtataksil
v . pagbabakasakaliD. pagmamahalan
9. Sagutin ang bugtong.
Nang bata pa 'y paruparo
Nang tumanda ay latigo.
A. saging C. singkamas
B. sinturon D. sitaw
Basahin ang bahagi ng nobela at sagutin ang tanong 10 at 11.
Nang mag-aalas singko ay hindi makalakad si Atong kahit walang dala. Hindi niya
maitapak ang kaliwang paa niya nang dala ang buong bigat ng kanyang katawan.
____ Pa'no kaya akong makakauwi nito?
____ lhahatid kita, kung gusto m o, _____ sabi ni Julio.
_____Sige na nga, pakisuyo. Sa bahayka na tuloy tsumitsa.
Sa Mga Kuko ng Liwanag - Edgardo M. Reyes
J’i o I. Vi* t o r K e y 1 u m a r
English - Philippine Literature
( £ } epiko C. kuwentong-bayan
B. koridoD. kuwento ng kababalaghan
16. Anong uri ng sinaunang porma ng literatura ang nasa ibaba?
Dagang malaki, dagang maiiit
Heto ang ngipin kong sira at pangit
Bigyan mo ng magandang kapaiit.
A. awiting-bayan C. dalit
bulong D. bugtong
World
Literature
Prepared by:
Dr. Ma. Antoinette C. Montcalegrc
Competencies:
1. s h o w k n o w le d g e o f th e different genres of
literature a n d th e e le m e n ts a n d conventions
characteristic of e a c h genre
2 . apply interpretive a n d analytical skills in
reading selec ted w o rk s in w orld literature
3 . display k n o w led g e a n d understanding of
figures o f s p ee c h a n d figurative language
4 . point out th e literary techn iques a n d devices
em p lo y ed by authors
5 . identify th e th e m e /s a n d /o r universal
insights c o n v ey e d by different literary w o rk s
in w orld literature
6 . define s o m e literary c o n c e p ts evident
in particular texts (e.g. in m ed ias res,
archetype, tragic flaw, etc.)
PART I - C O N TE N T UPDATE
1. Gilgamesh. The epic poem Gilgamesh is the first great heroic narrative
of world literature. Its origins date back to the margins of prehistory, and
its evolution spans millenia. Tablets containing portions of Gilgamesh have
been found at sites throughout the Middle East and in all the languages
written in cuneiform characters, wedge-shaped characters incised in clay
or stone. The epic developed over a period of nearly a thousand years.
The version discovered in the city of Nineveh amid the ruins of the great
library of Assurbanipal, the last king of the Assyrian empire - what modern
scholars call the Standard Version - circulated widely throughout the
ancient Middle East for a millennium or more.
The epic narrates the legendary deeds of Gilgamesh, the king of Uruk, but
it begins with a prologue that emphasizes not his adventures but wisdom
he acquired and the monuments he constructed at the end of his epic
journey. It also tells us that Gilgamesh was endowed by his divine creators
with extraordinary strength, courage, and beauty. He is more god than man
- 2/3 god and 1/3 human.
I will proclaim lo the world the deeds o f Gilgamesh. This was the man whom a
things were known; this was the king who knew the countries of the world. He was wise,
he saw mysteries and knew secret things, he brought us a tale o f the days before the
flood. He went on a long journey, was weary, worn out, returning he rested, he engraved
on a stone the whole story.
When the gods created Gilgamesh they gave him a pertect body. Shamash the
glorious sun endowed him with beauty, Adad the god of the storm endowed him with
courage, the great gods made his beauty pedect, surpassing all others, terrifying like a
great wild bull. Two-thirds they made him god and one-third man.
The ancient Egyptians possessed a poetry that was rich and varied in
tath its subjects and its forms. The largest and earliest group of poems
comes from the pyramids that were constructed in the period of the Old
The flowering of ancient Egyptian culture came between 1570 -1085 B.C,
the time of the New Kingdom in Egypt. One type of poetry that emerged I
in the New Kingdom is the pastoral poem which deals with the pleasure
of simple rural life or that treats the longings and desires of simple people.
The word pastoral comes from the Latin word for shepherd - p a s to r- bat
pastoral poetry is not merely about shepherds.
*PharoahAkhenaiai
(Translated by John L Fosta)
Point out the lines that show the use of simile and metaphor. What do they
mean? Why are they used by the speaker?
3. The Bible: The Old Testament. The religious attitudes of the Hebrews
appear in the story that they told of the creation of the world and humankind.
The most important example of Hebrew literature is the Jewish Bible (called
by Christians the Old Testament in contrast to the New Testament).
from Genesis 1
In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth. And the earth was without
form, and void; and darkness was upon the face o f the deep. And the spirit of God
moved upon the face of the waters.
And God said, Let there be light: and there was light. And God saw the light, that it
was good: and God divided the light from the darkness. And God called the light Day,
and the darkness he called Night. And the evening and the morning were the first day.
And God said let there be a firmament in the midst of the waters, and let it divide the
waters from the waters. And God made the tirmament, and divided the waters which were
under the firmament from the waters which were above the firmament: and it was so. And
God called the firmament Heaven. And the evening and the morning were the second day....
from Luke 15
Then drew near unto him all the publkans and sinners for to hear him. And the
Pharisees and the scribes murmured, saying, This man receiveth sinners, and eateth
with them.
And he spoke this parable unto them, saying, What man of you, having a hundred
sheep, if he lose one o f them, doth not leave the ninety and nine in the wilderness, and
go after that which is lost, until he find it? And when he hath found it, he layeth it on
his shoulders, rejoicing. And when he cometh home, he calleth together his friends and
neighbours, saying unto them, Rejoice with me; for I have found my sheep which was
lost. I say unto you that likewise jo y shall be in heaven over one sinner that repenteth,
more than over ninety and nine ju s t persons, which need no repentance.
Arabic Literature
By the time of Muhammad’s birth, the Arabs already possessed a large body
of poetry. For centuries, poets from ail over Arabia had gathered to recite odes
(qasidas) praising their own tribe or making fun of others. Even after the
rise of Islam, Arabs continued to appreciate poetry. Arabic prose also began
to develop, although the earliest works were religious in nature and dealt,
directly or indirectly, with the text of the Koran. Islamic Arabs also enjoyed
listening to fables and folktales. The Thousand and One N ights (also known
as The Arabian Nights) is by far the most famous. This collection of stories puts
together tales into one long narrative. One of the simplest and oldest tales in
The Thousand and one N ights is “The Fisherman and the Jinnee."
Persian Literature
The form of literature for which Persia is best known is poetry. In the 9th
and 10th centuries, several poets attempted to write epic poems describing
Persian history. The most famous of these poems is The Shah-nama, or " ’Epic
of Kings,” by Firdawsi. This epic is still considered a national treasure in Iran.
The Shah-nama is presented as a history of Persia from the beginning of the
world until the conquest of Iran by the Arabs. The most important hero is the
warrior Rustam.
C . In d ia n L iteratu re (c. 1 4 0 0 B .C . - c . A .D . 50 0)
Ancient Indians had no literary genres like the novel or the short story. Except
tor poetry and drama, most Sanskrit texts imitated the R ig-veda in attempting
to convey general and timeless truths.
Hinduism, an Indian religion, claims the Vedas as the source of all truth and
the basis of its religious beliefs. The earliest and most influential of these
sacred texts is the Rig-veda. Compiled around 1400 B.C., the Rig-veda is
a collection of 1,028 hymns composed by different authors at different times.
It also contains poems like the “Creation Hymn” which speculates about the
origin and nature of the universe.
'/ There was neither non-existence nor existence then; there was neither the
realm of space nor the sky which is beyond. What stirred? Where? In whose
protection? Was there water, bottomlessly deep?
2 There was neither death nor immortality then. There was no distinguishing
sign o f night and day. That one breathed, windless, by its own impulse. Other
than that there was nothing beyond. ’
The M ahabharata is the world’s longest epic. The myths and tales in this
epic are woven into the fabric of its main story: the account of a fight over the
rights to a kingdom. Two branches of a family, the Pandavas and the Kauravas,
are involved in this dispute. When the five Pandava brothers are banished or
exiled to the forest, they meet various characters who tell them instructive and
entertaining stories. One such story is “Sibi” about how righteous behavior is
rewarded.
Each of the five books of the Panchatantra begins with a frame story, whose
characters tell each other stories illustrating the conduct appropriate to diverse
social and political situations. The characters within the illustrative tales tell
each other stories as well and so on, until the nested tales eventually lead back
to the frame story.
One day she tucked her son in bed, took a water-jar, and said to her husband: “Now,
Professor, I am going for water. You must protect the boy from the mongoose." But
when she was gone, the Brahman went o ff somewhere himself to beg food, leaving the
house empty.
While he was gone, a black snake issued from his hole and, as fate would have it,
crawled toward the baby's cradle. But the mongoose, feeling him to be a natural enemy,
and fearing for the life o f his baby brother, fell upon the vicious serpent halfway, joined
the battle with him, tore him to bits, and tossed the pieces far and wide. Then, delighted
with his own heroism, he ran, blood trickling from his mouth, to meet the mother; for he
wished to show what he had done.
But when the mother saw him coming, saw his bloody mouth and his excitement, she
feared that the villain must have eaten her baby boy, and without thinking twice, she
angrily dropped the water-jar upon him, which killed him the moment it struck. There
she left him without a second thought, and hurried hom e,...
Sakuntala by Kalidasa is the most beloved of Indian plays. Rooted in the values
of India’s classical civilization, and at the same time articulating a profoundly
human vision, the play about lovers parted and reunited transcends cultural
particularities. The plot, adapted from an older epic tale, is simplicity itself.
In contrast to other ancient literary cultures, which begin with epics, prose
legends or hymns to the gods, the Chinese tradition begins with lyric poetry.
The Classic o f Poetry (also known as the Book o f Song^j is a collection of 305
songs representing the heritage of the Chou people. The earliest in the collection
are believed to date from around 1000 B.C. and the latest from around 600 B.C.,
at which time it seems to have reached something like its present form.
There are temple hymns to the ancestors of the Chou ruling house, narrative
ballads on the foundation and history of the dynasty, royal laments, songs of
soldiers glorifying war and deploring war, love songs, marriage songs, hunting
songs, songs of women whose husbands had deserted them, banquet songs,
poems of mourning, and others. Many seem to have originated as folk songs,
but these are mixed together with poems from the Chou aristocracy.
However simple the poems of the Book of Songs may appear on the surface,
they embody the central values (if not the realities) of early Chinese civilization.
Again and again the poems return to a fascination with timely action, to the
need to speak out, to balances and exchanges, and to acts of explanation.
For example, a young woman tosses a man a piece of fruit as a love gift, and
the young man answers with an exchange:
#64
The exchange is economically unequal, a jewel returned for fruit. But the young
man acts at once to restore the exchange to balance, explaining that the jewel
was not given as an object of value, but as a token and message, just as the
fruit she threw had been a message.
What do the plum s represent in the poem? What does each of the last line
mean? What does each imply?
Along with poetry, the most highly valued Chinese literary works are philosophical
texts. Of these books, the most notable are The A nalects of Confucius and
the Tao Te C hingo\ Lao Tzu - the principal works of Confucianism and Taoism,
respectively.
The Master said, “At fifteen I set my heart on learning; at thirty I took my stand; at forty
I came to be free from doubts; at fifty I understood the decree o f heaven; at sixty my ear
was atuned; at seventy I followed my heart's desire without overstepping the line. ’ (from
Book II)
The Master said, “It is these things that cause me concern: failure to cultivate virtue,
failure to go more deeply into what I have learned, inability, when I am told what is right, to
move to where it is, and inability to reform myself when I have defects." (from Book VII)
What values or virtues are emphasized in the two teachings from the Analects?
The Tao Te Ching is widely regarded to be the most influential Taoist text.
The title means “ The Classic o f the Way and Its Power o r Virtue.” It is a
foundational scripture of central importance in Taoism purportedly written by
Laozi. The earliest text of the Tao Te Ching that has been excavated (written on
bamboo tablets) dates back to the late 4th century B.C. It has been used as a
ritual text throughout the history of religious Taoism.
The Tao Te Ching is not thematically ordered. However, the main themes of the
text are repeatedly expressed using variant formulations, often with only a slight
difference. The leading themes revolve around the nature of Tao and how to
attain it. Tao is said to be unnameable and accomplishing great things through
small means.
E. J a p a n e s e L ite ra tu re (5 0 0 B .C . - A . D. 18 9 0)
Poetry is one of the oldest and most popular means of expression and
communication in the Japanese culture. Poetry has already existed for centuries
as part of the oral tradition of the Japanese. The first anthology of Japanese poetry
is the Manyoshu, or the “Book o f Ten Thousand Leaves.” This anthology,
containing four thousand poems, includes the works by poets from a wide
range of social classes, including the peasantry, the clergy, and the ruling class.
The poems of The Manyoshu were recorded using Chinese characters in three
different ways: for meaning, for sound when read in Chinese, and for sound
when read in Japanese. The anonymous poems in the collection, nearly two
thousand, far outnumber those by any of the known poets. The collection
includes poems that tell life in the wilderness, poems by fishermen, farewell
poems, even poems by travelers to Korea.
Another Japanese poetic form is the tanka which consists of five tines of five,
seven, five, seven, seven syllables. This poetic form shows the Japanese
preference for simplicity, suggestion, and irregularity. The most common
subjects of a tanka are love and nature. Tanka poets generally exhibit restraint,
relying on clear, powerful imagery to evoke an emotional response rather than
using abstract words to directly express their feelings. The Japanese place
more emphasis on the imagery used and the emotions evoked by a tanka than
they do on the structure of the poems.
- 0. Mitsune
Still another Japanese poetic form is the haiku, which consists of three lines
of five, seven, and five syllables. Originally it is the opening verse (the hokkdj
of a renga, a form of collaborative poetry, but later the haiku developed into a
distinct literary form. Reflecting the dominant tastes of the Japanese culture,
haiku are characterized by precision, simplicity, and suggestiveness. Almost all
haiku contains a kigo, a seasonal word, such as cherry blossoms, snow, falling
leaves.
Appearing in the early part of the 8th century, the first works of Japanese prose,
the K ojiki, or “Record of Ancient Matters,” and Nihon Shoki, or “Chronicles of
Japan,” focused on Japanese history. Before Lady Murasaki Shikibu’s Tale o f
G enji appeared, there was The Tale o f the Wez/rewriiten by an unknown author
during the 13th century. Another important work of prose produced during
the age of feudalism is Essays in Idlleness, a loosely organized collection of
insights, reflections, and observations, written during the 14th century by a
Buddhist priest named Kenko.
'How delightful it would be to converse intimately with someone o f the same mind,
sharing with him the pleasures o f uninhibited conversation on the amusing and foolish
things o f this world, but such friends are hard to find.'
The No, the classical theater of Japan, is the world’s extant professional theater.
It is also among the world’s gravest and most stylized. The word no may be
translated as “talent,” “skill,” or “accomplishment.” Performed on an austere,
undecorated stage of polished cypress, with no scenery and virtually no props,
the ritual-like poetic dance-dramas of the No have been described as a theater
free of the artifice of stagecraft. The small cast of actors, all males, wearing
masks is accompanied by a chorus, and because the stage is bare with no
trappings of representational theater, the actor’s own talent or accomplishment
(that is, his no) became paramount.
Two other forms of drama emerged later: the Jo ru ri (now called BunrakU) and
Kabuki. Joruri is staged using puppets. Kabuki involves lively, melodramatic
acting and is staged using elaborate and colorful costumes and sets.
Greek Literature
The stories told in the Homeric poems are set in the age of the Trojan War, which
archeologists date back to the 12th century B.C. The poems preserve some of the
faded memories of the Mycenean Age. This was the time of the final settlement
of the Greek peoples, an age of invasion perhaps and migration which saw the
foundation and growth of many small independent cities. The geography of Greece -
a land of mountain barriers and scattered islands - encouraged this fragmentation.
The Iliad recounts only part of a long series of events in the Trojan War, which
was fought, according to the legend, because of a quarrel among the gods and
the resulting betrayal among mortals. All the action in the Iliad is, more or less
directly, the consequence of Achilles’ anger at being dishonored.
The Greeks are also known for their ly ric poetry. One of the poets of the lyric
is Sappho - singing or chanting poems to her own accompaniment on the lyre.
The musical quality of her poems heightens their emotional quality.
Greek dram a reached its peak in the 5th century Athens. During that time,
tragedies and comedies were performed in conjunction with the worship of
Dionysus and fertility rituals connected with the seasons and the staple crops
of the community. Tragedies dealt with universal issues and indirectly with
contemporary politics, but the plots were taken from the same cycle of legends
found in the Homeric epics. Themes such as war, incest, and murder were
treated seriously.
One of the great Greek tragedians, aside from Aeschylus and Euripides, is
Sophocles. He wrote the trilogy of Oedipus Rex, Oedipus a t Colonus, and
Antigone.
What does Teiresias really want to say in lines 1 -4? What is his attitude towards
Oedipus? What line/s will support your answer?
Oedipus Rex is famous for its dramatic irony, which is the contradiction
between what the character thinks and what the audience knows to be true.
Sophocles’ use of dramatic irony brings out the play’s knowledge motif. The
knowledge Oedipus relentlessly seeks causes his downfall.
Roman Literature
Romans as well as Greeks venerated the Homeric epics, the most ancient texts
of Greek literature. To take his place alongside Homer, V irgil situates his story
at the time of the fall of Troy, and adopts conventions such as invoking the
muse, involving Olympian gods in the action, and beginning the story in medias
res. The Aeneid recombines and transforms the major works of Greek and
Roman tradition to make a new, original, and fundamentally Roman work.
Another Roman writer is C atullus who is known for his lyric poems. He is a
poet whose polished verses rivaled those of his Greek predecessors, including
Sappho. A key element of Catullus’ literary expression is his ability to make the
emotions real in his lyric poems.
What is the overall mood of the passage? What lines or words will support your
answer?
G . T h e M id d le A g e s (A. D. 4 5 0 - 1 3 0 0 )
H . T h e R e n a is s a n c e (1 3 0 0 - 1 6 5 0 )
2. Francesco Petrarca or Petrarch was the greatest Italian poet of the 14th
century. He was both well-versed in Italian and Latin. He wrote lyric poems,
especially the sonnet and the canzoni, lyrics with intricate stanzas. Majority
of his poems is dedicated to Laura. His poems contain a lot of oxymoron,
a phrase that joins two logically contradictory terms like ‘pleasant pain’ or
‘cruel kindness.’ He also uses allegory, or extended metaphor; for instance,
in one poem he compares his love to a dangerous voyage on a stormy sea,
guided by a blind pilot.
from a Petrarchan Sonnet
from Hamlet
William Shakespeare
Sonnet XXIX
I. T h e A g e o f R ationalism (1 6 5 0 -1 8 0 0 )
The age was a time of progress and betterment in human affairs. Liteature
profited from rationalism, which left its mark on poets, essayists, playwrights,
and journalists.
from Of Studies
Francis Bacon
‘Studies serve for delight, for ornament, and tor ability. Their chief use tor tig h t,
is in privateness and retiring; for ornament, is in discourse; and for ability, is in im&nent
and disposition of business. ... Some books are to be tasted, others to be svobned,
some few to be chewed and digested;. . . '
Irony is the general name given to literary techniques that involve suprising,
interesting, or amusing contradictions. Satire is writing that ridcufes or
holds in contempt the faults of individuals or of groups.
Romanticism was a literary movement that emerged in the late 1700’s out
of the revolutionary spirit fueled by the uprisings in America and Frans. The
Romantics tended to be inspired by their imagination, inner feefcgs and
Realism and Naturalism emerged during the middle of the 19th century.
Realism sought to depict life as faithfully and accurately as possible. The
Realists confronted many of the harsh realities of the 19th century world, often
presenting pessimistic visions of the world.
4. Leo Tolstoy was regarded as the greatest 19th century Russian writer. He
is remembered most for his novels War and Peace and Anna Karenina
and for his short stories like God Sees the Truth but Waits; Where Love
is, There God is Also, and How Much Land Does a Man Need? which
probed human nature and its strengths and weaknesses.
5. Edgar Allan Poe is noted not only for being the greatest American short
story writer, but also for having first standardized the short story as a
literary type. His subjects were weird, often supernatural, with no bearing
whatever on life as it is normally lived. The Raven, The Bells, and Annabel
Lee are some of his popular poems. His popular short stories are The
Cask of Amontillado, The Masque of the Red Death, Tell-Tale Heart, The
Purloined Letter, and The Pit and the Pendulum.
K. T h e M o d e rn W o rld (1890 - 1 9 4 5 )
The time that ushered in the coming of modernism saw many changes
and developments: technological revolution (the airplane, the automobile,
the radio and the television, electricity, movies, new medical remedies),
scientific breakthroughs (Mendel's work on heredity, Marie and Pierre Curie’s
breakthroughs concerning radioactivity, Einstein’s theories), World War I, the
rise of Nazism, attack on Pearl Harbor, the Holocaust.
1. Luigi Pirandello was both a dramatist and short story writer. His works
dealt with the difficulties of achieving identity and questioned the distinction
between appearance and reality. He is famous for his plays Six Characters
in Search o f an Author and It is So (If You Think So). His short stories
include A Breath o f Air, The Jar, and War which particularly reflected his
views on human nature and the emotional effects of war on people.
Where the mind is without fear and the head is held high;
Where knowledge is free;
Where the world has not been broken up
Into fragments by narrow domestic walls;
Where words come out from the. depth of truth;
Where tireless striving stretches its arms towards pedection;
Where the clear stream o f reason
has not lost its way into the dreary desed sand o f dead habit;
Where the mind is led forward by thee into ever-widening thought and action—
Into that heaven of freedom, my Father, let my country awake.'
Why does the persona stop in the woods? What figure of speech is used in
lines 5-6? What is the central irony of the poem?
His works include novels such as Farewell to Arms, The Sun Also Rises,
For Whom the Bells Toll, The Old Man and the Sea, and A Moveable
Feast. He also wrote numerous short stories like Hills Like White
Elephants, The Killers, A Clean, Well Lighted Place, Cat in the Rain,
and In Another Country.
5. Anton Chekhov is considered one of the greatest writers of the short story.
He received a medical degree at the University of Moscow in 1884, but he
soon neglected his medical practice in order to write. His numerous stories
and plays gave him a commanding position in literary Russia. He gave
a poignant illumination to such human experiences as loneliness, grief,
hunger, and misery.
Among his famous works are the plays The fiearand The Cherry Orchard,
and one of his most famous short stories is The Lady with the Dog which
depicts what at first seems a casual liaison between a married man and a
married woman. Neither expects anything lasting from the encounter, but
they find themselves drawn back to each other, risking the security of their
family lives.
6. James Joyce was an Irish author of the 20th century. He is best known
for his novels Ulysses (1922) and Finnegan’s Wake (1939), as well as
the short story collection Dubliners (1914) and the semi-autobiographical
From Eveline
She sat at the window watching the evening invade the avenue. Her head was
leaned against the window curtains and in her nostrils was the odour o f dusty cretonne.
She was tired.
Home! She looked round the room, reviewing all its unfamiliar objects which she
had dusted once a week for so many years, wondering where on earth all the dust came
from. Perhaps she would never see again those familiar objects from which she never
dreamed o f being divided.
She had consented to go away, to leave her home. Was that wise? She tried to
weigh each side o f the question. In her home anyway she had shelter and food; she had
those whom she had known all her life about her. Of course she had to work hard, both
in the house and at business. What would they say o f her in the Stores when they found
out that she had run away with a feltow?
What figure of speech is used in 1... the evening invade the avenue’? What
is the mood of the persona? What words/passages point to this?
3. The Chilean poet Pablo Neruda drew the inspiration for some of his best
poems from objects that others hardly notice. Much of Neruda’s later work
expresses political sentiments. In 1971 he received the Nobel Prize for
Literature. One of his famous poems is The United Fruit Co.
Why does Neruda use a biblical allegory in the first three lines? What tone
does he want to achieve in using such allegory?
Why does the persona have to confess over the phone that he is African?
Why is the landlady silent as soon as the persona confessed that he is
African?
5. The Indonesian writer Pramoedya Ananta Toer wrote novels, short stories,
essays, and histories of his homeland and his people. His works span
the colonial period, Indonesia’s struggle for independence, the Japanese
occupation during WW II, as well as post-colonial authoritarian regimes
of Sukarno and Suharto. Two of his best known works are The F u rtive
(a novel) about how Indonesians lived and suffered during the Japanese
occupation, and the short story Inem is about the traditions of Indonesia.
from Inem
Pramoedya Ananta Toer
Inem was my friend. She was eight, two years older than I was. She was ju st like
all the other girls, except that she was thought to be rather pretty. People liked her. She
was polite, natural, intelligent and a good worker. Because of this she quickly became
well-known in the village and people began to say: ‘Inem would be a good daughter-in-
law to have. ’
Then one day, as she boiled water in our kitchen, she told me: “Muk, I'm getting
married. "
“Really? ’ I said.
“Yes. Someone asked for me a week ago. My parents and kin have accepted him ."
“Imagine being married!" I shouted.
It was true. Her mother came one day and talked to my mother. Inem had been
entrusted to my parents. She helped with the cooking and looked after me and the
others when we played.
Mother tried to dissuade her, but Inem's mother had other reasons. Finally she said:
“I'm glad someone's asked for her a t last. If we postponed this, perhaps no one would
ask for her again. I 'd be ashamed o f her if she was an old maid. Perhaps she can make
things easier for me when I'm old."
How would you characterize Inem’s mother? What is she really worried
about?
6. Siew Yue Killingiey was a Malaysian poet, dramatist, teacher, and linguist.
A Q uestion o f D ow ry and E verything’s Arranged published in Twenty-
Two M alaysian S tories (1968) brought her immediate recognition and
probably urged her to cultivate a literary career alongside her professional
teaching and research duties.
32. Irony - a contrast between what is stated and what is meant, or between
what is expected to happen and what actually happens. In verbal irony, a
word or a phrase is used to suggest the opposite of its usual meaning. In
dramatic irony, there is a contradiction between what a character thinks and
what the reader or audience knows to be true. In irony of situation, an event
occurs that directly contradicts the expectations of the characters, of the
reader, or of the audience.
33. Litotes - a figure of speech that makes a deliberate understatement to affirm
by negating its opposite, (e.g. Barbara Streisand is not a bad singer.)
34. Local color - the use of characters and details unique to a particular place
or geographic area.
35. Lyric poem - a melodic poem that expresses the observations and feelings
of a single speaker.
36. Metaphor - a figure of speech in which one thing is spoken of as though it
were something else. It expresses an indirect or implied comparison of two
things which are not evidently comparable.
37. Metonymy - a figure of speech that entails using a word that closely relates
to a person or thing, (e.g. The pen is mightier than the sword.)
38. Mixed metaphor - when two metaphors are jumbled together, e.g. the
thorns o f life rained down on me.
39. Onomatopoeia - the use of words that imitate sounds, e.g. buzz, hiss,
murmur, hum.
40. Oxymoron - a figure of speech that combines two opposing or contradictory
ideas, (e.g. freezing fire, cruel kindness)
41. Paradox - a statement that seems to be contradictory but actually presents
a truth. It is surprising or shocking to draw the readers’ attention to what is
being said, e.g. ‘Because I could not stop for death/He kindly stopped for me.’
42. Parody - a humorous imitation of a literary work, one that exaggerates or
distorts the characteristic features of the original.
43. Personification - a figure of speech that gives human traits to inanimate
objects or ideas.
P A R T II - A N A L Y Z IN G T E S T IT E M S
' f i
Choose the best or correct answer.
Read the passage below and answer the questions that follow.
There you have it. You'll soon show what you are,
Worth your breeding, Ismene, o ra coward-
For all your royal blood.
2. What would best describe the character of Antigone based on the excerpt?
A. sensitive and moody
B. brave and determined
C. kind and forgiving
D. unfeeling and mean
The best answ er is B. Antigone is ready to defy King Creon's orders even at the pain
o f death. The punishment is nothing compared to what she will fulfill as a dutiful sister
to Poiynices.
5. Creon suffers the consequence of his overweening pride. He lost his loved ones.
This reversal of fortune of Creon is termed a s __________________ .
A. ananke B. danke C. mimesis D. peripeteia
The best an sw er is D. Again this question asks for your prior knowledge. This calls for
the use o f your stock knowledge.
Read the poem below and choose the best answer to the questions that follow.
VIII
5. Theproverbimpliesthatakingwhoruleswellisonewho__________________
A. believes he is a god enjoying his power
B. can make his country prosperous
C-^does not exact high taxes
l\Jtreasures his kingdom not his position
1 “You wine sack, with a dog's eyes, and with a deer's heart. Never
2 once have you taken courage in your heart to arm with your people
3 for battle, go into ambuscade with the best o f the Achaians [the Greeks],
4 No, for in such things you see death. Far better to your mind
5 is it, all along the widespread host o f the Achaians
6 to take away the gifts o f any man who speaks up against you.
7 King who feeds on your people, since you rule nonentities,
8 otherwise, son ofAtreus, this were your last outrage.
9 ... And this shall be a great oath before you:
10 some day longing for Achiileus will come to the sons o f the Achaians,
11 all o f them. Then stricken at heart though you be, you will be able
12 to do nothing, when in their numbers before man-slaughtering Hektor
13 they drop and die. And then you will eat out the heart within you
14 in sorrow, that you did no honor to the best o f the Achaians."
A. metonymy C. metaphor
B. simile (t^ ) synecdoche
Read the passage below and then choose the best answer to the questions that
follow.
It was in this apartment also, that there stood against the western wall, a gigantic
clock o f ebony. Its pendulum swung to and fro with a dull, heavy, monotonous clang; and
when the minute-hand made the circuit of the face, and the hour was to be stricken, there
came from the brazen lungs o f the clock a sound which was clear and bud and deep
and exceedingly musical, but o f so peculiar a note and emphasis that, at each lapse of
an hour, the musicians o f the orchestra were constrained to pause, momentarily, in their
performance, to hearken the sound; and thus the waltzers perforce ceased their evolutions;
and there was a brief disconcert of the whole gay company; and while the chimes o f the
clock yet rang, it was observed that the giddiest grew pale, and the more aged and sedate
passed their hands over their brows as if in confused reverie or meditation.
Is there forgiveness?
D. Who is God?
PA R T III - E N H A N C IN G T E S T T A K IN G S K IL L S
Read the excerpt below from a poem and then choose the letter of the best answer
to the questions that follow.
3. The exchange of witty, biting dialogue in a drama just like what is in the excerpt
from Oedipus Rex is an example o f_________________________ .
A. stichomythia C. hubris
B. in medias res D. hammartia
4. Teiresias reveals in lines 1 and 2 that Oedipus is the man who murdered the
former king of Thebes, but Oedipus does not know this. Everybody in the play
knows that Oedipus is the murderer except himself. Sophocles, the dramatist,
used to emphasize the sad fate of Oedipus.
A. epiphany C. mimesis
B. peripeteia D. irony
5. Based on his lines, Oedipus shows h is __ toward
Teiresias.
© arrogance
B. respect
6. On the other hand, Teiresias looks at Oedipus with in his
heart.
A. guilt
B. fear D. hatred
Read the excerpt below and choose the best answer to the questions that follow.
‘It tastes like licorice," the girl said and put the glass down.
"That's the way with everything. ’
“Yes, ’ said the girl. ‘Everything tastes of licorice. Especially all the things you’ve wanted
so long for, like absinthe."
“Oh, cut it out."
“You started it," the girl said. I was being amused. I was having a fun time."
“Well, let's try and have a fine time."
“Allright. Iwastrying. I said the mountains looked like white elephants. Wasn'tthatbright?"
“That was bright."
“I wanted to try this new drink. That's all we do, isn’t it - look at things and try new
drinks."
“I guess so."
The girl looked across a t the hills.
“They're lovely hills," she said. “They don't really look like white elephants. I ju st meant
the coloring of their skin through the trees."
“Should we have another drink?’
“A ll right."
The warm wind blew the bead curtain against the table.
“The beer’s nice and cool," the man said.
"It's lovely," the girl said.
“It’s really an awfully simple operation, Jig," the man said. “It's not really an operation
at a ll.’
The girl looked at the ground the table legs rested on.
“I know you wouldn't mind it, Jig. It's really not anything. It's ju s t to let the air in. ’
The girl did not say anything.
“I'll go with you and I'll stay with you all the time. They just let the 'air in and then it's
perfectly natural. ’
1. The characters in the story are actually confronted with a problem. It seems
that the solution the man is suggesting is ___________________ .
A. to break up to cool off
B. to get an abortion D. to get married
8. The expression ‘the mountains looked like white elephants’ shows the use of
_________________ as a figure of speech.
^ simile C. oxymoron
B. metaphor • D. synecdoche
9. In the exchange of the dialogue, the female character is evidently_______ _ .
@ tired and uneasy £. angry and sarcastic
B. sad and disappointed D. irritable and impatient
10. In the last part of the excerpt, the female character did not say anything to the
man’s suggestion. Her silence could mean that she __________ ;__________ .
A. agrees with the suggestion of the man
B. wants to drink more and just forget about the problem
C. is touched by the man’s concern for her
(Ey realizes the sad state of her relationship with the man
11. The idea that a thing is like a white elephant means that it is ______________ .
A. precious and rare beautiful but useless
8. remarkable but obsolete v . distinct and special
Read the poem below and then choose the best answer to the questions that follow.
Sonnet XXIX
William Shakespeare
12. In the first eight lines, the persona says that he______________________.
@ is poor and envious of people who have more wealth and talent
B. feels embarrassed every time he sees the person he loves
C. has been abandoned by God and he has no one else in this world
D. feels shy when other people look at him with pity in their eyes
13. In the last six lines of the poem, the persona compares himself to a lark. He
realizes then that h e _____________________ .
A. will remain poor all his life C. is luckier than the lark
( & ) should be happy withhis life D. can be a king someday.
14. Tne use of 'deaf heaven’ in line 3 is an example of a
A. metaphor C. hyperbole '
B. synecdoche D. metonymy
15. Theuseof'men’seyes' in line 1 is an example of a ________________________ .
A. metaphor C. hyperbole
synecdoche D. metonymy
Read the excerpt below and choose the best answer to answer the questions that follow.
From The Song o f Roland (ft171)
A. hyperbole C. oxymoron
B. personification 0 apostrophe
19. in this scene, Roland is evidently_________________________ .
A. relieved and contented
sad and regretful
C. angry and bitter
D. grateful and happy
20. The sword is precious to Roland as shown in this scene. The sword is a
metaphor for Roland’s _______________________ .
A. devotion and loyalty to the king
B. supremacy and skill in battle
{ 0 courage and heroic conquests
D. faith and trust in the Lord
21. The characters Kriemhild and Siegfried are found in the epic_____________ .
A. The Aeneid
The Nibelungenlied
C. The Shah-nama
D. ElCid
22. J h e Nymph’s Reply to the Shepherd is a parody o f________________ ____.
6\J The Passionate Shepherd to His Love
B. Song to Celia
C. The Indian Serenade
"5 0 - Ode to the West Wind
j j t22
f c l PNU LET Reviewer
General Education
23. One outstanding and distinct feature of Latin American literature is the use of
: Kasanayan:
ih Ajvciu.* R. Kmpcratio
Filipino - Komunikasyon sa Akademikong 1 ilipino
B A H A G I I - B A L IK -A R A L S A N IL A L A M A N :
M G A B A TA YA N G K O N S E P T O S A P A G -A A R A L N G W IK A
> Paano natin maipakikita na nagagamit natin ang wikang Filipino nang may
lalong mataas na antas ng kasanayan at kahusayan?
K jc fc S pW i LET Reviewer
General Education
B A H A G I I! -P A G S U S U R I S A M G A A Y T E M
M G A T E K N IK S A P A G S A G O T N G M G A T A N O N G
Item 1.
A. tono
B. diin
C. haba
D. antala
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagtukoy ng Wastong Gamit ng Ponemang Suprasegmental
(Tono, Haba, Diin, Antala)
Opsyon A.
Tono, tumutukoy sa taas-baba na iniuukol natin sa pagbigkas ng pantig ng
isang salita. Walang magiging pagbabago sa kahulugan kahit na baguhin pa
ang tono.
(a)
3ma
’ka
'sa
(b)
*ka
'ma
Opsyon B.
Diin, tumutukoy sa lakas ng bigkas sa pantig ng salita. Kahrt pagbagu-
baguhin ang lakas ng pagbigkas sa tatlong pantig na ka-, - s a - at - ma
mananatili pa rin ang kahulugan ng salita.
Opsyon D.
Antala, ang saglit na pagtigil sa pagsasalita, wala pa rin itong magiging
epekto sa kahulugan ng salitang / ka sa. ma / = 'companion’
A. bayan-bayan
B. batikbayan
C. kabayanan
D. kabayanihan
Anotasyon
Mga Tekriik sa Pagtukoy ng Kawastuan sa Pagbuo ng Salita
(Kayarian ng Pangngalan)
Opsyon A.
Batay sa kayarian ng pagbuo ng salita ito ay halimbawa ng pangngalang
inuulit. (bayan-bayan)
Opsyon B.
Batikbayan, halimbawa ng pangngalang tambaian. (balik + bayan)
Opsyon C.
Pangngalang maylapi / hinango ang tawag sa kabayanan.
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagtukoy ng Kawastuan sa Pagbuo ng Pangungusap
(Gamit ang mga Uri ng Pandiwa)
Opsyon A.
Mga Opsyon C at D.
Item 4.
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagtukoy ng Wastong Pagbabahagi ng Damdamin
(Pagpuri)
3. Ang tamang sagot ay C. Isang magandang gawi ang pagiging matapat kung
tayo’y pumupuri sa ating kapwa. Karaniwan, pinupuri natin ang kasuotan ng
kausap kung talagang dapat purihin.
Opsyon D. Kung hindi rin lang tapat sa ating kalooban ang sasabihin, mas
mainam na huwag nang kumibo.
Item b.
Uriin ang isblo ng usapan gamit ang batayan: wika ayon sa pormalidad ng pagkagamit.
A. formal oseryoso
B. intimeyt o kilalang-kilala
C. konsultatibo o sumasangguni
D. kaswal
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagtukoy ng Wika ayon sa Pormalkiad ng Pagkagamit
Opsyon A.
Opsyon C.
Item
6. May mga pagkakataon na maaaring palitan ng ibang ponema / tunog ang
isang ponema nang hindi magbabago ang kahulugan ng salita tulad ng
Pagbasa at
Pagsulat tungo
sa Pananaliksik
Inihanda ni:
Arsenia R. Emperado, Ph.D.
jKasanayan:
B A H A G II - B A L IK -A R A L S A N 1 L A L A M A N
M G A B A TA Y A N G K O N S E P T O
1. Pagpapakahulugan sa pagbasa
• Pagkilala at pagkuha ng mga ideya at kaisipan sa mga simbolong
nakalimbag upang mabigkas nang pasalita ang mga ito. Pag-unawa ito sa
wika ng awtor o manunulat ng mga nakasulat na simbolo (Semorlan, et al.,
1999).
• Sinasabing unang hakbang sa pagtatamo ng kaalaman. Tumutukoy sa
kognitibong proseso ng pag-unawa sa mensahe ng wikang nakasulat.
Isang proseso ng pagkuhang muli at pag-unawa sa mensahe ng ilang anyo
ng nakaimbak na mga impormasyon o mga ideya (Alejo, et al., 2005).
• Mahalagang salik sa pagbasa ang papel ng dating kaalaman o ang teorya
ng iskema. Inumpisahan ni Barlett (1932) at nilinang nina Anderson (1977)
at Rumelhart (1981) ang teoryang ito na nagsasaad na nakaiimpluwensiya
nang malaki sa pag-unawa kung ano ang mga alam na o hindi- alam ng
mambabasa.
2. Pagpapakahulugan sa pagsulat
• Paggawa o pagbuo ng mga titik, simbolo, at mga salita. Isang paraan
upang ang mga mahahaiagang bagay na hindi matandaan ay muling
mapagbalikan sa isipan (Lorenzo, et al., 2001).
• Isang mabagal at kompleks na proseso at itinuturing na isang sining na
nangangailangan ng malalim na pag-unawa at pag-iisip (Badayos, 2000).
Karaniwang
Anyo Paglalarawan
Aplikasyon
Saklaw ang lahat ng
Tinipong katibayan sa paksa.
pang-akademikong
Paglalarawan Paggamit ng pang-uri at pang-
gawain, sining,
abay
musika, P.E.
Pag-iisa-isa ng mga halimbawa
Pagtatala Agham, Matematika
na may kaugnayan sa paksa
Pagpapahayag ng kaayusan
Pagsusunod-sunod ng mga hakbang, proseso o Agham, Matematika
pamamaraan
14. Magiging batayan ng maayos na dokumentasyon ang anyo o klase ng tala tulad
ng:
direktong sipi - buod ng tala - presi
sipi ng sipi - hawig (paraphrase) - salin/sariling salin
BAHAG1 II - P A G S U S U R I S A M G A A Y T E M
M G A T E K N IK S A P A G S A G O T N G M G A T A N O N G
Item 1
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagkuha ng Pangunahin at Kaugnay na Detalye
Item 2.
Tuklasin kung paano naisasalin ng awtor ang kanyang iniisip sa anyong pasulat
upang ang makababasa nito ay magaganyak na mag-isip, kumilos at matuto.
Kilalanin kung anong istilo o hulwaran ang ginamit ng awtor sa pagsulat ng pang
akademikong babasahing matatagpuan sa ibaba.
Artikulo:
Tatlong (3) Sangkap ng Memorya
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagkilala sa Hulwaran o Istilo ng Awtor sa Pagsulat
Item 3.
Anong hulwaran ng organisasy >n o paano inilahad ng awtor ang mga impormasyon
o ideya sa teksto?
A. pagbibigay depinisyor
B. enumerasyon o pag-ii ;a-isa
C. paghahambing at kon ?ast
D. sanhi at bunga
Anotasyon
Sa Item 3
Sapagkat ang wika ay buhay, kaya laging tumatanggap ng mga bagong salita.
Sa talatang binasa, ginamit ang salitang imported. Sa ating pakikisangkot
sa industriyalisadong bansa upang makaagapay tayo sa kanilang kaunlaran,
malawakan ang dating ng mga bago o hiram na salita.
Ipagpalagay nating nais nating makita kung paano gagamitin ng awtor ang
hulwarang pagbibigay depinisyon sa paglalahad ng impormasyon sa teksto.
Gamitin natin ang salitang imported na bagay.
Item A ____________________________________________________________
1 Sitwasyon: Nagkaroon ng suliranin si Nena tungkol sa kalusugan ng anak.
2 Kotustrum ang tawag sa unang labas ng gatas ng ina. Ito ay malapot, manilaw-
nilaw at masustansya. Ito ay may anti-bodies na panlaban sa pagtatae,
pulmunya at iba pang sakit na maaaring dumapo sa bagong silang na sanggol.
Mainam din ang kolustrum pamurga at laksatibo o pampalabas ng “taon”.
3 Ganito ang ginawa ni Nena.
4 Kapanganganak pa lamang ni Nena. Napansin niyang manilaw-nilaw ang
gatas na lumalabas sa kanya. Inisip niyang panis ito. Hindi niya ito ipinasuso
sa kanyang sanggol. Makaraan ang isang buwan, napansin ni Nena na
malimit magtae ang kanyang sanggol. Hindi naman ito tinutubuan ng ngipin.
Mahina rin ang katawan ng kanyang sanggol.
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagbuo ng Hinuha o Palagay
Pagbuo ng Hinuha:
Ayon kina Winnie, Graham, at Prock (nabanggit kay Gunning, 1996) may
daiawang uri ng pagbuo ng hinuha: schema-based a t text-based.
• Sa schema-based inference, hinahayaan ang mambabasa na magdagdag
sa nilalaman ng teksto ng mga impormasyon batay sa ipinahihiwatig ng
may-akda.
• Sa text-based inference, nangangailangan ito ng pagbuo ng impormasyon
sa pamamagitan ng “pagtatagpi” ng dalawa o mahigit pang bahagi o
piraso ng pangyayari/impormasyon mula sa teksto.
A. I. Simula
A.
B.
B. II. Naidudulot ng beer sa tao at lipunan
A. Kabutihang naidudulot
B. Kapinsalaang naidudulot
C. II. Katawan
D.lll. Wakas
Anotasyon
MgaTeknik sa Pagsunod sa mga Prinsipyo ng Pagbabaiangkas
Opsyon A, C at D.
Hindi gumagamit ng Simula, Katawan, at Wakas bilang pangunahing bahagi
o heading ng isang balangkas.
A. I. Gamit ng computer
A. Kalikasan
B. Katangian
B. I. Kalikasan ng computer
A. Katangian
B. Gamit
C. I. Katangian ng computer
A. Kalikasan
B. Gamit
D. Walang tamang sagot
Anotasyon
MgaTeknik sa Pagsunod sa mga Prinsipyo ng Pagbabalangkas
Item 5.2
B ang tamang sagot.
Tiyakin na ang mga ideyang ilalagay sa Bahagi I, II, at III ay talagang
pangunahin, pangkalahatan o pinakamahalagang ideya at hindi pansuporta o
di-pangunahing ideya.
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagsunod sa mga Prinsipyo ng Pagbabalangkas
Item 5.3
Opsyon A ang tamang sagot.
Nakatutulong sa ikalilinaw hindi lamang ng baiangkas kundi pati na ng ideya
at ng nilalaman nito kung magagamit ang paralelismo sa pagpapahayag tulad
ng sa istruktura ng dalawang salita: pangkalusugan at pangkultura.
Opsyon D. Bitin ang ideya sa opsyong ito. Kung may A, dapat may B. Hindi dapat
hayaang bitin ang mga ideya sa bawat bahagi ng baiangkas. Tiyaking may
di-bababa sa dalawang ideya sa bawat lebel ng baiangkas.
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagsunod sa mga Prinsipyo ng Pagbabalangkas
Item 5.4
Opsyon B ang tamang sagot.
Kailangang maging konsistent ang anyo o ang mga bahagi ng sang
balangkas. Sa B, balangkas papaksa ang uring ginamit, bawat bah gi ay
binubuo ng mga salita kaya’t konsistent ang uri.
Opsyon A. Di-konsistent ang mga bahagi. Sa una, papaksa; ang ikalawa n ma’y
papangungusap.
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagsunod sa mga Prinsipyo ng Pagbabalangkas
Item 5.5
Opsyon B ang tamang sagot.
Hindi lamang sa uri ng baiangkas dapat maging konsistent ang mga bahagi
kundi pati na rin sa bantas at format.
Item 6.
Sa pagpili ng paksa, suriin mong mabuti kung ang saklaw nito ay lubhang
napakalawak at hindi mo kayang isakatuparan. Kinakailangan.kung gayon,
na ito'y limitahan mo lamang sa aspektong maisasagawa mo sa loob ng
itinakdang panahon. Halimbawang nais mong talakayin ang tungkol sa
paksang polyusyon sa tubig sa Pilipinas. Malawak ang saklaw ng paksang ito.
Maaaring paliitin ang saklaw ng paksa sa pamamagitan ng pagsasaalang-
aiang lamang sa alinman sa mga sumusunod na subtopic o aspekto. Alin sa
mga sumusunod ang hindi maliit ang saklaw ng paksa?
A. Ang kahalagahan ng pagkontrol ng polyusyon sa mga ilog at lawa
B. Ang bahaging ginagampanan ng mga industriya at mga ahensya ng
pamahalaan sa pagdurumi ng mga ilog at lawa
C. Ang talaorasan (time table) sa pagkontrol ng polyusyon sa mga ilog at lawa
D? Ang epekto ng polyusyon sa buong Pilipinas
tem 7.
Halimbawang ang napili mong paksa mula sa talaang ibinigay ng guro ay -
PAGHAHALAMAN. Pinaliit mo ito at ang tiyak na paksa ay MGA HALAMAN6
GAMOT. Upang malinartg ang pagtalakay sa paksa, kailangang maghanda ng mga
katanungang nagsusuri, tumitiyak, nagbibigay sintesis (pagbubuo) tumutunton
sa pinagmulan, naghahambing o kaya’y nagtatatag. Alin sa mga sumusunod
na tanong ang hindi nagsaalang-alang sa patnubay na nabanggit sa itaas?
A. Paano nakikilala ang mga halamang gamot?
B Ibigay ang kahulugan ng halamang gamot.
C. Anu-anong halamang gamot ang magagamit sa iba't ibang sakit?
Dy Gaano nakatutulong sa ordinaryong mamamayang Pilipino ang mga
halamang gamot?
Stem 8.
Pagkatapos mong mapili ang paksa, ang pagsisiyasat ng mga materyales
sa aklatan na mapagkukunan ng mga kinakailangan mong impormasyon
ang isusunod mong hakbang. Suriin mong mabuti ang pagkakasunud-sunod
ng mga kard. Pagkatapos, piliin kung anong kard ang kinapapalooban ng
binabanggit na paksa sa ibaba.
Population
A. A B I-A U C. PO L-PUT
B. PAIN-PLUM D. QUA-QUO
Item 9.
Narito naman ang talaan ng pinagsamang Author - Title Cards. Piliin kung
anong drawer ang kinapapalooban ng sumusunod na awtor ng aklat.
Peters, Edward I.
Arsenia R. Emperado
Filipino - Pagbasa at Pagsulat tungo sa Pananaliksik
A. Ead-Eys C. POE-PYT
B. PAC-PLUM D. Q A F - QUIRK
Item 10.
1. Mag-iinterbyu ng mga hematologist, mga doktor na espesyalista sa pagsusuri
ng dugo.
2. Sisiyasatin ang mga sanhi ng leukemia.
3. Batay sa DOH, pantima ang leukemia sa sanhi ng kamatayan ng mga Pilipino.
4. Bubuo ng modyul kaugnay ng sakit na ito.
A. 3 - 4 - 1 - 2 C. 3 - 2 - 1 - 4
B.^ 2 —3 — 1 —4 D. 2 - 3 - 4 - 1
Item 11.
1. Pakikipanayam sa mga namumuno sa lokal na pamahalaan kaugnay ng
kanilang environmental campaign.
2. Malaking suliranin ang maruruming ilog sa lalawigan ng Bulacan.
3. Tatangkaing sugpuin ang patuloy na karumihan ng mga ilog.
4. Pagpapalabas ng sirkulasyon ng babasahin ukoi sa wastong pangangalaga
sa kapaligiran.
A. 2 - 3 - 1 - 4 C. 1 - 4 - 3 - 2
B. 3 - 2 - 4 - 1 D. 4 - 2 - 1 - 2
item 12.
Naririto ang mga impormasyong bibiiyograpikal. Pitiir> ang tamang
pormat.
Simplicio P. Bisa
Retorika para sa mabisa at masining na pagsulat
De La Salle University Press, inc.
1999
Maynila
Artikulo:
Pamumuno
Leadership
Ano ang pamumuno?
Kapag iniisip mo ang tungkol sa pamumuno, ano ang pumapasok sa iyong
isipan? Ang walang takot na tagapag-utos na opisyales na pinamumunuan ang
kanyang tropa patungo sa labanan? Ang presidente ng Amerika na nagtatalumpati
sa kanyang bansa sa pamamagitan ng telebisyong pangnasyonal? Ang pinuno
na representante ng mga estudyante? Maaari ring iniisip mo ang namumuno ng
komite o lupon na iyong kinabibilangan. Kadalasan, ang pag-aaral tungkol sa
pamumuno ay nakasentro sa mga taong naging matagumpay sa pagkakaroon ng
posisyong namumuno. Ayon sa mga mananaliksik, sa pamamagitan ng pagtingin
sa mga matatagumpay na mga pinuno ay maaari nilang kilalanin at alamin ang
mga kadahilanan o mga indibidwal na katangian na makapagsasabi ng mga
abilidad at kakayahan ng tamang pamumuno. Ang pag-alam sa mga katangiang
ito ay malaki ang magiging kahalagahan sa larangan ng negosyo, gobyerno, o
sa militar na may responsibilidad sa pagtataguyod o pagbibigay sa ibang tao ng
posisyon ng pagkalider.
Mula sa: Semorlan, e t al. (1999). Pagbasa a t Pagsulat
sa Iba’t Ibang Disiplina.
d. 119- 120
Item 13.
Halimbawa ito ng artikulo/babasahing may hulwarang_______.
A. pag-iisa-isa C. paghahambing at pagkokontrast
B. depinisyonD. problema at solusyon
Item 14.
Aling salita ang walang kaugnayan sa pangunahing ideya ng artikulo?
A. pinuno C. presidente
• B. tagapag-utos . • d! mananaliksik
Item 15.
Gamit ang graphic organizeram-anong salita ang maiuugnay sa pamumund?
Artikulo (Sosyolohiya)
Relihiyon
O r. A rscn ia R . Eropcrado
Filipino - Pagbasa at Pagsulat tungo sa Pananaliksik
Item 16.
Kiialanin ang mga istilong ginamit ng awtor sa paglalahad ng teksto. Alin ang
dapat pang idagdag? Depinisyon, pag-iisa-isa o enumerasyon,____________
A. Paghahambing at pagkokontrast
B. Problemaatsolusyon
C. Pagsusunud-sunod (paraan o pFoseso)
D. Walang tamang sagot
Item 17. • •
Anong uri ng klasipikasyon ang inilalahad dito?
A .' lipunan " C. simbahan
B. pamahalaan • D. paaralan' •
Item 18. .
Kung gagamiti'n ang graphic organizer na nasa ibaba, makatutulong ito upang
maiayos mo ang impormasyong nabasa.
KLASIPIKASYON KATANGIAN
1
2
3
4
Item 19.
Anong dalawang bagay ang pinaghahambing?
A. uri ng tao C. pagkahiyang sa gamot
B. uri ng gamut D. dosageng gamot
Item 20.
Paano nagkakaiba ang dalawang bagay na pinaghahambing sa Item 19?
A. dosage C. gamot
B. epekto D. tao
• • • • .
Item 21.
Ano ang pinakaangkop na damdaming napapaloob sa sumusunod na pahayag?
Marahil malapit na akong suwertehin. Sa susunod na buwan, higit na
maraming tiket ang akmg bibilhin.
A. panghihinayang C.. kawalang pag.-asa
B. 'pag-asa‘ ‘ D. kasiyaha’n
/ •
______________________________________________________
D r. Arsenin R . Em pcrado
G enera! E d u catio n
Item 23.
Anong damdamin ang ipinahihiwatig ng sumusunod na pahayag?
Hustisya! Meron pa ba niyan? "
A. pagmamahal C. panghihinayang
B. pag-asam D. i poot
Item 24.
Pagkatapos mong basahirj ang artikulo, anong kaisipian ang nabuo mo?
A. maaaring magdulot ng pagkabingrang'aksidente
B. isang pambihirang kaso ang pagkabingi ni Anne
e: ang bingi ay nakababasa ng galaw ng labi
D. maaaring pagsamahin ang. pagkokondisyon at suhestiyon apang
gumaiing ang isang bingi
Item 25.
Gamit ang ugnayang sanhi - bunga, piliin ang angkop para sa istorya ni
Anne.
A. walang reaksyon -> pagkabingi
B. maiakas na tunog -> pagkabingi
C .. duiot ng aksidente -> pagkabingi
D. tensyon sa pamilya -> pagkabingi
Item 1.
Kilalanin ang mga salita sa pamamagitan ng paghahambing ng mga
magkakatulad na kahulugan. Aliri ang di-dapat maisama sa pangkat?
A. Maganda at masining ang kaniyang maikling kuwento.
B. Makitid at makipot ang iandas patungo sa kalangitan.
C. Matalas at matalim ang dila ng babae.
D. Matamis at mapait ang pag-ibig.
Item 2.
Lahat ng pares ng salita ay magkakatulad ang kahulugan maliban sa isang
pares. Alin ang di-dapat maisama sa pangkat?
A. Malupit at mabagsik ang pinunong iyon.
B. Ayaw kong pag-usapan ninuman ang saya at lungkot na aming naranasan.
C. Matibay at matatag ang asawa ni Francis Magalona.
D. Mapag-imbot at mapaghangad ang kapatid niya sa ama.
Item 3.
Ang saluhan ay sa baakain
" ' ~ M glM w a[[a y sa musika
Ang ningning ay nakaslsilaw
Ang lim nag ay ______________
A. nakabubulag . C. masangsang
B. nagmumulat D. malinamnam
Item 4.
Ang maawain ay sa tao
Ang matalas ay sa itak na .bagong hasa
Ang kislap ay kutitap
Ang kinang ay s a ____________
A. kalawakan C. bahaghari
B. alapaap D. alahas
Item 5.
Nagbibigay ang mga salitang nilalapian, ng kahulugang JUa, earn o halos.
Aling salita ang di dapat maisama sa pangkat? •
A .': malapot C. malasutla
B.' malarosas D. malakanin
Item 6.
May dalawang paraan ng paglalarawan: ang masining at ang karaniwan.
mga sumusunod na pahayag tukuyin ang halimbawa ng isang karaniwang
paglalarawan.
A. Malalaki at mabibilog ang pakwan.
B. Amoy pinipig ang simoy ng hangin.
C. Nadama niya ang matinding sakit na nagpapakirot ng buo niyang
— katawan^--------- -----
D. Saklot ng matinding takot ang inang nakatingin sa nakahandusay na
D r. A rscn ia R . Em peracio
General Education
Item 7. .
Alin sa mga sumusunod na pahayag ang naiiba ang diwa?
. A . . Matavoo ang lipad ng saranggola.
B. Matangkad ang kaniyang bayaw.
Item 8.
A. Bansot ang halamang nabili mo sa naglalako.
B .; Mababa ang pagtingin niya sa lalaking lasenggero.
'C. Hamak na hamak ang itsura niya.
D. Pandak ang tindera ng isda sa palengke.
Item 9.
Mga halimbawa ito ng mga salitang may nagkakaiba/nagkakasalungat na
kahulugan. Alin sa mga pares na ito ang hindi kabilang sa pangkat?
A. Malinis at marumi ang mga damit sa sampayan.
B. Langit at lupa ang kanilang agwat sa buhay.
C. Mabuti at marangal ang hanapbuhay ng kanyang Ninang sa Australia.
D. Katulad nila'y tubig at langis na di-pwedeng pagsamahin.
Item 10.
Sa mga pares ng salita alin ang may magkatulad na kahulugang magagamit
sa paglalarawan ng isang panauhin sa isang handaan?
matakaw at masiba C. marami at kakaunti
B. matangkad at pandak D. malapit at malayo
Item 11.
Kung ang salitang ugat na tjata ay gagamitan ng iba't ibang panlapi,
magbibigay ito ng iba’t ibang kahulugan. Alin sa mga sumusunod ang hindi
' dapat maisama sa pangkat batay sa kaanyuan ng salita?
O r. A rsen ia R . £ m p cra d o
Filipino - P agb asa at Pagsulat tmigo sa Pananaliksik
. A. .mabata C. binata
B. magbata D. pagkabata
Item 12.
item 13.
Basahin ang teksto sa ibaba.
Sa Kulay (colors)
- ^ A _ kalawakan na sinasaka
V.
C. kapayapaan
A. D, bahaghari
D r. A rscn ia R . Em perado
General Education
Item 20.
Alin naman sa mga sumusunod ang hindi nagpapaliwanag sa pangunahing ideya?
A. Tumatalakay sa maseselang suliranin ng mga tinedyer
B. Nagpapakita ng mga iba’t ibang balita
i C. Tropang Trumpo, Ang TV
d r ' Nagsisilbing modelo sa kabataan natin ngayon
Item 21.
Ang mga pangungusap sa ibaba ay magkaugnay MALIBAN sa isa. Alin ang
pangungusap na ito?
A. Pangarap niyang.makarating sa ibang bansa. *
■ S." Masarap magbakasyon sa ibang bansa.
C. Isang araw, may nabasa siyang.anunsyo na nangangailangan ng mga
manggagawa sa ibang bansa.
Q. Dali-dali niyang kinuha ang adres ng kompanya at sumulat siya upang .
magprisinta. •
Sa Makati at Dibisorya,
Denims ang Hanap Nila
Valerio L. Nofuente
Pagkuha ng Persentahe * .
D r. A rsen ia R . Em pcrado
' Q e»eral Education
KABUUANG BILANG NG
M A G S islP A G T A P O S
S V 2008-2009
400 -
w Kahulugan:
350 - •
jfc
300 - • CASS: College of Arts & Social Sciences
£
250 - • CEO: CoRege of Education
o • CLLL: College of Languages, Linguistics
200 -
& Literature
150 • COS: College of Sciences
S lO O -j
£ 50 -I
¥
3
a CASS CED CLLL COS
PANGALA N NG KOLEHIYO
D r. A rsen ia R . E m p erad o
Filipino - M asining na Pagpapahayag
Masining na
Pagpapahayag
Inihand a n i:
A rsenia R . Eniperado, P h .D .
; Kasanayan:
D r. A rseaia R . Em perau o
G eneral Education
D r. A rsen ia R . Em penuJo
G eneral E du cation
D r. A rsenia R . Em perado
Filipino - M asining na P agpapahayag
F. m ayatm ayroon
may - Ginagamit ang may kung ang sumusunod o kasunod na salita ay:
a. pangngalan' -
(May tao sa tanghalan.)
b. pandiwa
(May pumatay sa mga ipis na nasa kabinet.)
c. pang-uri
(May mataas na sapatos ang guro niya.)
d. pantukoy
(May mga panoorin sa patyo ng simbahan.)
e. pang -ukol na sa
(May sa daga ang anak mong iyan.)
mayroon - Ginagamit ang mayroon kung:
a. sinusundan ng panghalip
(Mayroon kayong libreng gamot sa baranggay.)
b. sinusundan ng isang kataga
(Mayroon yatang pagsusulit ngayon.)
c. bilang panagot sa tanong
(May kapatid ka pa ba? Mayroon.)
• Pag-aaral ng anyo at uri ng mga salita
Nabanggit na, na may dalawang uri ng pagpapahayag: pasalita at
pasulat. Bakit tayo nagsusulat? Mahalaga ang katanungang ito sapagkat
kasangkot na sa iba’t ibang layunin ng pagsulat ang ating mambabasa.
Kapag nabanggit ang mambabasa, isinasaalang-alang na rin ang uri ng
wikang gagamitin, pati na ang tono at istilo ng pagpapahayag.
D r. A rsen ia R . Em perado
G eneral E du cation
D r. A rsenia R . Em pcrado
F ilipino - M asining na Pagpapahayag
Halimbawa:
PORMAL KOLOKYAL
saan naroon sanaron
naroon.naroroon naron
nasaan nasan
kaniya kanya
kani-kaniya kanya-kanya
almirol almidon, almirol
aywan ewan
piyesta pista
PORMAL Dl-PORM AL
Pambansa Pampanitikan Lalawiganin Balbal
kapatid kapusod tugang ( Bikol) utol
baliw nasisiraang-bait buang ( Bisaya) buwang
Item 1.
Anotasyon
Mga Teknik sa Pagtukoy ng Wastong Paggamit ng
Alusyon Bilang Pamamaraang Panretorika
Item 2.
Anong uri ng tayutay ang ginamit upang maging mabisa ang paglalarawan?
A. pag-uyam (irony)
B. pagtatambis o tambisan (antithesis)
C. pagtanggi (litotes)
D. pagsasalungat (epigram/oxymoron)
Anotasypn
Mga Teknik sa Pagtukoy ng Wastong Paggamit ng
Alusyon Bilang Pamamaraang Panretorika
Item 3.
D ang tamang sa g ot
Anotasyon
Paggamit ng Tamang Salita
Item 4.
Anotasyon
MgaTeknik sa Pagtukoy ng Wastong Pagkagamit ng mga Salita
• Balintiyak - hindi gumagawa ng kilos ang simuno, kung hindi ito ang
tumatanggap hg kilos na isinasaad ng pandiwa.
Halimbawa: Ang tuntunin sa pagsuot ng uniporme ay mahigpit na
ipinapatupad ng paaralan.
Kaysa:
Mali ang guro sa kanyang mga eskuwela magdisiplina.
D r. A rsen ia R . Em pcrado
General Education
Item 5.
Ang mga pangungusap na hindi tama o hindi mabuti ang pagkabuo ay malabo
at hindi mauunawaan. Maaaring ang maling pagbubuo ng mga pangungusap
ay dahilan sa kakulangan ng kaalaman sa mga sugnay. Suriin ang gamit ng
sugnay na di-makapag-iisa sa ibaba.
D ang tamang sa g ot
Anotasyon
Kasanayan sa Pagbuo ng Tama at Mabisang Pangungusap
D r. A rsen ia R . E m p e rad o
Filipino - M asining na Pagpapahayag
Opsyon A.
• Ginagamit na simuno ng pangungusap.
Halimbawa:
Mga manggagamotanq magbibigay lunas sa mga maysakit.
Si Prop. Villafuente ang mahusayna puno ng Kagawaran ng Filipino.
Opsyon B.
• Ginagamit na tuwirang layon ng isang pangungusap.
Halimbawa:
Napagkasunduan na, na ikaw ang direktor ng seminar.
Alam ng lahat na wala kang kasalanan.
Opsyon C.
• Ginagamit na pang-uri kapag nagbibigay turing sa pangngalan o
panghalip. Kung ginagamit na pang-uri ang sugnay, ito ay nagsisimula
sa mga panghalip na pamanggit na -g, -ng, o na. '
Halimbawa:
Isa sa mga suliranin.ng bayan ang mga pinunong mahilig
mangurakot'sa kabang bayan.
Hem 6. •
Maaari mong gamltin ang hallmbawang kawikaan upang ipaalala ang ugaling
A. pagpapakumbaba
B. pagtitiyaga
C. paglingap sa mahirap
D. pagiglng tapat sa kaibigan
Item 7.
Galit na galit ang iyong lola. Nalaman kasi niyang nabundol ng motorsiklo ang
iyong kapatid subalit nagwalang-bahala lamang sa nangyari ang iyong ama. Sa
ating kaugalian at kultura anong pasawikaing pagpapahayag ang naglalarawan
sa ikinilos ng ama?
A. di-mahapayang gatang
B. naghalukipkip ng kamay
C. nagdilat ng mata
D. nagbuhat ng sariling bangko
Item 8. • ’
Item 9.
Item 10.
D r. A rscn ia R . Em pcrsdo
G eneral Education
Basahin ang mga sumusunod na pahayag mula sa mga piling aktia. Suriin ang mga
tayutay na ginamit. •
Item 11.
Item 12.
D r. A rsen ia R . E m p erad o
Filipino - Masining na Pagpapahayag
Item 13.
Ngunit hindi kumikilos sa pagkakahiga ang batang babae. Nakatitig lamang ito
sa maaliwalas na mukha ng langit. Nagtaka ang batang lalaki.
item 14.
Para saltern 1 5 - 1 7 . .
Item 15.
Item 16.
Item 17.
Item 18. # .
A. paglalahad _ • '
. B. pagsasalaysay
Cr. paglalarawan
D.'‘ pangangatwiran
Item 20. • •
Para sa Item 21 - 24. Gawing isang pangungusap ang mga sumusunod na pares ng
pangungusap sa pamamagitan ng paggamit ng angkop na pag-ugnay (pangatnig o
transisyunal na ekspresyon).
D r. A rsen ia R . E m p crad o
Filipino - Masining na Pagpapahayag
Item 21.
A. gayundin
• BT. sa kabila nito
C. walang duda
D. bilang patunay
Item 22.
A. samantala
B. walang alinlangan
,G. kapag
\5. kaya
Item 23.
A. sa kabilang dako
B. bukod dito
C. hanggang
D. kung gayon
Item 24.
ngunit
B. sa kabuuan
C. sa w'akas
D. saganangakin
Item 25.
Higit na malinaw ang daloy ng kaisipan sa binabasa kapag ang mga pasulat na
pangungusap ay gumagamit ng mga tamang bantas.
Ang Diyos ang Siyang nagbigay ng buhay__ Siya rin ang may karapatang
bumawi niyon.
A. . C.)
B. , or.-
D r. A rs cn ia R . Em perad o
General Education
4. Saawitna: . .
. “0, ang babae kapag minamahal
May kursunada'y aayaw-ayavy
Pag panay ang dalaw ay nayayamot
Huwag mong dalawin, dadabog-dabog."
• •
7. Alin sa mga sumusunod na pahayag ang pangit sa pandinig at maaari pang
mapaganda sa pamamagitan ng paglumanay o (euphemism•)?
A. Hinalay' kagabi sa kanyang pag-uwi ang babaeng nagtatrabaho sa call
center'
'J j Buntis ka ba?
C. Matabil ang kanyang bibig.-
D. Ang bunso niyang anak ay sumakabilang buhay.
8. Isa pa sa sinasadyang paglayo sa paggamit ng mga karaniwang salita
upang maging kaakit-akit at mabisa ang pagpapahayag ay ang pagtawag
(apostrophe). Kahawig ito ng pagbibigay-katauhan (personification). Dito,
ginagawa ang pakikipag-usap sa karaniwang bagay na tila ba nakikipag-
usapsatao..
‘A. ambisyoso
Br maramot
"C. kuripot
D. kumain diii
11 .____________________________________________________________________
Malakas ang hangin ni Emi, siya na naman ang bida.
A, matalino
'B. mayabang
cT madaldal
D. matapang
Para sa Item 1 2 - 1 3
Kailangang maging maingat sa pagpili ng mga salitang gagamitin sa
pagpapahayag. May mga salita tayo na kung titingnan ay tila wasto sa kahulugan
subalit maituturing na mali kaya’t hindi matatanggap at lumalabag sa tuntunin ng
mabuting pagpapahayag. .
Nilanghap niya ang hangin. Inihatid sa kanya ang bango ng sari-saring bulaklak
sa halamanan. Kilalang-kilala niya ang mabagsik na halimuyak ng dama de
noche. Nalanghap ang matamis na amoy ng sampaguita, at ang mailap at
mahinhing bango ng mga rosas. Manaka-naka ay sumasalit ang masansang na
amoy ng bulaklak ng sanggumay. Hindi kataka-taka, kahit gabi ay naglalamay
ang mga kulisap sa pagsimsim ng mga bulaklak.
D r. Arsenin R . Em perado *
General Education
" 15.
D r. A rsen ia R . E m p crad o
Filipino - M asining na P a g p a p a h a y a g
Siya si Uyukan. Isa siyang batang Negrito. Maliit lamang siya. Tatlong
talampakan at walong dali lamang ang taas. Nakabahag. Kulot na kulot ang
kanyang buhok.
Mula sa: Labuyo
ni: Reynaldo A. Duque
D r. A rsenia R . Em perado
General Education
*25'
Polyusyon
A. Katuturan nito
B. Mga pinagmumulan ng polyusyon -
C. Mga pook na may polyusyon .
D. Polyusyon, kaaway ng tao
D r. A rsen ia R . E m p erad o
M ath em atics - Fundam en tals o f M athem atics__________________
Fundamentals
of Mathematics
Prepared by:
A tty. A nton io V. Ferrer
Whole numbers - union of the number zero and the set of counting numbers.
Again using the roster method, W ={0,1; 2 ,3 ,4 ,5 ,...}
Integers - the union of the set of counting numbers, their negatives, and zero.
Using the roster method, l„ = {... -2, - 1 ,0 ,1 ,2 ,3 ,4 ,5 ..}
Operations on integers
I. Addition
• Like signs - add the absolute values, and prefix the negative sign if the
• addends are negative . ,
Acty. A n to n io V. Ferrer
G eneral E d u catio n
• Unlike signs - get the absolute values of the numbers and subtract the
smaller absolute value from the other and prefix the negative Sign if the
negative addend has the largef absolute value
eg. -4 + (-6) = -10
-2 + 7 = 7 - 2 = 5
3 + (-9) = -T9- 3 ) = -6
II. Subtraction - If the minuend and subtrahend are both positive and the minuend
is greater than the subtrahend, proceed to subtract forthwith. Otherwise,
change the sign of the supposed subtrahend and proceed as in addition.
eg. 8 -3 = 5
4 - 5 = 4 + -(5) = -1
Divisibility Rules
Act\-. A n co n io V. F erre r
M athem atics - Fundam entals o f Mathematics
.
6:. Divisible by 2 and 3. • '
e.g.-192
7: Difference obtained after subtracting twice the last digit from the number
formed by the remaining digits is divisible by 7.
e.g. 364- ‘
8: Last three digits form a number that is divisible by 8,
e.g. 1024
9: Sum of the digital root is divisible by 9
e.g. 423
10: Last digit is 0
e.g. 3540
11: Difference between the sum of the 1s t , 3rd, 5th,... digits, and the sum of the
of the 2nd, 4th, 6th,... digits is divisible by 11.
e.g. 90816
12: Divisible by both 3 and 4.
e.g. 4128.
13: The sum of four times the last digit and the number formed by the remaining
digits is divisible by 13
e.g. 182 is divisible by 13 since 4 times 2 is 8, and 18
+ 8 = 26 which is divisible by 13.
Note:
Divisibility rules for two or more relatively prime numbers (GCF is 1) may be
combined to serve as a divisibility rule for their product.
e.g. The rules for 3, 4, and 13 may be combined to
serve as the rule for their product - 156 since 3,4,
• and 13 are relatively prime.
'Note that 1 is neither prime nor composite and that 2 is the only even prime.
Prime Factorization
- refers to both the process as well as to the result of the process of expressing
a counting number as the product of its prime factors
- if the counting number is already prime, its prime factorization is the number
itself
e.g 126: 2 x 3 2 x 7
e.g.
126
_63_
21
7
Greatest Common Factor (GCF) - largest whole number divisor of the given
numbers. The GCF of two numbers, say a and b, is denoted by (a,t).
e.g. The GCF of 8 and 28 is 4
Intersection of Sets Method - for each of the given numbers, list their factors
from least to greatest and pick out the greatest factor that is common to all lists,
e.g. Find (8,28)
8: {1 ,2 ,4 ,8 }
28: {1 ,2 ,4 ,7 ,1 4 ,2 8 },
Prime factorization - write the prime factorization for each of the given numbers
so that common, and only common, prime factors are in the same column. The
GCF is the product of the lowest powers occurring in columns common to all prime
factorizations
e.g. Find (12,15,90)
12: 22 x 3
15: 3 x 5
90: 2 x 32 x 5
3 = 3(GCF) -
Euclidean Algorithm (may be used if we are looking for the GCF of only two numbers).'
The procedure may be best understood through an illustration,
e.g. For 24 and 28
Aety. A n to n io V. Ferrer
G eneral Education
Least Common Multiple (LCM) of two or more counting numbers - the smallest
non-zero number that is a multiple of the given numbers. The LCM of two number,
say a and b, is denoted by [a, b].
e.g. The LCM of 5, 6 and 8 is 120 because it is the
smallest non-zero number that is a multiple of 5,6
and 8.
Intersection of Sets Method - for each of the given numbers, list their multiples
from least to greatest/and pick out the smallest non-zero multiple that is common
to all lists.
e.g. Find [12,15,30]
Prime Factorization - write the prime factorization for each of the given numbers
so that common, and only common, prime factors are in the same column. The
LCM is the product of the highest powers occurring in a column of any of the prime
factorizations. ■ *
A tty. A n to n io V. Ferrer
M athem atics - Fundam entals o f M athem atics
12: 22 x 3
15: 3x5
30: 2 x 3x5
22 x 3 x 5 = 60 (LCM)
Euclidean Algorithm - the LCM of two numbers may be obtained by dividing their,
product by their GCF. In symbols,
t A/ (a* b>
( a’ bI = fa b )
[12,15]=(12x15)/((12,15) )=180/3=60
Repeated Division - The task is to divide the two numbers by a common prime
factor and dividing the resulting quotients also by a common prime factor. This step
is repeated until the resulting quotients are already relatively prime (GCF=1). The
LCM is product of the prime divisors and the relatively prime quotients. This may
better understood through an illustration
e.g. 12 and'30
2 12 30
3 6 15
2 5-
Fractions
Meanings
a. part of a whole or group
b. indicated division
c. ratio
Kinds of Fractions
Other classes
a. Equivalent - fractions having the same value e.g. 3/7 and 9/21
b. Mixed - composed of a whole number and a proper fraction (e.g. 5 'A )
Operations on Fractions
1. Multiplication - multiply numerator by numerator and denominator by
denominator to get the numerator and denominator respectively of the product
e-9- .3 ‘
5 * 4 “ 20 .
3. Addition (Subtraction)
a. Similar Fractions - add (subtract) the numerators and copy the
common denominator
e -9- 3_ 2 _ 5
U + IT- n
b. Dissimilar Fractions - use a common denominator (preferably the
least) to make the addends (minuend and subtrahend) similar and do
as in the preceding rule.
e-g- l 2_ 7 10 _ 17
5 + 7 = 35 + 35 = 35
Simplifying Fractions
A fraction is in simplest form if the numerator and the denominator are relatively
prime (their GCF is 1). Thus, to simplify fractions, express both the numerator
and the denominator as products of a number and their GCF. The fraction is then
decomposed into two fractions one of which has the GCF both asits numerator and
its denominator. This fraction reduces to 1. The other fractionthusisthedesire
• simplest form. - ■
e.g Simplify
16 4x 4 4 4 4
. 28- 4 x 7 _ 4 X 7~7
Acty. A n to n io V. Ferrer
G eneral E du cation
jOrdering Fractions - •
Two fractions are equivalent if their cross products are equal. Otherwise, that fraction
the numerator of which was used to. get the greater of the two cross products is
the larger fraction.
e.g. £ =
- : 4 2°
Since the two cross products 3(20) and 4(15) are both 60 and therefore equal, the
two fractions are equivalent.
On the other hand, for the two fractions below, the left cross product is 7(8) or 56
while the right cross-product is 66. Thus, the fraction on the right is greater,
e.g.
7 3
22 < H
Decimals
Arcy. A n to n io V . Ferrer
M athem atics - Fundam entals o f Mathematics
Operations on decimals
Addition (Subtraction)
Multiplication
Multiply the numbers as if they were whole and so place the decimal point in the
result as to have as many decimal places in it as there are in the factors combined. ■
e.g. To multiply
21.4 x 0.32, we write
21 4x32 = 6848
Division
To divide a,
a. decimal by a whole number, do as intJividing whole numbers but writing the
decimal point directly above that of the dividend
b. number by a decimal, multiply both dividend and divisor by that power of ten
such that the divisor becomes the least whole number, and then proceed as in
(a) above!
* Conversion * • * ‘ *
1. Fractions to Decimals
Divide the numerator by the denominator
e.g. 5/8 = 0.625
2. Decimals to Percents . • -
Multiply by 100%. The same result may be had by moving the decimal point
two places to the right and prefixing the % sign.
e.g. 0.625 = 0 .6 2 5 x 1 0 0 %
= 62.5%
3. Percents to Decimals
Divide by 100%. The same result may be had by removing the % sign and
moving the decimal point two places to the left.
e.g. 62.5%=62.5%-f 100%=.625
4. Decimals to Fractions
a. Terminating Decimals
Multiply the decimal by a fraction the numerator and denominator of which
are both equal to such power of ten with as many zeroes as there are
decimal places in the given decimal, and then simplify,
e.g.
1OO0 625 5
0.625 = 0.625 x - ---- = --------
1000 1000 8
b. Repeating Decimals
The procedure is outlined below together with an example to illustrate
each step. _
To convert x=0.16
1. Multiply the number by such power of 10 as would move one repeating
portion across the decimal point.
100jc=16.6"
Given two equal ratios, one comparing a to b and another comparing c to d, the
proportion may be expressed thus:
a : b :: c : d, or alternatively, a/b = c/d.
In either of the above forms, a and d are referred to as extremes, while b and c
are referred to as the means.
Note: If a/b = c/d, its alternation (a/c = b/d) and inversion (b/a = d/c) are both
true provided a, b, c, d * 0.
Aery. A n to n io V. Ferref
G eneral E du cation
e.g. Five bananas weigh as much as 3 star apples. At this rate, how many star
apples will weigh as much as 30 bananas?
Partitive Proportion
If-a quantity q is to be partitioned into p } , p 2, p , , ..-., p n , so that, the
partitions are in the ratio a x : : a . : . . . : c in ,
Acty. A n to n io V. Ferrer
M athem atics - Fundamentals o f M athem atics
p. = — - x 24
' 1+2+5
= — x 2 4 = 15
Per Cent - literally meaning "per hundred”, it is one way of writing fractions in
which the denominator which is required to be 100 is written as “%”, and read as
“per cent”.
pn 3 75
9 r ™ = 75%
Percentage is that which bear to the base in the same ratio as the rate.
The statement “15 is 30% of 50”, is telling us that 15 (the percentage) bears to
50 (the base) in the same ratio as 30% (the rate). In symbols, 15 = 30% x 50.
The basic formula P = R x B, has two other useful forms: R = P/B and B =
P/R.
PNU-LET Reviewer 1 E B
M athem atics - Fundam entals o f M athem atics •
ELEMENTARY ALGEBRA
B. Properties of Equality
1. Reflexive - if a is a real number, a = a.
2. Symmetric - if a and b are real numbers and a = b, then b = a.
3. Transitive - if a, b and c are real numbers and a = b and b = c, then a = c.
Evaluating algebraic expressions refers to the process of finding the value of the
expression upon substitution of the'given values for the respective variables,
e.g. Evaluate x2y3- 2y2 + 4 when x = 2 and y = -1 .
(2)2(-1)3-2(-1)2 + 4
4(-1) —2(1) + 4 .
-2
A tcv. A n to n io V. F e rr e r
General Education
Linear Equations in one variable - an equation that can be written in the form
ax + b = 0, where a and b are constants and a * 0.
e.g. 3x -4 = 0, 4- 2x = 3x +5
Solving Linear Equations - refers to the process of finding, through the use of
the properties of equality, all the solutions of the equation
Arty. A n to n io V. Ferrer
M athem atics - Fundartientals o f M athem atics
Inequalities
Inequality - a statement that says one quantity is less than (<) or greater than (>)
another (strict inequality). In some instances, however, one quantity may be less
than or equal to (s), or greater than or equal to (s) to another.
e^g. 3 < 5 x - 2 , 4 x - 5 s x -h 15
Compound Inequality - a compound statement that says one quantity is less than
(or greater than) another but is greater than (or less' than) a third. , .
e.g. -4 < 2x-3 £ 9 . . .
Properties oflnequality
1. Trichotomy-If a and bare real numbers, then a <b, a = b, o r a > b .
2. .Transitive - If a < b and b < c, then a < c.
. If a > b and b > c, th en a> c.
3. Addition Property - If a, b and c are real numbers and a < b.'then a + c < b + c
If a, b and c are real numbers and a > b, then a
Solving a Linear Inequality - the process of finding, through the use of the
properties of inequality, all the solutions of the inequality
Note: Solving a linear inequality is similar to solving linear equations except that
instead of using the properties of equality, we use the properties of inequality,
e.g. -4 £ 2x - 3 s 9
-4 + 3 £ 2x —3 + 3 £ 9 + 3
- 1 s 2x 12
- 1/2 s x ^ 6
Word Problems Involving Linear Inequalities - the steps in solving word problems
involving linear inequalities are the same as those in solving word problems involving
linear equations except that, again, instead of using the properties of equality, we
use the properties of inequality.
e.g. Ani’s grades in the last four tests were 8 5 ,8 9 ,9 0 and 93. What must be
her grade in the fifth and last test to get an average of at least 90?
85+89 + 90+93 + g5
Solution • 905 5
450 s 357+g5 .
• 93 sg 5
24. Which of the following gives the prime factorization of 54? •' '
A. 22x32 C. 2 3 x 3 3
B.; 2 x33 D. 2 3 x 3
25. A boat travels 8 kph in still water. If it can tcavel a given distance upstream in
5 hours and the same distance downstream in 3 hours, what is the rate of the
current?
A. 2 kph C. 6 kph
B! 5 kph D. 9 kph
26. What is the value of x - 6 if 2(x - 3) + 5 = 19?
A. -1- C. 16
B. 4 D. 20
27. Apo weighs one third as much as her mother Angela. If Apo weighs 43.5 lbs.,
how much does Angela weigh?
A. 62.5 lbs. C. 130.5 lbs.
B. 95.7 lbs. D. 150 lbs.
28. Lucille is 4 times as old as Nicole. Six years from now, she will be twice as old
as Nicole. How old are they now?
A, Lucille 12; Nicole 3 C. Lucille 3, Nicole 12
B. Lucille 16; Nicole 4 D. Lucille 4 Nicole 16
29. The sum of two numbers is 52 and their difference is 20. What is the larger
number?
A. 16 C. 36
B. 26 D. 46
30. Two numbers are in the ratio 4:3. What are the numbers if their sum is 84?
A, 36 and 48 * C. 24 and 63
B. 36 and 24 D. 12 and 36 •
. 7. The distance from C to D is 24 km. The distance from B to C is 2/3 of. the
distance from C to D. The .distance from A to B is 3/8 of the distance from B
to C. What is the distance from AJo B?
A. 4 km / C. 6 km
B. 5 km -f). 8 km
8. Jason buys a refrigerator for P7 920. She pays 1/3 of the price in cash and
the balance in 12 equal monthly installments. How jgugJijwll he pay each
month?
A. P300 C. P400
B. P350 .''B*)P440
9. Mang Pedro delivers 210 kg of vegetables to two distributors. If 2/5 of the
vegetables goes to Manang Jo, how many kilograms of vegetables does the
other distributor receive?
' A. 84 C. 126
B. 116 D. 132
10. A 210-cm stick is cut so that one part is 3/4 of the other. How many cm is
the shorter part?
A. 120 C. 80
B7 90 D. 70
11. find the GCF of 12,32 and 56.
A. 2 , C. 6
B. 4 . - D. 56
12. Two bells ring at 8 A..M. For the rest of the day, one bell rings every half hour
whereas the other rings every 45 minutes. What time will both bells ring at
the same time again?
a; 9:00 AM • • C. ' 9:30 AM • •
B, 9:45 AM. ' D. 10:00 AM
A rty. A n to n io V. Ferrer
M athem atics - Fundam entals of M athem atics
13. What digit can be inserted in the blank so that the number 59___ J 72 would
be divisible by 3? .
A. 1 . ' C. ' 3
B. 2 D. 7
14. Jeff had fewer than 100 blocks. When he laid them out into four equal rows,
he had three blocks left, but when he laid them out into nine equal rows, he
had none left. How many blocks did Jeff have?
A. 54 C. 72
B. 63 D. 91
15. One prime factor of 42 is 3. What are its other prime factors?
A. 2 and 3 C: 2 and 7
B. 3 and 5 D. 3 and 7
16. If there are 18 mangoes and 45 bananas in a fruit basket, what is the ratio of
the number of mangoes to the number of bananas?
A. 2 :5 C. 2 :3
B.4 :7 D. 3 : 7
17. A 3 Yz meter ribbon is cut into four pieces in the ratio 1:2:3:4. Find the length
of the longest piece.
A. 35 cm C. 100 cm
B. 70 cm D. 140 cm
18. What number can replace x in the proportion 1 : x = x : 64?
A. 2 C, 6
B. 4 D. 8
19. In a certain municipality the real estate tax is P5.00 for every P1,000 of the
assessed value of the property. Find the assessed value of a property if a tax
.of P1250 is levied on it. * .
. A. P62.50 C. P250.000
B. P6.250 ; D.~ P500.000
20. A tank of water supplies the needs of 5 children for 6 days. How many days'
need for Water will the tank of water supply if there were only 3 children?
' A. 3,6 • . C. -8
B. 5 D. 1(J
PNU LET Review er
M athem atics - Fundam entals o fM ath em atics
2 \. A man gives 10% of his monthly earnings to the church. Another 70% is
spent on food, electricity, water and other bills. After-paying all these, he still
has P2.000. How much does he earn in a month?
A. P5,000 C: P10,000
B. P8.000 . ; d : P12,000
22. Raffy deposited PTO,000 at 5% annual interest. How much will it gain in 2
Yi years?
A. P1.250 C. P1.500
B: PI ,350 D. P1.750
23. In a candy jar are 15 lemons, 12 chocolates, and 3 mints. What percent of
the candies are mints?
A. 10% C. 12.5%
B. 12% D. 15%
24. A particular model of a cell phone sold for P4.000 in 2010. Two years later,
the same model sold for only P2.800. What was the percent decrease in the
price?
A. 15% C. 30%
B. 20% D. 35%
25. Based on the graph, how much of the P25.000 monthly income of the Faria
family goes to food?
A. P6.250 C. P10,050
B. P11,250 D. P12,450
26. When a certain number is subtracted from 176, the result is the same as
when 21 is added to 4 times the number. What is the number?
A. - (/s C. 31 • > t - - Jq S
B. 2 2 „ < £ j5 H 5* ’ D- 52
27. Which proper^ of real numbers does the statement (a + b) + c = a + (b + c)
illustrate?
A. Associative . C. Commutative
•_B. Closure D. Distributive
LET Reviewer
G eneral E d u ca tio n
28. Arman is 5 years older than An. Three years ago, he was twice as old as An.
How old is An now? :
A. 6 . C. 13
B. 8 D.' 15
29. Andrea can encode a 100-page thesis in 24 hours, while Ani can do the same
task in 16: hours. How many hours will it take them to finish the job if they
work together?
A'. 9 3/5 C. 11
--B. 10 D. 20
30. If Justine can run 3 km in an hour, how far can she run in 45 mins?
A. 1.75 km a 2.5 km.
B. 2.15 km t ) . 2.25 km.
Arty. A n to n io V. F erre r
G eneral Education
C ontemp orar y
Mathematics
Prepared by;
Dr. Gladys C . Nivera
Competencies:
1. Plane Geometry
T.1 Show a working knowledge of basic terms and concepts in
Plane Geometry
1.1.1 Lines and curves, perpendicular and parallel lines
1.1.2 Angles, angle properties
1.1.3 Special triangles and quadrilaterals
1.1.4 Polygons
1.2 Solve problems involving the basic terms and concepts in
Plane Geometry.
2. Statistics and Probability
2.1 Show mastery and knowledge of basic terms and concepts
in statistics and probability
2.1.1 Counting techniques
2.1.2 Probability of an event
2.1.3- Measure of central tendency
2.1.4 Measure of variability
2.2 Solve, evaluate, and manipulate symbolic and numerical
problems in elementary algebra by. applying fundamental
• rules, principles and processes.
D r. G ladys C . N ivera
M athem atics - C o n tem p o rary M athem atics
Introduction
This part focuses on the concepts identified in the LET competencies for Gen
ED Mathematics. It provides a review of the definitions, formulas, operations,
postulates, and theorems in Geometry and Statistics. However, in an effort to
effectively guide students to a deeper understanding of the concepts involved, it
begins with the foundations and gives a wider, more comprehensive discussion than
those specifically identified by the competencies.
GEOMETRY
BASIC DEFINITIONS
Undefined terms: the basic geometric concepts f a which no definitions are given.
These are the points, lines and planes.
Collinear points: points that lie on the same line.
Coplanar points: points that lie on the same plane.
Space: the set of all points.
Line segment: a part of a line consisting of two endpoints and all the points in
between them.
Ray: a part of a line having one endpoint and extending infinitely in one direction.
Opposite rays: rays with a common endpoint but extending in opposite directions.
Congruent segments: Two segments having the same measure or length.
Angle: formed by two non-collinear rays with a common endpoint. The two rays are the
• sides of the angle. The common endpoint of the two rays is the vertex of the angle.
POLYGONS
Polygon: a closed plane figure formed by fitting together segments end to end with
each segment intersecting exactly two others.
Diagonal of a polygon: a line segment that connects two nonconsecutive vertices.
Convex polygon: no diagonal is in the exterior of the polygon.
Concave polygon: at least one diagonal is in the exterior of the polygon.
Equilateral polygon: all the sides have equal lengths.
Equiangular polygon: all the‘angles have equal measure.
Regular polygon: it is both equilateral and equiangular.
Interior angles of a polygon: the angles formed by the sides of a polygon.
Exterior angles of a polygon: the angles formed in the exterior of the polygon
when its sides are extended.
THEOREMS
Angle-Sum Theorems for Triangles: The sum of the measures of the three angles
of any triangle is 180°.
Angle-Sum Theorems for Quadrilaterals: The sum of the measures of the four
angles of any quadrilateral is 360°.
• Angle-Sum Theorems for Polygons: The sum (s) of the measures of the interior
angles, of any polygon with n sides is given by s = (n - 2)180°.
Exterior Angle Theorem for Polygons: The sum of the measures of the exterior
angles of a convex polygon (one at each vertex) is 18Q°.
TRIANGLES
D r. Gladys C . Nivera
G eneral Education
QUADRILATERALS.
Kinds of Quadrilaterals
D r. Gladys C . N ivera*
M athem atics - C o n tem p o rary M athem atics
« •
A trapezoid is isosceles if it satisfies one of the following:
. 1. Its iegs are congruent.
2. Each'pair of base angles is congruent.
3. Diagonals are congruent.
CIRCLES
Circle: the set of all points in a plane at a given distance (radius) from a given point
(center) in the plane.
Radius: the line segment from the center to any point of the circle.
Chord: a line segment whose endpoints lie on the circle.
Diameter: a chord containing the center.
Secant a line that intersects the circle in two points.
Tangent a line lying on the same plane as the circle that intersects the circle in
exactly one point.
Point of Tangency:The point where the tangent touches the circle.
Congruent circles: two or more circles having the same radius.
Concentric circles: two or more coplanar circles sharing the same center.
Segment-Addition Postulate:
Point Y is between X and Z if and only if X, Y, and Z are collinear and XY+ YZ = XZ.
Midpoint of the segment A point that bisects a segment, or divides a segment
into two congruent segments.
Bisector of the line segment A ray, line or line segment that contains the midpoint.
Angle bisector: A ray that contains the vertex and divides the angle into two
congruent parts.
ANGLE PAIRS
Adjacent angles: two angles with a common vertex, a common side, and no
common interior points.
Supplementary angles: two angles whose measures have a sum of 180°.
Complementary angles: two angles whose measures have a sum of 90°.
Vertical angles: Two angles are vertical if and only if their sides form two pairs
of opposite rays and their angles are nonadjacent formed by two intersecting
lines.
Linear pair: two angles which are adjacent and supplementary.
Theorems:
Supplements o f congruent angles are congruent.
Complements o f congruent angles are congruent.
Vertical angles are congruent.
Exterior angle of a triangle: an angle which forms a linear pair with one of the
triangle’s interior angles..
Remote interior angles: two interior angles of the triangle not adjacent to the
exterior angle.
Theorems: - -
The measure of an exterior angle of a iriangie is equal to the sum o f the
measures o f the two remote interior angles. •
The sum of the lengths of any two sides of a triangle is greater than the length,
of the third side.
In a triangle, if one side is longer than the other side, the angle opposite the
longer side is the larger angle.
In a triangle, if one angle is larger than the other angle, the side opposite the
larger angle is the tonger side.
Postulates:
If parallel lines are cut by a transversal, then:
1. The alternate interior angles are congruent.
2. The corresponding angles are congruent.
3. The alternate exterior angles are congruent.
4. The same-side interior angles are supplementary.
D r. Gladys C . N ivera
G enera! Education
COUNTING TECHNIQUES . ■
Experiment: any activity that can be done repeatedly (e.g. tossing a coin, rolling a die).
Sample space: the set of all possible outcomes in an experiment.
Example: In rolling a die, the sample space is S = (1 ,2 ,3 , 4 ,5 ,6 }.
Sample point: an element of the sample space.
Example: In rolling a die, there are 6 sample points.
Example: In how many can the first, second and third winners may be
chosen in a beauty pageant with 10 contestants?
= 10 9 8 = 720 w a y s
b. Circular Permutation
If n objects are to be arranged in a circular manner, then the number of
distinct arcangements is (n -1)1
_______________ . Answer: (7-1)!<=6!'
D r. G ladys C . Nivera
M athem atics - Contem porary M athem atics
C = — —— 7i > r
“ r r!(n -r)!; ~ ’
1. Theoretical Probability
Theoretically, the probability of an event E, denoted by P(E), is defined as
' P (E ) = ^
n(S)
where n(E) = number of favorable outcomes
n(S) = number of possible outcomes
2. Experimental Probability
The probability of an event may also be obtained experimentally. Suppose we
want to find out the probability of obtaining a tail in a toss of coin. We can
perform an experiment by tossing the coin 50 times and record the number of
occurrences of tail. Suppose that tail occurred 24 times, then the probability of
getting a tail based on this experiment is
P (tail) =
STATISTICS
Kinds of Sampling
1. Random sampling techniques are used to ensure that every member, of the
population has anequalchanceofbeingincludedin the sample. Arandom sample
is said to be representative of the entire population. The two methods of random
sampling are lottery method and the use of the table of random sampling.
2. Systematic sampling is a technique which selects every nth element of the
population for the s&mpfe, with the starting point determined at random from
the first n elements.
3. Stratified random sampling is a technique of selecting simple random samples
.from mutually exclusive groupings or strata of the population.
MEASURES OF VARIABILITY
A measure of variation or variability describes how large the differences between
the individuals are on a trait. The common measures of variability are range and
standard deviation. .
D r. G lad y s C . N ivcra
G eneral Education M athem atics - C o n te m p o ra ry M athem atics
Measures of
Definition How to find Advantages Disadvantages
Central Tendency
Mean The sum of the data divided by Ungrouped data: „ A single, unique value that is . Not appropriate for skewed
the number of data 2^x representative of all the scores distribution as it is affected by
X = Y extreme scores or outliers
Grouped Data: Stable from group to group
_ £xf
X = — May be used in further
N computations
Median The middle number of the set Ungrouped More stable from group to Not necessarily representative of all
The middle to r the
when the data are arranged in uaia. ^n+in , group than the mode scores
numerical order th sco re
Grouped „ Appropriate for skewed Unstable from group to group
Data: Mdn = L+ distribution
Cannot be used in further analyses
Mode The number that occurs most Ungrouped data: Easy to obtain ' Not necessarily representative of all
frequently in the data The most frequent score scores
Grouped Data:
The class mark of the class interval Cannot be used in further analyses
with the highest frequency
Measures of
Definition How to find Advantages Disadvantages
Variation
Range The difference Ungrouped data: R = HS - LS Easy to compute Unstable
between the highest Grouped Data: . Gives a unique value Not representative of the set of data
score and the lowest R = Upper Limit of the Highest Class Interval - Easy to understand . Not used In. further computations ■
score Lower Limit of the Lowest Class Interval
Standard deviation The square root of Ungrouped data: Grouped Data: Most stable Affected by extreme scores
the variance of the
set of daita
c _ J z ( x - x) 2 c, _ Jz f ( x - x) 2
Gives a unique value
Most representative More difficult to compute and ■
Used1in further computations ; understand
' Directions: "Choose the best answer from the choices given. Write the
corresponding letter of your choice.
7. If lines r and s are parallel, which of the following pairs of angles are
congruent?
A. Z 3 a h d Z 6 C. Z2andZ7
B. Z 5 and Z 6 D. Z 4 and Z 6
8. Find the measure of angle 1 in the figure.
D r. Gladys C . N i vcra
General E du cation
11. The angles of a triangle are in the ratio 1: 3: 5. What is the largest angle?
A. 20°' B. 60° C. 80° - ' D. 100°
12. Which of these figures cannot be the sides of a triangle?
A. 1,3,3 B. 1, 1, 1 C. 6,12,8 D. 5, 1 0 , 4
13. The area of a square is 144 cm2. What is its perimeter?
A. 12 cm B. 15 cm C. 48 cm D. 72 cm
14. What is the area of the largest circle that can be cut out of a square paper
whose side is 40 cm?
A. 62.8 cm2 B. 84 cm2 C. 524 cm2 D. 1 256 cm2
15. The graph shows the number of socks, belts, handkerchiefs, and neckties
sold by a store in one week.
160
The names of the items are missing from the graph. Socks were the item
most often sold, and fewer neckties than any other item were sold. More belts
■ tflan handkerchiefs were sold. How many belts were sold? ■
A. 80 B. 90 . C. 120 D. 140
• • , • • • >
D r. Gladys C . N ivera
M athem atics - C o n tem p o rary M athem atics
16. A card is picked at random from an ordinary deck of cards. Find the probability
of picking a black ace? '
A. % B. 1
/< C. 1/13 D. 1/26
17. A card is picked at random from an ordinary deck of cards. Find the probability
of picking a card that is not a heart?
A. 1/13 B. V* C. Yi D; %
18. Each of the six faces of a certain cube is painted either green or blue. When
the cube is tossed, the probability of the cube landing with the blue face up
is 2/3. How many faces are green?
A. One B. Two C. Three D. Four.
19. A card is selected at random from 50 cards numbered from 1 to 50. What is
the probability that the number on the card is a prime number?
A. 3/10 B. 2/5 C. 8/25. D. 7/25 •
20 A pair of dice is thrown. What is the probability of throwing a double numb a
(e.g. 3 ,3 )?
A. 1/3 B. 1/6 C. 1/12 D. 1/36
21. In how many ways can the first, second, and third places be chosen from i
group of 9 contestants?
A. 72 B. 504 C. 720 D. 9!
22. In how many ways can 6 people be seated around a circular table?
A. 720 B. .600 C. 540 D. 120
23. How many combinations can be made from the letters A, B, C, and D if the
letters are taken 2 at a time?
A. 3 B, 4 • C. 5 D. 6
24. In how many ways can two swimmers be chosen from a group of sin
swimmers?
A. 15 B. '30 C. 45 D. 90
25. A coffee shop offers 5 flavors of coffee: mocha, cappuccino, espresso, vanilla,
and latte. Coffee may be served hot or cold and it comes in tall, regular,an<l
short sizes. In how many ways can the costumer order his/her coffee?
' 3 ways • B. 10 ways C. 24 ways D. 30 ways* • •
26. Find the number of distinct permutations of the letters in the word 'CLASS’?
A. 60 B. 120 C. 180 0. 360
27. How many 3-digit, numbers can be formed from the digits 1-8, if the digits
can be repeated?
A. 336 B. 436 C. 512 D. 524'
28. How many 3-digit numbers can be formed from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 if the 3-digit
numbers form odd numbers and the digits are repeated?
. A. 75 B. 100 C. 112 D, 125
29. How many sets of answers are possible for an 6-item true or false test?
A. 12 B. 36 C. 64 D. 128
30 Mario had three test scores of 78,76, and 74, while Kristyn had scores of 72,
82, and 74. How did Mario’s average (mean) score compare with Kristyn's
average score.
A. Mario was 1 point higher. C. Both averages were the same.
B. Mario was 1 point lower. D. Mario was 2 points lower.
For items 31 -33:
Mr. Marquez gave a mathematics test to a group of students. The distribution of
the scores is as follows:
SCORES FREQUENCY
21-25 • 2
16- 20 5
11 -15 12
6-10 4
1 -5 1
31. How many pupils took the test?
A. 25 B. 24 C. 22 D. .12
32. What is the size of the interval of the frequency distribution?
A. 2 * B. 3 C. 4. 0. 5
A. I-Magalang C. I-Masipag
B. I-Masunurin D. I-Matipid
35. The table shows the student's grades and the corresponding number of units
for each subject.
Filipino 3 88
English 3 90
Math 3 94
Science 5 91
Araling Panlipunan 3 87
Computer ■ 2 96
PE 1 90
D r. G ladys C . N ivera
G eneral Education
Directions: Choose the best answer from the choices given. Write the
corresponding letter of your choice.
D r. G ladys C . N ivera
M ath em atics - C o n tem p o rary Mathematics
13. What is the sum of the measures of the interior angles of a regular octagon?
•A. 1260* ’ B. 1080° ■ C-. 145° D. 135°
14. Marco has two sticks of lengths 9 cm and 12 cm. He needs a third stick to
form a right triangle. What could be the length of the-third stick?
^ 12cm B. 13cm C. 14cm D. )15
15. A man jogs around a circular path whose diameter is’BO m\ About how many
times will he have to go around the circular path to jog a distance of 1 % km?
A. 5 times B. 10 times C. 12 times D. 15 times
16. The volume of a cube is 1000 cm3,;What is its surface area?
A. 10 cm2 B. 100 cm2 C . ' 6 0 0 cm2 D. 625 cm2
17. The area of the Great Circle of a sphere is 314 cm2. Find the volume of the
sphere.
A. 4186.7 cm3 C. 5865.5 cm3
B. 5116 cm3 D. 6212.3 cm3
18. The figure below shows a spinner with 12 sectors. When someone spins the
arrow, it is equally likely to stop on any sector. _______________
1/2 of the sectors are blue, 1/12 are green, V* are orange, and 1/6 are red.
If a person spins the arrow, on which color sector does the spinner have the
least probability to stop?
A. Blue. B. green C. -orange D. red
19. What is th’e probability ofgetting a-prime number when a die is tossed?
A. 1/6 B. 'A . C. 1/3 'D. Yi
20. In.a candy jar, there are 15 lemons, 12 chocolates and 3 mints. If a candy is
picked at random, what is the probability of getting a chocolate?
• A. Yi .B. 2/5 C. 1/6 D., 1/10
• 2t. When you flip a coift thrice, what is the probability of getting at least 2 heads?
A. ¥a B. Yi C. 3/8 D. V*
22. How many sets of answers are possible for a true or false test with 10
questions?
A. 1024 B. 512 . C. 256 D /2
23. The mean score of a set of30 tests is 85. Find the sum of the 30 test scores.
A. 2 250 B. 2 360 C . . 2 550 D. 3 240
24. A show manufacturer conducted a survey of the average shoe size among
women to help him decide what shoe size to put on display. What measure of
central tendency would be most appropriate for his purpose?
A. mean B. mode C. median D. any of the three
25. In how many ways can 5 basketball players be chosen from a group of 9
players?
A. - 126 B. 212 C. 15120 D. 362 880
26. How many 4-digit numbers can you write using the digits 8, 4 , 3 and 5 if the
digits may appear more than once in each number?
A.. 22 B. 24 C. 224 D. 256
27. You are to form 3-digit numbers from the digits 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , and 5. What is the
probability of selecting '152” if repetition of digits is not allowed?
A. 1/30 B. 1/40 C. 1/50 D. 1/60
28. Suppose that a family has 2 children. What is the probability that the family
has at least 1'girl?
A. ¥a B. Yi C. 1/3 D. J4
29. In how many ways can 4 people be seated in a row of 4 vacant chairs if they
can sit anywhere?
A. 120 B. 90 C. 64 D. 24 '
D r. Gladys C . Nivera
-3i '■£> k .0 -jj
G eneral E d u ca tio n
30 Find the number of distinct pe’rmutations of the letters in the word 'MISSION?
A. 270 B. 720 C. 1260 D. 5040 !
3-1. The following polygon shows a shop's monthly sales of umbrellas for the year.
50
M onths
Student A B C D E F G H I J .
Score 18 32 10 15 27 18 23 28 29 30
32. What is the median score?
• A. 18 * B. 20 C. 23 ' D. 25
33. What is the mode of the scores?
A. 18 B. 20 C. 23 D. 25
34. What is the range of scores? .
A. 18 B._ 22 C. 23 ' D. 25
35. The table shows the student’s grades and the corresponding number of units
for each subject.
Natural
Science
Prepared by:
Dr. L eticia V. Cacris
Competencies:
INTRODUCTION
Scientific knowledge and skills are essential for socio-economic and cultural
development. While the required knowledge may or may not be generated wholly,
we must have the capacity to make use of it.
The scientifically literate person understands and appreciates the joint enterprises
of science and technology, their interrelationships, and their impacts .on society
and the environment. Some of the factors involved in the interrelationships among
science, technology, society,-and the environment are:
A. Science and-Technology
There is a distinction between science and technology, although they often
overlap and depend on each other. Scienge deate with generating and ordering
conceptual knowledge. Technology deals with design and development, and the
application of scientific or technological knowledge, often in response to social
and human needs. Technology does not just provide tools for science, however; it
also may provide motivation and direction for theory and research. For example,
the theory of the conservation of energy was developed technological problem
of increasing the efficiency of commercial steam engines. The mapping of the
locations of the entire set of genes in human DNA has been motivated by the
technology of genetic engineering, which both makes such mapping possible
and provides a reason for doing so. The invention of the microscope led to new
discoveries about cells.
D r. L e ticia V. Cacris
N atural Science
F. Variable Positions
Scientific thought and knowledge can be used to support different positions. It
is normal for scientists and technologists to disagree among themselves, even
though they may invoke the same scientific theories and data.
Examples: The debate about the possibility o f cold fusion illustrated variable
positions among scientists.
There is a debate about whether or not controlled burning techniques
should be used in national parks.
Scientists share certain basic beliefs and attitudes about what they do and how they
view their work This is the nature of science and what can be learned about it.
D r. L e ticia V. C atris
G eneral Education
• for example, in fprmulating the theory of relativity, Albert Einstein did riot *
discard the Newtonian laws of motion but rather showed that they are only
approximations of limited application within-a more general concept. Moreover,
the growing ability of scientists to make accurate predictions about natural
phenomena provides convincing evidence that we really are progressing
our understanding of how the world works. Continuity and stability are as
characteristic of science as change is.
The images of science sit easily with the images of modernization - electronic
devices, robotics, nuclear energy, in-vitro fertilization, jet planes, space
explorations, genetic engineering - on one end, the recognition of environmental
pollution, resource depletion and urbanization - on the other side.
Examples of such “fail-safe” designs are bombs that cannot explode when the
fuse malfunctions or automobile windows that shatter into rounded, connected
chunks rather than into sharp, flying fragments. All of the means of preventing
or minimizing failure are likely to increase cost. But no matter what precautions
are taken- or resources invested, risk of technological failure can never be
reduced to zero.
A scientifically literate person has working knowledge of the basic concepts and
principles of the natural sciences. Scientific knowledge is holistic, i.e., it is gathered
by various branches of science contributing to an over-all conceptual scheme which
is internally consistent.
• Life Science (Biology) - deals with living things and their parts and actions.
Smaller branches of life science include:
> Zoology - the study of animals
> Botany - the study of plants >
• Earth Science - deals with the study of the Earth and its rocks, dceans,
volcanoes, earthquakes, atmosphere, and other features. This includes
astronomy, that explore nature beyond the Earth. This study objects such as
stars, planets and moons.
• Physical Science - deals with the.study of matter. This includes:
> Chemistry - explore what substances are made of and how they change
and combine.
> Physics - explore the study of relationship between matter and energy.
The scientific enterprise comprises at least two factors: processes and products.
' The products of science include the facts, .concepts, theories, laws, and applications
that, occur as a result of doing science-that is, scientific content
Scientific Concepts: These are ideas that combine several facts or observations. A
concept is an "observed regularity in events or objects” (Novak, 1984).
1.Green plants need light in order to grow. - relates the two observations of light
to the amount of growth of green plants
2. The human body uses food for energy and growth.
3. Some chemicals fizz when they come into contact with other chemicals.
4. It takes more force to slide a book on sandpaper than on smooth paper. ■
5. Running water cuts gullies in soft rock.
6. Heavy marble roll farther than light marbles when both are given the same
push.
D r. L c ticia V. Carris
General E du cation
3. Theory of Evolution: Sp.ecies adapt to their environments, and those that are
most fit survive. * •
4. Theory of Plate Tectonics: The outer shell of the earth consists. of several moving
plates on which the oceans and continents lie.
5. Cellular theory of life: Living things are made of cells.
Scientific Laws: are statements generally accepted to be' true, universal, and
absolute. They can be expressed in terms of a single mathematical equation. They
don't really need any complex external proofs; they are accepted at face value
based upon the fact that they have always been observed to be true.
A. Energy
>•■ Energy has always been defined as the ability to do work. Energy makes
change; it does things for us. In strict scientific terms energy is classified
into two main forms: kinetic and potential energy.
> Kinetic energy is defined as the energy of a moving object. Speeding cars,
a waterfall, a rock falling from a cliff or the ticking of a clock are examples
of objects that have kinetic energy. The various forms include electrical
energy, mechanical energy, thermal energy, radiant energy.
• Electrical energy is the movement of electrical charges. All matter is
made of tiny particles called atoms. These are made up of even smaller
particles: electrons, protons, and neutrons. When a force is applied,
some of the electrons move. Electrical charges moving through a wire
is called electricity. Lightning is another example of electrical energy.
• Mechanical energy is the movement of objects and substances from
one place to another when a force is applied according to Newton’s
Laws of Motion.
• Thermal energy is the internal energy in substances— the vibration
and movement of the atoms and molecules within substances. This
pertains to the kinetic energy of the molecules within an object, it
is technically incorrect to refer to heat as thermal energy. Objects
possess thermal energy; heat is the transfer of energy from one object
to another. It is an evidence of energy.
• Radiant energy is electromagnetic energy that travels in transverse
waves. Radiant energy includes visible light, x-rays, gamma rays
and radio waves. Light is one type of radiant energy and is another
evidence of energy.
> Potential energy is defined as the energy in matter due to its position or
the arrangement of its parts. The various forms of potential energy include
gravitational potential energy, stored mechanical (elastic potential) energy,,
chemical potential energy, and nuclear energy
• Chemical Energy is energy stored inthe bonds of atoms and molecules.
It is the energy that holds these particles together. The energy stored in
gasoline is released by burning. A jnotorboat uses this released energy
•to turn its propeller. There are many examples of chemical potential
> Converting one form of energy into another form always involves a toss of
usable energy. The total amount of energy available for transformation is
almost always decreasing.
• The human body is like a machine, and the fuel is food. Food gives the
energy to move, breathe, and think. But the body is not very efficient at
converting food into useful work. The rest of the energy is lost as heat.
• Almost all of the energy stored in the molecules of gasoline used
during an automobile trip goes, by way of friction and exhaust, into
producing a slightly warmer, car, road, and air.
• When energy is transformed into heat energy that diffuses all over,
further transformations is less likely to xcur. Energy follows a one
way path. It enters the living system in the form electromagnetic waves
- light and leaves as heat.
> Energy sources are classified into two groups— renewable and
nonrenewable. Renewable energy sources include biomass, geothermal
energy, hydropower, solar energy, and wind energy. They can be replenished
in a short time. Nonrenewable energy supplies are limited. Petroleum, for
example, was formed millions of years ago from the remains of ancient sea
plants and animals.
> Sound, motidn, thermal energy, and light are not easily classified as kinetic
and potential energy. They are evidences of energy.
• Light is an electromagnetic radiation and has no mass, hence, it has
neither kinetic nor potential energy.
• Sound is produced wtren a force causes an object or substance to
vibrate— the energy is transferred through the substance in a wave,
o The human ear can hear only those sounds caused by objects
vibrating between about 20 decibels (vibs/sec) and about 16,000
decibels.
o Ultrasonic waves are sound waves that vibrate very fast with
frequencies too high to be detected by the human ear. They have
greater penetrating power than audible sound waves and can be
used to see in utero fetuses and the functioning of human hearts.
• Heat consists of moving molecules in air or in an object, and mechanical
energy is the combination of kinetic and potential energy of a moving
object. A pendulum has mechanical energy; it continually converts
kinetic energy into gravitational potential energy and back into kinetic
energy as it swings back and forth.
B. Structure of Matter
> Matter is anything that occupies space and has mass. They differ greatly in
shape, density, flexibility, texture, toughness, and color; in their abilityto give off,
absorb, bend, or reflect light; in what form they take at different temperatures;
in their responses to each other; and in hundreds of other ways.
• Homogeneous system is characterized by a one-phase system whose
■ characteristics are uniform throughout. These are observed either
as a pure substance or in solutions. An example of a homogeneous
substance would be pure water, which contains only the compound
H20 or pure table salt that contains only the compound NaCI. Two or
mpre gases will always mix to form just one phase.
D r. L e ticia V. C .itru
G eneral E d ucation
> Mixtures of substances in the waters,'land, and air may result to some
major environmental problems: *- _ .
• Water Pollution - contamination of, water by foreign matter such as
■ microorganisms, chemicals, industrial or other wastes or sewage.
° Euthrophication - a natural or artificial process on which a body of
water contains high-concentrations of chemical-elements required
. for life making the producers bloom directly nourishing most
bacteria than aquatic organisms like fishes. This results to red
tides.
• Green House Effect: a process in which sunlight is not capable of
escaping the earth’s atmosphere due to suspended particles in air
resulting to global warming
> Contact forces result when two bodies directly touch each other as in walking,
running, playing, writing and pushing objects where friction is observed.
• Friction is a force that opposes the natural motion of an object. It is often
described as the resistance an object meets when its surface rubs against -
another surface. It acts in a direction opposite the natural motion of the
moving object.
• There are 3 types of frictional forces depending on the type of motion that
occurs between two surfaces. Static friction - if there is no relative motion
between two surfaces. Kinetic friction is the type of friction that opposes
sliding motion; is weaker than static friction. The friction force that exists in
rolling motion is called rolling friction. This is the weakest frictional force
that opposes motion.
D r. L eticia V. C am 's
N atural Science
> Non-contact forces are forces that occur when the fields around objects
interact with another field located around another body. The bodies themselves
are not directly touching each .other, but only their fields interact with one
• another.
• Gravitational force is observed when earth is attracted to the sun, earth
also pulls the sun. An-object falling freely in the air is acted upon by a force
• of gravity that cause it to accelerate, (g = 9.8
o Gravity is the force behind rainfall, the power of rivers, the pulse
of tides; It pulls the planets and stars toward their centers to form
spheres, holds planets in orbit, and gathers cosmic dust together to
start the process of star formation,
o Gravitational forces involve a gravitational field that affects space
around any mass. The strength of the field around an object is
proportional to its mass and diminishes with distance from its center.
(F = G m,m2 / r2) where G = 6.67 x 10'” Nm/kg2
• Electrostatic force is the interaction between the electric field of one
charged body another charged body
o On an atomic scale, electric forces between oppositely charged
protons and electrons hold atoms and molecules together
o An electrically insulating material such as glass or rubber does not
ordinarily allow any passage of charges through it. An electrically
conducting material such as copper will offer very little resistance to
the motion of charges, so electric forces acting on it readily produce
a current of charges. (Most electrical wires are a combination of
extremes: a very good conductor covered by a very good insulator.)
• Magnetic force is the interaction between magnetic fields pulling or
pushing each oth.er - like poles attract each other, unlike poles, repel each
other.
o Magnetic forces are very closely related to electric forces— hence the
term "electromagnetic force". Both are thought of as acting by means
of fields: an electric charge has an electric field in the space around it
that affects other charges, and a magnet has a magnetic field around
it that affects other magnets,
o Moving electric charges produce magnetic fields. For example, electric
currents circulating in the earth's core give the earth an extensive
magnetic field, which we detect from the orientation of our compass
needles.
> The interplay of electric and magnetic forces is also the basis of many
technological design, such as electric motors (in which currents produce
motion), generators (in which motion produces currents), and television tubes
(in which a beam of moving electric charges is bent back and forth by a
periodically changing magnetic field). More generally, a changing electric field
induces a magnetic field, and vice versa.
> When an unbalanced force does act on an object, the object’s motion changes.
It may change its speed or its direction of motion or both. The greater the
amount of unbalanced force, the more rapidly a given object’s speed or
direction of motion changes; the more massive an object is, the less rapidly its
speed or direction changes in response to any given force.
> Sir Isaac Newton developed three laws of motion that explains force and
motipn,.... .......... ' . . \ .v; v
• y ^ |^ |ib t iin r§miiiii$ atrest and ah object in riiotien
femains n* mqfiOn^T3trafght tye and at constant speed u/iless acted
(Inertia) ex: This is the" reason for
seat belts"and airbags as safety devices in cars. (Law of Inertia)
• 2jg|pvy|)f Mdti0i - force is diijectiy proportional to massand’accelerition
(F = ma) (LawTof Acceleration) • '
LET Reviewer
G eneral E d u catio n
• Srdnip liaW'pt motion^ - states that for every force there is atn equal afftd
; oppoSite^orpe. This is the familiar “action: reactibn" system and it governs
the "movement of rockets and jet airplanes'(Law of Interaction)
> Some complicated motions can be described not in terms of forces directly but
in terms of the pattern of motion, such as vibrations and waves. Examples are
sound waves, light waves, earthquakes, or surface waves on water.
> Wave behavior can be described in terms, of how fast the disturbance
propagates (speed, v), and in terms of the distance between successive peaks
of the disturbance (wavelength, a). Wavelength can greatly influence how a
wave interacts with matter— how well it is transmitted, absorbed, reflected,
or diffracted..
> Atmospheric gas, ozone, absorbs some of the ultraviolet radiation in sunlight—
the wavelengths that produce burning, tanning, and cancer in the skin of human
beings.
> Ultrasonic waves are sound waves that vibrate very fast. Their frequencies are
too high to be detected by the human ear. Ultrasonic sound waves have greater
penetrating power than audible sound waves andean be used to see in utero
fetuses and the functioning of human hearts. •
> Doppler effects are evident in the apparent cllange in pitch of an automobile horn
as it passes the observer. The change in thg wavelength of light from stars and
galaxies alsp illustrates Doppler. Because the light emitted from most of them
D r. Lvricia V’. O r r is
General Education
shifts toward longeftoavelengths (that is,.toward the red end of the spectrum),
astronomers^conclude that galaxies are all moving away from one another— and
hence that we are in a generally expanding universe. (Doppler shift)
> Earth is a fairly small planet. The distance of the earth from the sun ensures that
energy reaches the planet at a rate sufficient to sustain life. The earth is mostly
rock, with three-fourths of its surface covered by a relatively thin layer of water
and the entire planet enveloped by a thin blanket of air. Bulges in the water layer
are raised on both sides of the planet by the gravitational pull of the moon and
sun, producing high tides about twice a day along ocean shores. Similar bulges
are produced in the blanket of air as well.
> The earth is approximately 1.28 x 104 km in diameter at the equator. The
diameter at the poles is approximately 70 km less than at the equator because
of its rapid rotation on its axis (equatorial bulge).
> The motion of the earth and its position with regard to the sun and the moon
has noticeable effects. The earth’s one-year revolution around the sun, because
of the tilt of the earth's axis, changes how directly sunlight falls on one part or
another of the earth.
> This difference in heating different parts of the earth’s surface produces
seasonal variations in climate. The rotation of the planet on its axis every
24 hours produces the planet's night-and-day cycle. The combination of the
earth’s motion and the moon's own orbit around the earth., once in about
271/3, results in the phases of the moon (new moon, 1st quarter, full moon,
last quarter.
Natural Science
> Transfer of fieat energy at the interfaces of the atmosphere with the land
and pceans produces layers at different temperatures in both the air and the
oceans. These layers rise or sink or mix, giving rise to winds and ocean currents
that carry heat energy between warm and cool regions. The earth's rotation
. curves the flow of winds and ocean currents, which are further deflected by the
shape of the land.
• The water cycle plays an important part in determining climatic patterns—
evaporating from the surface, rising and cooling, condensing into clouds
and then into snow or rain, and falling again to the surface, where it collects
in rivers, lakes, and porous layers of rock. There are also large areas on the
earth's surface covered by thick ice (such as Antarctica), which interacts
with the atmosphere and oceans in affecting worldwide variations in
climate.
> Fresh water is an essential resource for daily life and industrial processes,
obtained from rivers and lakes and from water that moves below the earth's
surface (groundwater). Many sources of fresh water cannot be used because
they have been polluted. It can be very expensive to clean up polluted air and
water, restore destroyed forests and fishing grounds, or restore or preserve
eroded soils of poorly managed agricultural areas.
> Although the oceans and atmosphere are very large and have a great capacity
to absorb and recycle materials naturally, they do have their limits. They have
only a finite capacity to withstand change without generating major ecological
alterations that may also have adverse effects on human activities. Wind, tides,
and solar radiation can also tie harnessed to provide sources of energy.
> Forces within the earth'cause continual changes on its surface. The solid crust
of the earth— including both the continents and ocean basins— consists of
• "separate sections that overlie a hot, almost molten layer.
> The theory of plate tectonics is a unifying theory of the continental drift and
seafloor spreading theories. The current position of continents on the globe
is thought to be the result of the break-up and subsequent movement of the
plates making up the super continent, Pangea, about 250 million years ago.
Pangea is formed from the collision of continents that formed from the original
crust of the earth and started moving around 2 >4 billion years ago.
> The surface of the earth undergoes continuous cycles of building structures
and tearing them down. Weathering is process of wearing structures down
while erosion refers to moving the weathered materials. Canyons, gullies, and
valleys are the result of weathering and erosion by rivers and streams.
> Human activities have changed the earth's land surface, oceans, and
atmosphere. For instance,, reducing the amount of forest cover on the earth’s
surface has led to a dramatic increase in atmospheric carbon dioxide, which
in turn may be leading to increased average temperature of the earth’s
atmosphere and surface.
> Smoke and other substances from human activity interact chemically with the
atmosphere and produce undesirable effects such as smog, acid rain, and an
increase in the damaging ultraviolet radiation that penetrates the atmosphere.
> Intensive farming has stripped land of vegetation and topsoil, creating virtual
deserts in some parts of the-world.
The Universe
> The earth has existed for only about a third of the history of the universe and is
in comparison a mere speck in space.
>' Our sun is a medium-sized star orbiting near the edge of the arm of an
ordinary disk-shaped galaxy of stars, the Milky Way. Our galaxy contains many
billion stars, and the universe contains many billion such galaxies.
> The entire contents of the known universe expanded explosively into existence
from a single hot, dense, chaotic mass more than ten billion years ago. Stars
coalesced out of clouds of the lightest elements (hydrogen and helium), heated
up from the energy of falling together, and began releasing nuclear energy
from the fusion of light elements into heavier ones in their extremely hot, dense
cores.
> There are also a great many smaller bodies of rock and ice orbiting the sun.
Some of those that the earth encounters in its yearly orbit around the sun
glow and disintegrate from friction as they plunge into the atmosphere— and
sometimes impact the ground.
> Other chunks of rock mixed with ice have such long and off-center orbits that
they periodically come very close to the sun, where some of their surface
material is boiled off by the sun's radiation and pushed into a long illuminated
tail that we see as a comet.
> In studying the universe, a variety of tools are used. These tools include radio
and x-ray telescopes that are sensitive to a broad spectrum of information
coming to us from space. Computers can undertake increasingly complicated
calculations of gravitational systems or nuclear reactions, finding patterns
in data and deducing the implications of theories. Space probes send back
detailed pictures and other data from distant planets in our own solar system;
and huge “atom smashers” that simulate conditions in the early universe and
probe the inner workings of atoms.
D r. Leticia V. Catris
G eneral Education
Living organisms are made of the same components as all other matter, ihvolve the
same kind of transformations of energy, and move using the same basic kinds of
forces.
> Complex organisms are made of different kinds of cells specialized to carry out
specific functions, all working together to accomplish the total needs of life (Ex:
cells specialized for growing hair, secreting digestive juices, making bones and
muscles, and carrying oxygen)
• A group of similar cells performing similar functions form tissues (ex. are
human tissues are muscle tissue, blood tissue and bone tissue).
• A group of tissues working together forms an organ. Examples of human
organs are stomach, the biceps muscle, and the heart.
• Several organs working together form a system. All the systems make up
the organism. Examples of human systems include the circulatory system,
the digestive system, and the muscular system. Plant systems include the
root system, leaf system and the stem system.
> The cell is the fundamental unit of life, made up of a protoplasm, enclosed by a
plasma membrane, and containing organelles.
• The plasma membrane provides form and structure for the celf, and
permits inward passage of waste products.
• The nucleus is the control center of the cell and contains the chromosomeis,
which are made of genes, which, in turn, are made of DNA. Most directions
for cellular activity are given by the DNA in the nucleus.
D r. L e ticia V. Cacris
Natural Science
• The cytoplasm in the cell includes all the material outside the nucleus.
> In plants cells, the plasma membrane is surrounded by a cell wall made of
cellulose to provide rigidity for the cells because plants do not have a skeletal
structure.
• Plant cells also contain plastids, tiny colored bodies'that provide color and
are used for storage or as chemical factories. Chloroplasts are plastids
that contain chlorophyll, which is used in making food. When the green
leaves die in autumn, the chlorophyll fades and other plastids can be seen,
resulting in the brightly colored fall foliage.
> Cells have basic living functions, some of which are: (1) to manufacture proteins
and other materials to help build the cell; (2) to manufacture energy; and (3) to
reproduce.
• Green plants have the unique capability of manufacturing their own food in
the presence of light from water, minerals, and carbon dioxide in a process
called photosynthesis. The products of this reaction are glucose (energy),
H20, and 02. (Photosynthesis)
• Both oxygen and glucose are used in energy production. All cells; including
animal and plant cells, use oxygen for manufacturing energy and release
carbon dioxide as a waste product. Thus, oxygen is used by both plants
and animal cells, and carbon dioxide is given off by both plants and animal
cells.
> Cells reproduce either by mitosis (somatic cells) or meiosis (sex cells)
• Mitosis produce two new cells whose chromosomes are the same in
number as the parent cell (diploid)
• Meiosis produce two new cells with half the number of chromosomes as
the parent cell (haploid)
> Plants move in response to gravity, light, touch, water, temperature and some
chemicals
• Roots pointing downward shows plants respond to gravity (geotropism).
• Plants also tend to grow toward areas with the most light, causing them
to bend; houseplants bend toward the light and forest plants grow tall,
reaching for the sun. (phototropism)
• Some plants, (makahiya) have leaves that quickly close when touched
(thigmotropism).
• The respiratory system is adapted for extracting the required oxygen either
from the air or from water and removing carbon dioxide.
• Excretion is accomplished .through kidneys and other .excretory organs that
extract liquid waste from body fluids and eliminate it from the organism.
• A complex circulatory system ensures that nutrients, gases, and regulatory
hormones are transported from the specialized systems to each individual
cell and that wastes can be removed from each cell and delivered to the
excretory and respiratory organs.
• Regulatory glands secrete hormones to keep all cells working harmoniously.
• An intricate network of nerves and often a central brain structure
coordinate all systems and permit movement, thought, and interaction with
the environment.
• The muscular system allows the organism to move.
• A skeletal system provides rigidity in animals that do not otherwise have
the required structure. Skeletons may be made of bone, cartilage, or water
(such as hydroskeletons in certain worms). Some animals, such as crayfish
and lobsters, have exoskeletons (external skeletons) that are made of
chitin.
• Reproduction is accomplished either sexually or asexually through
specialized organs and specialized systems that ensure perpetuation of the
species.
D r. Lcticia V. Carris
G eneral E d u catio n
production. .
• Chromo.somes come in pairs, with a gene for each trait on each
member of the pair; thus each trait is determined by two genes that
may be dominant or recessive.'
• Dominant traits in humans include unattached earlobes, brown eyes,
curly hair, polydactyly (more than 10 fingers or toes), and the ability to
curl one’s tongue.
•* Recessive traits include attached earlobes, blue or hazel eyes, straight
hair, the normal number of fingers and toes, and the inability to curl
one’s tongue.
> Living organisms move through definite lifecycles: they come into being, they
grow, they may metamorphose, they mature, they reproduce, and they die.
> The basic principle of evolution is “survival of the fittest". This means that the
individuals best adapted to the environment generally produce the greatest
number of offspring.
• The theory of evolution offers an explanation for the immense diversity of
life found on earth, through the process of natural selection; organisms
adapt better to their environments.
G. Ecology
> Ecology is the study of the interactions of organisms with their environment
and with each other. The environment in which living organisms exist is
called the biosphere, and includes land, water, and air.
> Humans may upset the balance in ecosystems. Air and water pollution
result to the death of some organisms. Increased levels of carbon dioxide
may cause localized or global warming, upsetting the balance of energy.
Increased CFC levels reduce the thickness of the ozone layer, causing
increased levels of ultraviolet radiation.
A scientifically literate person has acquired and regularly practices the basic and
integrated science process skills. There simply is no fixed set of steps that scientists
always follow, no one path that leads them unerringly to scientific knowledge.
Scientists use the scientific method to search for cause and effect relationships
in nature. In other words, they design an experiment so that changes to one item
' cause something else to vary in a predictable way.
To make their observations, scientists use their own senses, instruments (such as
microscopes) that enhance those senses, and instruments that tap characteristics
quite different from what humans can sense (such as magnetic fields). Scientists
observe passively (earthquakes, bird migrations), make collections (rocks, shells),
and actively probe the world (as by boring into the earth's crust or administering
experimental medicines).
FORMULATING A HYPOTHESIS
A hypothesis is a proposed explanation for a phenomenon. Normally, it is a
general statement about the relationship between the manipulated variable and a
responding variable in order to explain the.questions ask. .
One can control conditions deliberately and precisely to obtain evidence. For
example, controlling the temperature, changing the concentration of chemicals, or
choosing which organisms mate with which others. By varying just one condition at
a time, one can hope to identify its exclusive effects on what happens.
Decide how to carry out the experiment, including determine the material, apparatus,
experiment set ups and the procedures to take. The experiment tests whether your
hypothesis is true or false. It. is important for the experiment to be a fair test.
Conduct a fair test by making sure that you change only one factor at a time while
keeping all other conditions the same. Repeat the experiments several times to
make sure that the first results weren’t just an accident
D r. JLecicia V. Garris
General Education
AN/U.YZINGAND'INTERPRETING DATA ’
After collecting the cfata, you will need to analyze the results of the experiment. The
results can be presented in various forms, such as a table, graph or chart.
MAKING A CONCLUSION
Draw -conclusions based on the observations and results. State whether the
hypothesis is true or false.
As a social activity, science inevitably reflects social values and viewpoints The
strongly held traditions of accurate recordkeeping, openness, and replication,
blended by the critical review of one's work by peers, serve to keep the vast majority
of scientists well within the bounds of ethical professional behavior.
a
> • Materials Technology - this involves the use and development of materials to ■
achieve a desired result..; construction, preservation and recycling of materials.
- • The characteristics of natural materials could be changed by processing, -
such as the tanning of leather and the firing of clay. Plastics are synthesized
' and designed to make automobile and space vehicle parts, food packaging
and fabrics, artificial hip joints and dissolving stitches.
• The disposal of used materials has become a problem. Some used
materials, such as organic wastes, can be returned safely to the
environment. But some materials, such as plastics, are not easily recycled
nor do they decompose quickly when returned to the environment.
Radioactive waste so hazardous for such a long time that how best to
dispose of them is not clear.
> Information and" Communication Technology- this deals with locating and
acquiring ..storing? sorting, receiviilg communication information in variety of
forms, data collection techniques, storage and data search programs, and
generation models.
. • -Computers can provide control that is as good as, or more precise and.
rapid than, human control. The operation of automobile engines, the flight ■
control of aircraft and spacecraft, and the aiming and firing of weapons can
. be computerized to take account of more information and to respond much _
more rapidly than a human operator could. However, there are also risks
that the information entered may contain errors and its speed of response
may exceed human ability to monitor or judge the output.
• • Information storage also involves issues of privacy and security. Computer-
managed information systems require means for ensuring that information
cannot be changed or lost accidentally.
D r. Lecicia V. C atris
G eneral E d u catio n
D r. L c tic ia V. C a tris
N atural Science
MULTIPLE CHOICE: Choose the letter of the answer that best completes each
statement:
A. true - energy enters the biosphere in the form of light and leaves the
biosphere in the form of heat
B. true - all energy in the biosphere is conserved; energy can neither be
created nor destroyed, it can only be transformed from one form to another
C. Not true - since energy follows a one-way path
D. true - heat is released as energy is transferred in the biosphere
5. A set of chimes made from pipes of different lengths hang as shown: Which of
the pipes will give the lowest pitch when struck by a hammer?
A. Pipe X
B. Pipe Y
C. All pipes will give the same note
• D. You cannot tell without trying
Dr. Lericia V. C a m s
N atural Science
13. Ultrasound is often used by medical workers to obtain features of internal body
' parts. Infrasound on the ofher hand is commonly used in_________________ :___.
A. monitoring conditions in pregnant women
6. detecting harmful living tissues inside the body
C.
D. providing instant moving pictures of tidal waves and earthquakes ■
14. How is the conservation of mechanical energy described in a falling object?.
A. A falling object loses kinetic energy and gains potential energy.
B. A falling object loses kinetic energy and loses potential energy.
C. A falling object gains kinetic energy and gains potential energy.
D ^ A falling object gains kinetic energy and loses potential energy, 'r
15. When we say that chemical reactions in the cell waste energy, we mean that:
-A. energy is being destroyed.
B. pieces of chemicals are being broken.
C. chemical energy is being converted to heat energy which is lost.
D. cells use only the chemicals they need and get rid of all excess chemicals.
16. Which law of force and motion explains this occurrence, when a rocket is
propelled upward by the powerful downward discharge of exhaust gases?
; A>, Universal Gravitation
Action and Reaction
C. Applied Force
D. Inertia
17. Which of the following forms olf energy is demonstrated by a tightly coiled spring?
A. Steam energy
B. Kinetic energy
£. Potential energy-
D .' Chemical energy
18. Which of the following process takes place when ice cubes form vapor without
passing through the liquid state?
A ., Transpiration (Q j Sublimation
B. Condensation of Evaporation••
19. Which of the following processes is better associated with the technology than
with Science?
A. Constructing concepts and laws
B. Discovering forms of matter
Designing a workable system
Observing natural phenomena
20. What nuclear process occurs in the explosion of an atomic bomb?
K . Fission C. Disintegration
B. Fusion D. Integration
21. Which of the following is true of all planets in the solar system?
A. They have the same surface temperature
B. They can support human life
C. The are exactly of the same size
D. They revolve around the sun
22. Tn which of the following mediums will sound travel slowest?
& Air B.' Brick C. Oil D. Water
23. Which of the following factors does sound in air depend on?
A. Frequency of sound • (£) Air temperature
a " Wavelength of sound D. Period of the wave
24. Which of the following disposal system can food scraps and food peelings be
converted to humus?
A. Open dump
Ei. Sanitary landfill
C. Recycling
^T) Composting
25. Today scientists' report about the formation of holes in the ozone layer of the
atmosphere. This dangerous trend is being blamed on one of the following
wrong practices:
the excessive use of aerosols
B. the use of soil fertilizers
Ci the use of ozone itself on the surface of the earth
'removal of protective cover like green plants
D r. Lericia V. C atris
G eneral E d u cation
5. The diagrams beiow show the sun, a boat and an observer's eye. Which of the
following diagrams best represent how you might see the boat?
A.i---------------:------------ -=---------------------------------
1 ®
' ,/
:Or 1
• :0 ;
* 1
-<T\
tK
o
i '
;Or -*■
t
\
6. Which law of motion explains what happens every time we walk?- rsoc- '.r .r
A. Inertia ^ Interaction. -P m r
B. Acceleration D. Universal gravitation
7. Which property of light accounts for the phenomenon of color?
A. amplitude C. velocity
B. frequency ® wavelength.
8. Ana formulated a hypothesis that cotton will grow larger bolls (pods) if
magnesium is added to the soil. She has two experimental fields of cotton,
one with magnesium and one without. Which data should be collected to
support this hypothesis?
A. color of the cotton bolls in both fields
B. height of the cotton plants in both fields
<d?'diameter of the cotton bolls in both ‘fields
D. length of the growing season in both fields
N atural Scien ce
10. In an experiment, a vacuum is created when all air is removed from a tube.
A coin and bits of confetti are released in the vacuum at the same time. They
fall at the same rate and reach the bottom at the same time. Which of the
following is proven in this experiment?
i. In a vacuum, the rate of fall is the same for all objects regardless of
weight
II. Outside a vacuum, air resistance is what makes different objects fall at
different rates
III. Gravity has no effect ai all on objects that fall in a vacuum.
13. Which of the following statements is definitely true about the nature science?
A. ' Science can always uncover the truth in the realm of nature.
B. Science will help meike the world a better place to live in.
C. fheofies in science dan be disproved-by"testing; a’ well established
^theory can bedemojished with asingle observation. . .<
D. Scientific work requires a dedication that excludes' the lives of people in
other fields of work. ■
14. A grasshopper was put inside a covered bottle. After sometime, the
grasshopper died. The statement: “The grasshopper died because the oxygen
in the bottle was exhausted is ____________
A. a fact C. an inference
B. a hypothesis (01 I cohclusfen
15. Chemical Heat Energy Mechanical Energy (with wasted heat)
The sequence of energy changes shown explains which event?
A. a flashlight is on
B„ a candle bums
C. '• gasoline burhs to power a car t
DC electric current runs a refrigerator
16. Whichofthefollowingisthetechnologicalconceptratherthanscienceconcept?
A. Tungsten has a high melting piont.
B. Melts conduct electricity, some better than the others.
C.- When electricity passes through metals, heat is generated.
D:'| Lightibulbs are perfected through methods of manufacturing.,,
17. A paint tefchnolbgist use^ “different kinds d f white paint onto concrete wall. He
came back every two months amd observed the painted areas with a hand lens.
Which of the following questions could be a possible problem for this experiment?
A .' Which paint color is best for concrete walls'?
B. Do walls need to be painted with different colors?
C. Which kintf of white paint faded fastest under the sun?
D. Which part of the concrete wall needs to be painted?
• «
18. Consider the problem: “Which toothpaste brand is more effective in killing
mouth bacteria?” Which of the following variables is manipalable?
A. brands of toothpaste
J3. brands of toothbrush
number ,pf time:to brush'teeth
6 . number of persons to* brush teeth
19. The wise use of resources for the permanent good of all is referred to as:
A. restoration
preservation
(C V conservation ' j
D. reforestation
20. The following statements given the underlying principles of technology except:
A. All technological system could fail.
B. All technologies involve control
CA Technologies always have side effects.
D,' Technology often provides tools for science iS irfS iliiil#
21. The statements below refer to the interraction of forces in nature. Which of
these are true?
1. A change in motion is always due to the effects of unbalanced forces.
2. Every objectin the universeexerts a gravitational force on every other object.
3. Frictional forces can never be used to increase velocity
4. Magnetic and electrical forces are unrelaed to one another.
Dr. iLecicia V. C a m s
General Education
23. Of the thousands of meteor that enter the Earth's atmosphere each year, only
a few is actually observed to hit the earth. Why?
4 .Meteors fall only at night when most people are asleep.
• B. ®Tfie earth's atmosphere cause many small meteors to burn up.
C. The brightness of the sun's light niake it impossible' f •
D. Peoplejustdon’tFecognizethembecausetheylooksimilartotheeath’srocks.
24. If the following radioactive emissions are arranged in the order of increasing
penetrating power, with the least penetrating radiation first, the order is:
(g j §fphaVbeta,;garhma '
B. beta, gamma, alpha
C gamma, alpha, beta
D. beta, alpha, gamma
25. The processes below are steps in scientific research that may lead to theory
development or theory replacement. How will you arrange logically to bring
about conceptual development or modification?
1. hypotheses
2. evaluate results
3. observe new phenomenon
4. measure dependent variables
Politics an
Governance with
the Philippine
Constitution
Prepared by:
D r. B enjam in M . D om ingciL Jr.
Competencies:
Political Science is the study of the phenomena of the state and government;
it is derived from two Greek words “polis" or “city" which today would mean a
sovereign state and “scire" meaning “science”
Rodee (1980). defined political science “As a branch of social science, it deals
with the theory, organization^govemment, and practice of the state;
Political Science also deals with those relations among men and groups, which
are subject to control by state, with relations of state to other states.
Aristotle (324-332 B.C.) a Greek philosopher was credited with the observation
that, ‘man is by nature a political animal." By this statement, Aristotle meant
that the basic underlying substance of human existence is politics, that is, that
man is predisposed to be involved.in politics. He added that the only way to
optimize the potentials and capabilities of an individual and to achieve the
highest form of social existence was through interaction with others in a state
(cited in Rodee, etal, 1983).
. ) i . i k ’n in m in M . fr.
II. W H A T IS P O L IT IC S ?
In its broadest sense, politics includes the decision enforcing processes in any
group that makes and enforces rules on its members. Politics' is unavoidable.
Man is involved or will be involved in some kind of politics (Dahl, 1991). Every
Filipino comes upon face to face with politics in almost every aspect of his life.
He encounters politics in the governance of his country and the political unit he
resides in -the barangay or municipality. A citizen encounters politics in school,
in the church, in the business establishments he works, the employees’ union
in which he is a member, or in sxio-civic organization he joins, and in a host of
other organizations and a myriad of situations. He may choose to ignore politics,
but definitely can never escape from its influence. *"
Political science is the systematic study of the State and Government. The word
political is derived from the Greek word 'polis' meaning a city or what today is
equivalent to a sovereign state; the word 'science' comes from the Latin word
'scire' meaning to know. .
Political Science shares common interest with other social disciplines namely:
to examine and interpret the adjustments which groups of people have made
to the combinations •of natural environment conditions which exist in the
regions where they live.
CONCEPT OF A STATE
1. Divine Theory - it holds that the state of divine creation and the ruler is
obtained by 60D to govern the people. Reference has been made by advocates
of this theory to the laws which Moses received at Mt. Sinai.
2. Necessity or Force Theory.- it maintains that states must have been created
through force by some great warriors who imposed their will upon the week.
3. Paternalistic Theory - it attributes the origin of states to the enlargement of
the family, which remained under the authority of the father or the mother. By
natural stages, the family grew into a clan , then developed into a tribe which
broadened into a nation that becomes a state.
4. Social Contract Theory - it asserts that the early states must have been formed
bv deliberate and voluntary compact among the people to form a society and
organize government for their common good. This theory justifies the right of
" the people to revolt against a Dad ruieT
i Cdhstituent - those which constitute the bond of society and are, therefore
compulsory in nature.
G eneral E d u catio n
CONCEPT OF NATION
A nation is a group of persons occupying a portion of the territory sharing the same
language, culture, tradition, and history.
A state is more oj,a judicial or legal concept, while a nation is more of a racial or
ethnic concept. A nation may or may not be independent of external control A state
may consist of one or more nations while a nation may consist of one or more states.
1. Police Power - it is the power of the state to regulate individual's rights and
property for the general welfare.
2. Eminent .Domain or Power of Expropriation - it is the power of the state to
take possession of private property for public purpose and after payment of just
compensation. ^ ,
3. Power ofTaxation - the power of the state to enforce proportionate contributions
from the people for support of all government programs and services.
\ ) t. t>eni.un:n X . Jr
G en eral fcducacion
FORMS OF GOVERNMENT
1. Democracy - comes from the Latin terms 'demos’ and ‘kratos’. It is a form of
government wherein the power or sovereignty is exercised and or resides in the
people. It may be classified as pure or representative democracy.
2. Aristocracy - a form of government wherein the power is exercised by a limited
ZIZ Tew orthe so-called elite. It is always regarded as the privileged class.
3. Monarchy - a form of government wherein the power or sovereignty is
exercised by one person only, usually a king or a queen. It could either be
absolute or limited monarchy.
4. Parliamentary - a form of government wherein the President serves as nominal
or titular head. It is-the Prime Minister that runs the affairs of the State. He is
directly accountable to the people. Under this system the ministry is legally
responsible to legislature and consequently to the electorate.
5. Presidential - a form of government wherein the President is the chief executive
of the state and independent of the legislature with respect to his tenure acts,
and policies..
D r. B e n ja m in M . D om iflgcil, Jr.
6. Federal - a form of government where the power of the state is divided into '
two namely: national for national affairs and local for local affairs. Each organ is
' independent in its own sphere.
7. Military - a form of government established and controlled by military
authorities over a beleaguered state:---------------------------- -
8. Revolutiona'ry-aformofgovernmentwheretattieStat&isobtaiaedbyffl'eansoffBroe....
9. DeJure-aformofgovernmentthatisfoundedonexistinglegalorconstitutionalbqsis
10. De Facto - a form of government that is not founded on constitutional law. !t
exists in fact but not in law. ■ — ------------------------------
11. CivH - a form of government that is run by elected civilian officials
The Philippines as nation has passed through several stages and has been under
different colonial rule in the course of its history. Discussed hereunder is th e
evolution of the Philippines together with the different forms of government thathad
been implemented by the different colonizers.
Social classes in the barangay are divided into four: the nobiiity or the maharla;
the-freeman or the timawa; the serfs or the aliping namamahay; and the slaves or
the aliping sa guiguilid.
Social Science - Politics and Governance with the Philippine Constitution
The early laws were both written ant* unwritten. The written were promulgated by'
the datus. The two known written laws are the Maragtas Code written by Datu
Sumankwel in 1250 AD and the Code of Kalantiaw written by Datu Kalantiaw in
1433 AD both in Panay. The unwritten laws can be seen in the Filipino culture.
Spain’s title Philippines was based on the discovery of the Philippines by Ferdinand
Magellan in March-1521 and consummated by the conquest of Miguel Lopez de
Legaspi forty - five years later. Spain kept the Philippines for almost four centuries
-until-l 898 when the Philippines was ceded by Spain to the United States by virtue
of the Ireaty ofParis.
The Philippics was governed by the King" of Spain through Mexico from 15(?5 to
1821. When Mexico gained independence, the Philippines were ruled directly by
Spain through the Council of Indies from 1821 to 1837. In 1837, legislation for the
Philippines was temporarily performed by the Council of Ministers. From 1863, the
Ministry of Ultramar exercised general powers of supervision over Philippines affairs.
The Spanish government in the Philippines was centralized in structure and national
in scope. The barangays were consolidated into pueblos (towns) and headed by a
Governador who represents the Governor - general in the province. Cities governed
under special Charters were created. Each of the cities had an Ayuntamiento or
Cabildo (city council). Cebu was the first city to be established in 1565 in the
Philippines. The second was manila in 1571.
To strengthen the judicial system, Spain established the Royal Audiencia in'1583
in Cebu and in Vigan, which exercised appellate jurisdiction over criminal cases
coming from the surrounding areas. In 1886, the Courts of First Instance were
established in each province and the Justice of the Peace Courts wre established in
the town level. Special courts were also organized.
During the Spanish Period, several forms of de facto government were established.
The Katipunan - the Katipunan was a secret society that participated the Philippine
revolution against the Spanish in August 26,1896. The Katipunan was organized ”
by Andres Bonifacio. The Central government of the Katipunan was vested in
the Supreme Council (Kataas - taasang Sanggunian). A provincial Council was
established in each province. A popular council was establishing in the town
level. The judicial power was exercised by a Judicial Council or the Sangguniang
Hukuman. When Bonifacio died, another government was established by Gen. Emilio
F. Aguinaldo who acted as the first president of the Philippines of the Philippines
republic by virtue of the election in the Tejeros Convention on March 22,1897.
The Military Government- The American military rule in the Philippines started
on April 14,1898, the day after the capture of Manila. The existence of war gave
the President of the United States the power to establish a Military government.
His authority was delegated to the military governor who exercised, as long as the
war lasted, all powers of government executive, legislative and judicial. The three
American Military Governors were: Gen. Wesley Meritt, Gen. Elwell Otis and the last
was Gen. Arthur McArthur. .
D r. 3 c n u m u n M . D o m tn g c ii
‘•oa.'J ScKn-cc * itirivi .uu‘ >ixh .:nc Constitution
The Civil Government- the Spooner Amendment ended the military regime in
the Philippines. On July 4, 1901 a civil government was inaugurated headed by
a Civil Governor, in February 6; 1905, the title was changed to Governor-General,
who exercised legislative powers. He remained as President of the Philippine
Commission, the sole lawmaking body of the government from 1901.to -'H)H5rthe-
Philippine Commission acted as the upper house of the legislative branch with the,
Philippine Assembly serving as a lower house. With the passage of the Jones Law in
1916, these two bodies gave way to the Philippine legislature. The Philippines w as
represented in the United States by two President Commissioners who were elected
by the Philippine Legislature. These Commissioners had seats in the United States
House of Representatives, receiving the same emoluments and other privileges as
the American members of the body, but without the right to vote.
The first Civil Governor was Judge William H. Taft (1901 -1903). He was succeeded
by Luke F. Wright (1904-1906) who was the first American to enjoy the title of
Governor-General of the Philippines. The last Governor-General was Frank Murphy
(1933 - 1935) who was also the first High Commissioner of the Philippinesupon
the inauguration of the Commonwealth government of the Philippines. A
Representatives. The Judicial power was vested in the Supreme Court and inferior
courts provided by law. The government of the Commonwealth was autonomous
ii nature. The Filipinos had almost complete control over the domestic affairs, the
United States retaining control only over matters involving foreign affairs.
When the Philippines was finally liberated from the hands of the Japanese, the
Third Philippine Republic was inaugurated on July 4,1946 with Manuel A. Roxas
as president and Elpidio Qurino as Vice President. Roxas died on April 1,1948,
paving the way. for the Qurino presidency which lasted until 1953. Qurino was
followed by Ramon Magsaysay, who was not able to finish his term when he
died in a plane crash on March 17,1957. Carlos Garcia succeeded Magsaysay.
Garcia was followed by Diosdado Macapagal who served the country for only one-
term. Macapagal was defeated by Ferdinand-Marcos in the presidential election
of 1965. ;
The Marcos Years. Marcos took his oath of office on December 30,1965. He was
reelected in 1969, due to his outstanding performance as chief executive. However,
before the end of his second term (1969-1973), Marcos made serious efforts to
amend the 1935 Constitution which was in effect at that time. A Constitutional
Convention was created which drafted the 1973 Constitution. But even before the
framing of this charter was finished, Marcos issued Proclamation No. 1081 which
placed the entire archipelago under Martial Law. By virtue of this declaration, the
Congress was abolished, the opposition leaders and those who were critical of
the Marcos administration were either imprisoned or they disappeared. Marcos
assumed executive; legislative and even-judicial powers of the government. He
virtually controlled all tSe aspects of Philippine politics through his Presidential
Decrees and through the Batasang Pambansa.
This event led to the so-called EDSA People- Power Revolution from February
22-25, 1986, that paved the way for the downfall, of the 20 years of Marcos
Presidency.
President of the Philippines on February 2 5 ,1986-in Club Filipino, San Juan. Metro
Manila. Aquino issued' Proclamation No. 3 on March 25, 1.986 promulgating the
Freedom Constitution. Thereafter, on June 2 , 198§, she appointed a Constitutional
Commission composed pf fifty members whichjrafted theJ98Z.Constitution.
On February 2,1987, the Filipino people voted to ratify the charter, thereby legalizing
the restoration of democratic government and institutions in the country. This was
followed by the election of the members of the bicameral legislative body in May
1987 and the election of local executives.
On May 11,1992 the first Marcos presidential election was held and Fidel Ramos,
the former Chief of Staff of the Armed Forces and the anointed successor of Corazon
Aquino was elected president.
The Fidel Ramos Presidency. Ramos was the former military officer to become
the president of the Philippinesrtfe usedJiisJ<nowieage or tne Kmiippine Military
to reestablish a tradition of civilian control over the armed forces. He also built on
the process of restoring democracy to the Philippines by addressing the nation's
most difficult economic reform program based on privatization and deregulation,
opening banking to foreign investment and transferring government assets to
private ownership. He moved quickly to resolve the country's serious electric-
power shortage, which had been a detriment to economic growth, by investing
in the domestic power-generating infrastructure. His government improved tax-
collection policies and practices and this combined with the growing economy
to generate higher tax revenues for the government. In 1994-1995 the country
’ had its first consecutive government budget surpluses. Despite.of economic
The Joseph E. Estrada Presidency. In 1998 elections, Ramos and the ruling
coalition lakas-NUCD, gave their support to Jose de Venecia. Joseph Estrada,
vice president under Ramos and a populist politician, entered the race as a
candidate of his own party, the Partido ng Masang Pilipino (Party of the Fil ipino
Masses) which entered a coalition with two leading opposition parties. Estrada
campaigned on promises to work toward improving the lives of poor Filipinos. He
won the election with the widest margin ever in Philippine politics.
A major focus of the Estrada administration was “food security'1which invo Ived
agricultural modernization and major infrastructure development, projects.
Despite its rhetoric, however, the government did not make much progress in
implementing its “pro-poor” platform. The opposition became more outspoke n in
its criticism of Estrada, and his administration became embroiled in allegation s of
cronyism and corruption. The corruption allegations led to Estrada's impeachm ent
by the House of Representatives November 2000. His trial in the Senate w as
suspended in mid-January 2001, however, after the prosecution team, resigned
to protest the suppression of evidence. Thousands of Filipinos then took to "the
streets of Manila to demand Estrada's resignation, however, Estrada retained
strong support among the urban poor.
2. 1935 Constitution
The drafting of the Constitution lasted six months from July 30, 1934 to
February. 8, 1935. Some delegates, however, had signed the document
beginning February 9. Altogether, there were 200 signers.
The Tydings-Mcduffie Law required that the Constitution, after its approval by
the President of the United States, be submitted to the Filipino people for their
ratificatioaouejection. May 14,1935, the Plebiscite on the Constitution was held
The electorate overwhelming ratified the Constitution. The ballots cast in favor
of it totaled 1,213,046 and those against only 44,963. *
3. 1973 Constitution
The 1973 Constitution shortly after the start of martial law, the delegates to the
Constitutional Convention reassemble and resume work. They worked more
quickly and finished the new constitution on November 29,1972, signing it on
the following day.
February 2,1987. The electorate in a plebiscite held for the purpose ratified the
draft of constitution.
Many political science writers widely regard these two term»as identical. It is the
*■ considered view that the acts of the government (within the prescribed limits of the
delegation of powers) are the acts of the state. Legally, however,-undor the contract:
of agency, the government is the agent through which the will of the'statelscarried
out. The state cannot exist without the government but it is possible to have a
government without a state.
CONCEPT OF CONSTITUTION
Meaning of Constitution
According to Judge Cooley, a constitution is a body of rules and maxims in
accordance with which the power of sovereignty is habitually exercised.
2.__ To promote public welfare, this involves the safety, prosperity, health, and
_______ happiness of the people.
1. Written or rigid - is one, the provisions of which have been reduced to writing
and embodied in one or more instruments at a particular time. Example:
Philippine and U.S Constitutions
2. Unwritten or flexible - is one which has not been committed to writing a t
any specific time but is the collective product and accumulation of customary
rules, judicial decisions, dicta of statements and legislative’ enactmenlT o f
fundamental character written but scattered in various records without haring
any compact form in writing.
PREAMBLE ----------------------------
Meaning
The term preamble conies from the Latin word 'preambulare' which means 'to walk
before'. Strictly speaking, preamble is not an integral part of the Constitution. Its
true office is to expound on the scope and nature, the extent and application of the
powers actually conferred by the constitution. (Watson, Const.Vol I p.92)
3. Contiguous Zone - beyond the territorial sea, may extend to not more than 24
nautical miles from the archipelagic baselines. The state may exercise, in the
contiguous zone, the control necessary to prevent and punish 'infringements
of its customs, fiscal, immigration or sanitary laws and.regulations within the
territory or territorial sea.
4. Exclusive Economic Zone - which beyond and adjacent to the territorial sea,
may not extend more than 200 nautical miles from the archipelagic baselines.
The archipelagic State has sovereign rights in the EEZ to explore, manage and
exploit all the natural resources living and non-living in the waters, the sea bed
and subsoil.
5. Continental Shelf - is the seabed and subsoil of the submarine areas that
extend beyond its territorial sea throughout the natural prolongation of its
territory to the outer.
v Seabed - is the land holding the sea beyond the seashore. *
' Subsoil - is the soil below the surface soil including mineral and natural
resources.
Insular shelves - are relatively shallow beds of sea bottom bordering the land
Mass, the outer edges of which sink considerably until the great ocean Depths
are reached.
The Convention on the Law of the Sea ( under the sponsorship of the United Nations)
signed in Jamaica onfOecember 10,1982 fixes a 12 mile territorial sea limit and
establishes an economic zone from the baselines. It adopts and recognizes the
■archipelagic principle but set forth limitations thereon consisting of respect for right
-ot4be-ships of other states to pass though the territorial sea as well as archipelagic
waters and respect for rights of innocent passage and passage through archipelagic
sea lanes subject to the promulgation by local authorities by pertinent rules and
regulations.
ARTICLE II
Declaration of Principles and Policies
Section 2. The Philippines renounces war as the instrument of national policy, adopts
the generally accepted principles of international law of the land and adheres to the
policy of peace, equality, justice, freedom, cooperation, and amity with all nations.
Section 3. Civil authority is, at all times, supreme over the military. The Armed Force
of the Philippines is the protector of the people and the State. Its goal is to secure
the sovereignty of the State and in the integrity of the national territory.
The idea of the supremacy of the civilian authority, the highest of such authority
being the president, over the military has always been recognized in our jurisdiction
by implication from express provision of the 1935 Constitution and by practice.
The principle 'of the separation of the Church and the State being inviolable is
implied from the constitutional prohibitions that 'no law shall be made respecting
an fistahlishmant nf religion' anrl that ‘ nn public money or .property shall be
appropriated, applied, paid or employed, directly or indirectly, for use, benefit, or
support of any sect, church domination, sectarian institution or system of religion.
CLASSES OF RIGHTS
1.. Natural Right - possessed by every citizen conferred upon him by God as a
human being.
Example: right to life, right to live
2. Constitutional Right - rights conferred and protected by the Constitution part
" 7 'Of tne“fur'cJaTnentaI law cannot be modified or taken away by the law making
body.
3. Statutory Right - it is provided by laws promulgated by the law making body. 11
can be abolished by the same body.
C U S S E S OF CONSTITUTIONAL RIGHTS
1. Civil Right - right which the law enforces to private individual for the purposes
of security, happiness and enjoyment
2. Political Right - right of the citizen to participate directly or indirectly in the
establishment of administration of the government
3. Social and Economic Right - it is intended to insure the well being and
economic security of the individual.
Right of the Accused - intended to protect persons accused of any crime. They of
law nor shall any person be denied the equal protection of the law.
DUE PROCESS
Concept of due process of law which hears before it condemns and proceeds upon
inquiry before rendering judgment. Under the constitution, a person may be deprived
by the state of his life, liberty-or-property provided-dLie procfiss_ofJaw is observed.
Section 2. The right of the people to be secure in their persons, houses, papers and
effects against unreasonable searches and seizures of whatever nature and for any
purposes shall be issued exceptupon probable cause to be determined personally
by the judge after e xamination under nath or affirmation of the complaint and the
witness he may produced, and particularly describing the place to be searched and
the persons or things to be seized. : '
Search Warrant - is an order in writing in the name of the people of the Philippines,
signed by a judge, directed to the police officer, commanding him to search for
personal property and to bring it before the court.
G e n e r a ! E d u c a tio n
Warrant of Arrest - is an order in writing, issued in the name of the people of the
Philippines, signed by a judge, directed to the police officer, commanding him to
arrest a person, that he may be bound o answer for the offense committed.
1. Probable cause
2. To be determined personally by a judge
3. After examination tinder oath or affirmation of the complaint and his witness
4. Particularly describing the place to be searched and the persons or things to be
seized
Right to privacy is concisely defined as the right to be left alone. It has also been
defined, as the- right of a person to be free from unwarranted interference by the
public in matters which the public is not necessarily concerned.
G eneral Ed u catio n
Section 9. Private propejty shall not be taken for public use without just
compensation.
Eminent domain - is power of the state to take private property for public purpose
upon payment of just compensation to its'owner.
_________ Just compensation - is the fair marked value of the property at the time of the
taking'.
I
RIGHTS OF THE ACCUSED IN CRIMINAL CASES
A bill of attainder is a legislative act, which inflicts punishment without a judicial trial.
Dr. B e n ja m i n M . D o m i n g c i I , J r
S o c i a l S c i e n c e - P o l i t i c s an ti G o v e r n a n c e w i t h t h e P h i l i p p i n e C o n s t i t u t i o n
ARITICLEIV -CITIZENSHIP
Meaning of citizenship
1. Citizenship is a term denoting membership of a citizen in political society,
which membership implies, reciprocally, a duty of allegiance on the partof the
member and duty of protection on the part of the state.
Citizenship by Birth
There are two principles or rules that govern citizenship by birth, namely:
1. Jus Sanguinis - relationship by blood is the basis of the acquisition of citizash ip
under this rule. The child follows the citizenship of both of the parents or ae of -
them. This is the predominating principle in the Philippines.
2. Jus Soli or Jus Loci - place of birth as the basis for acquiring citizenship d e r
this rule.
ARTICLE V SUFFRAGE_________________
Section 1. Suffrage may be exercised by all citizens of the Philippines not otherwise
disqualified by law who are at least eighteen years of age, and who shall have
resided in the Philippines for at least, one year and in the place wherein they
proposed to vote for at least six months immediately preceeding the election. No
literacy, property or other substantive requirement shall be imposed on the exercise
of suffrage.
Meaning of Suffrage
Suffrage is the right and obligation to vote of qualified citizens in the election of
certain national and local officers of the government and in the decision of public
questions submitted.taJhe. people._____
Scope of Suffrage
1. Election - it is a means by which the people choose their officials for definite and
fixed periods and to whom, they entrust, for the time as their representatives,
the exercise of powers of government.
2: Plebiscite - it is the name given to a vote of the people expressing their choice
for or against a proposed law or enactment submitted to them.
3. Referendum - it is the submission of a law or part thereof passed by the
national or local legislative body to the voting citizens of a Country for their
ratification or rejection.
4. Initiative - it is the process whereby the people directly propose and.enact laws.
5. Recall - it is the method by which a public officer may be removed from office-----
during his tenure or before the expiration of his term by a vote of the people
after registration of a petition signed by a required percentage of the qualified
voters.
Qualifications of Voters
He must be
1. A citizen (male or female) of the Philippines
2. Not otherwise disqualified by law
3. At least eighteen(18) years of age; and
4. Have resided in the Philippines for at least six(6)months preceeding the election
Section - The Congress shall provide a system for securing the secretary and
sanctity of the batlot as well as a system for absentee voting by qualified Filipinos
abroad. - ' — ---------- — ----------
The Congress shall also design a procedure for the disabled and the illiterate's to
vote without the assistance of other persons. Until then, they shall be allowed to
vote under the existing laws and such rules as the Commission on'Elections may
promulgate to protect the secrecy of the ballot. •
ft cn ra m in M . D o n u n g d h j r .
c-.iiicuciou
_________ Law; rnfnr tn “MiitPT which are the written enactments of the legislative
governing the relations of the people among themselves and between them and
the government and its agencies.
THE SENATE
Qualifications of a Senator
1. A natural born citizen of the Philippines________________' ----------- ----------
2. at last 35 years of age on the date.of the election d a y ___________ '
3. Able to read and write ------------ .
4. A registered voter
5. A resident of the Philippines for not less than two_(2)_years^ immediately--
proceeding the election day •
Maximum terms - a senator is disqualified to serve for more than two consecutive
terms but can still run for reelection after a break or interval
Registered Voter - one who has all the qualifications for a voter and none of .the
disqualifications provided by law and who has registered himself in the listof voters.
Residence - the place where one has his true permanent home and to which
whenever absent, he has the intention of returning.
Qualifications of a Representative • •
1. A natural born citizen of the Philippines
2. At least 25 years of age on the election day
3. Able to read and write
4. Except for party-list representative, a registered voter
5. A resident thereof, for a periochDf not less tha one (1) year preceding the e le ctio n /
T First'reading
2. Referral to appropriate committee
3. Second reading . . .
4\ Debates . ____ ’ •
-5 — Frinfflpmrdisfribution
6. Third reading '
7. Referral to the other House
8. Submission to join bicameral committee ■
9. Submission to the President . •
Section 1. The executive power shall be vested in the President of the Philippines
Executive Power - defined as the power to administer
Section 2. No person may be elected as President unless he is natural born citizen
of the Philippines
Section 3. There shall be Vice-president who shall have the same qualifications and
term of office arid be elected with and in the same manner as the President
Section 1. The judicial power shall be vested in one Supreme Court and in such
lower courts as may be established by law.
Meaning of Judicial Power - is the power to apply the law to contests and disputes
concerning legally recognized rights or duties between the state and private person
or between individual litigants in case properly brought before the judicial tribunal.
Section 4. The SUPREME COURT shall be composed of the Chief Justice and 14
Associate Justices. It may sit en .banc orJruts discretion, in divisions-eHhree, fiver
.seven members. Any vacancy shall be filled within 90 days fromjlisjccurrence-
thereof..
Qualifications for members of the Supreme Court and any lower collegiate court
1. He must be a natural born citizen of the Philippines, a naturalized citizen may
not be appointed.
2. He must be at least forty (40) years of age
3. He must have, for fifteen (15) years or more, been a judge of a lower court or
engaged in the practice of law in the Philippines
4. He must be a person of proven competence, integrity, probity, and independence
Common Features:
1. They are multi - headed bodies.
2. They are categorized as independent by the constitution.
3. Their powers and functions are defined in the constitution.
4. The commissioners are required to be natural - born citizens of the Philippines.
Qualifications of Members
1. They must be natural born citizens of the Philippines.
2. They must be at least thirty five (35) years of age at the time of appointment.
3. They must be persons with proven capacity for public administration.
4. They must not have been candidates for any elective position in the elections
immediately preceding their appointment.
The term civil service means that professionalized body of men and women who
have made of the government service of a lifetime career. The scope of this are
every branch, agency, subdivisions and instrumentality df the government including
every government -owned or controlled corporation with original charter
General Provisions •
Section 1. The territorial and political subdivisions of the Republic'of the Philippines
are the provinces, cities, municipalities and baranoavs. There shall he antnnnm n ns
regions in Mindanao and the Cordilleras as hereinafter provided.
LOCAL GOVERNMENT
Concept
Local government refers to a political subdivision of a nation or state, is constituted
by law and has substantial control of local affairs which officials elected or otherwise
locally selected.
These units are also called the political subdivisions of the country.
Public office - is defined as the right authority, and duty created andconferre
by law in a given period either fixed by law or enduringat the pleasure of the
supporting power.
Public officer - is the individual invested with some portion of the sovereign
functions of the government for the benefit of.the public.
The principle of the public accountability is emphasized in this section. All public
officers and servants must consider their positions as sacred trusts and not as a
means for achieving of power and wealth.
The only penalty to impose in an officer is limited 'to removal from office and
disqualification to hold any office under the Republic of the Philippines . If a criminal-
offense has been committed, the party convicted is still liable to prosecution, trial, and
punishment.
The power of the President to grant reprieves, commutations, and pardons does not
extend to cases of impeachment.
..... Landsof thepDb'lic domain are classified into agricultural, forest or timber, mineral
lands, and national parks. Agricultural lands of the public domain may be further
~classified by law according to the use to which they may be devoted. Alienable
lands of the public domain shall be limited to agricultural lands. Private corporations
orassociationrmay-not hold-saeh-alienable lands, of the public domain except by
lease, for a period not exceeding twenty-five years, renewable for not more than
twenty-five years, and not exceed one thousand hectares in area. Citizens of the
Philippines may lease not more than five hundred hectares or acquire not more than
twelve hectares thereof by purchase, homestead, or grant.
The congress shall give highest priority to the enactment of measures that protect
and enhance the right of all people to human dignity, reduce social, economic and
political inequities and remove cultural inequalities by equitable diffusing wealth and
political power for the common good. •— --------------------
To this end, the state shall regulate the acquisition, ownership, use, and disposition
of property and its increments. }
The promotion of social justice shall include the commitment to create economic
opportunities based on freedom of initiative and self-reliance.
LABOR
The state shall afford full protection to labor, local and overseas, organized and
unorganized, and promote full employment and equality of employment opportunities
for all.
HUMAN RIGHTS
the ^embers qf the Commission shall be provided by law. Until this Commission is
constituted, the existing Presidential Committee on Human Rights shall continue to
exercise its present functions and power.
All educational institutions shall include the study of the Constitution as part of the
curricula^They shall inculcate patriotism and nationalism, foster love of humanity,
....respect for human rights, appreciation of the role of national heroes in the historical
development of the country, teach the rights and duties of citizenship, strengthen
ethical and spiritual values, develop moral character and personal discipline ,
encourage critical arid creative thinking, broaden scientific and technological
knowledge, and promote vocational efficiency.
The State recognizes the Filipino family as the foundation of the nation. Accordingly,
it shall strengthen its solidarity and actively promote its total development.
Marriage, as an inviolable social institution, is the foundation of the family and shall
be protected by the State.
Directions: Read the questions properly. Indicate your answer by encircling the
letter of your choice.
Answer: D
Analyze the statement. What is the focus of the basic information? It is concerned with
*one of the essentials attributes of a state. Definitely, option A is not a specific description
of a state because operationally defined, a state necessarily possesses all the attributes
like persons, territory, sovereignty and government while the statement refers only to
an element of a State. On the other hand, option B has for its object the institution or
aggregate of institutions which rule a society. It is concerned with the operation and
organization of government. Option C is synonymous to independence or the power
to impose obedience upon the citizenry and therefore not acceptable as a choice to
describe the statement. Option D provides the accurate definition as it relates to the
portion of the earth's surface where sovereign n'ghts and interests are recognized.
2. The city Mayor ordered the arrest and deportation ofaHthe prostitutes to their
respective provinces for promoting live shows and immoral sexual activities in
the city. The order was assailed to be illegal because: _
' A. The City Mayor has infringed on the constitutional rights of the prostitutes
to travel and abode.
"B.- The City Mayor violatecTflTe due pTocess ot law since there was no notice
•and hearing before, judgment was rendered.
C. The Mayor's order was arbitrary, and capricious. -
D. Only the Courts are empowered to issue the order of arrest and deportation.
’ L E I-R ev iew er
G enera! Education
Answer: D .
Option A is eliminated because there is nothing, in the situation to show that the order
was intended to violate the constitutional right io travel and abode. The same observation
holds true to Option B and C although the situation does not explicitly mention about the
arbitrariness of the order. Option D is the logical choice because the issuance of arrest,
detention and even deportation orders is the exclusive prerogative of the Courts and
does not rest within the competence of the City Mayor.
3. Despite strong protestations from Mang Jose, the government took away from
his private property for public use upon payment to him or just compensation.
What power of the State was involved in the particular case?
_ . .A. Police Power
' B- Power of Eminent Domain
C. Power of Taxation
D.v Absolute Power of the State- "* -*
Answer: B
The question is factual. You will recall that the state possesses inherent powers upon
its domain. Option A is related to the question since it refers to the advancement of
the general welfare of the people but the taking away of the private property is the
main issue. Option C is a State inherent power also but has nothing to do with property
rights. Option D is an inexistent power and is not in any way related to the question.
Option B is the most logical choice since the power of Eminent Domain contemplates
the exercise of a power to take away private property for public use upon payment of
just compensation. ■
4. The United Satesfls the only known country in the world that follows the “Jus
Soli” doctrine which means Place of Birth, while the rest of the countries follow
— tfte-^s-Sanguinie" principle which means blood relationship. What then is the
■‘ citizenship of a child bom to Filipino parents in the United States?
A. Natural Born Citizen
B. Naturalized Citizen
C. Stateless Citizen •.
D. Dual Citizen
Genera! ed u cation
Answer: D *
The question is wanting of a legal basis. You have to recall what you have learned.
Optien A refers to a citizen born in the Philippines without having to perform any act to
perfect his citizenship while option B refers to a foreign citizen who is conferred Filipino
citizenship through judicial or legal processes. Both options are not responsive to the
Question. Option C implies citizenship minus State recognition. Option D is the correct
choice because the child enjoys the rights to an American Citizenship (,JusSoULancL .
Filipino citizenship (Jus Sanguiniel since he is born to Filipirio parents.
5. Every time Jose's parents leave the house, th^y chain him to a post of their
house padlock the door of his room without food, water and sunlight. He was
untidy and emaciated. What rights were violated?
1. The natural and primary right of parents to rear their children in the manner
convenient to both parents and children.
2. The rights to healthful well being and ecology
3. The right to travel and abode
4. The right of the child to protection, care and support of his parents.
A. 1,2 C. 2,3
B .1 ,3 "D. 2,4
Answer: D ^ ^
Option A is devoid o f any reference. It is the primordial duty of parents to care, protect
and support their child in a humane and ju st manner. Option B may be an incomplete
answer because the issue is child rearing, support and protection of his rights. Optiorr
C suffers from inadequacy of basis. Option D explicitly provides the nght to mobility,
support, care and protection o f the child against parental abuse.
6. It is the department which has the authority to make laws and to alter or
repeal them
A. Administrative department
B. Executive department
C. Judicial department
D. Legislative department
7. Its advantage is that it serves as the tuning ground for the national leaders
A. Bicameralism r C. Primary jurisdiction
•B. Constitutionalism D. Parents patriae •
8. It- is prerogative inherent in the state where it is called upon to protect thoSe
with less than full capacity to iake-adequate care of their own interests
A. Eminent Domain ________ C. Police .
B. Patents Patriae D. Taxation
I he [erm or orfiCt) Of IIItl yunatui--------
A. One year * C. Six years
B. Three years D. Twelve years
10. The power to declare The'existence of a state of war belongs to
A. Congress C. Sandigang Bayan
B. President D. Supreme Court
11. Amendment or revision of the Constitution may be proposed through any of the
following except
A. Constitutional Convention C. People's Initiative
B. Constitutional Assembly D. People's Power
12. The regular election of the Members of Congress shall be held on the second
Monday of
A. April B. May C. June D. July
13. How many members does the Commission on Appointment have?
----- A— 24----------- 8 - 26 C. 25D.27
14. All appropriation, revenue or tariff bills etc. shall originate exclusively in the
A. House of Representatives
B. Sanggunian Panlalawigan
C. Senate
D. Supreme Court
15. An enrolled bill may become a law after a lapse of
A. 30 days C. 40 days
B. 60days D /9 0 d a y s.
P M U L E T fi i v i e w e r
Social Science - Politics and G overnance with die Philippine C onstitu tion
16. The canvassing of the votes of the President shall be done by congress and
presided by:
A. Chief Justice
B. Secretary of National Defense
C. Ombudsman
D. Vice President
17. The Constitution empowers the President to declare Martial Law for
A. 30 days C. 45 days
B. 60 days D. 90 days
18. It refers to the act of the President of staying the execution of a convict.
A. Amnesty _____________ ..C.. ..Commutation_____________
B. Pardon D. Reprieve
19. It is the only constitutional court in the Philippines.
A. Court of Appeals C. Shariah Court
B. Family Court D. Supreme Court
20. The change of venue or place of trial ca be ordered for this reason
A. Lack of jurisdiction
B. Humanitarian reason
C. Convenience’ ...
D. Avoid miscarriage of justice
21. It is designed to prevent any person or class from being singled out as special
subject of hostile or discriminating legislation.
A. Due p ro ce ss______________.C— Right-Speech
B. Equal protection D. Writ of Habeas Corpus
22. The 1987 Constitution was framed by
A. People’s initiative.........................................;...........................................
B. Constitutional assembly _____________________ s............................ ......
C. Constitutional commission
. D. Constitutional convention
PNU lE T Reviewer.
G eneral E d u catio n
1. Which of the following sector cannot participate under the party-list system
of representation
A. Elderly C. Overseas workers
B. Handicapped D. Religious
2. Which of the following positions does need the confirmation of the Commission
on Appointments?
A. BIR Commissioner C. Consul
B. Navy captains D. Ambassador
3. The president cannot validly declare martial law in the following instance:
A. Eminent danger . C. Rebellion
B. Invasion D. All of the above
4. The following are the members of the judicial and bar council except:
A. Professor of law C. Retired justice of the Supreme Court
B. Ombudsman D. Secretary of Justice
5. The budget of fiscal year 2012 was submitted to the President for action. He
called a press conference saying that he will exercise his pocket veto on certain
items of the said budget. Is the President clothed with the pocket veto power?
A. Yes C. None of the above
B. No . D. Both of the above
6. The General Appropriation Act for the year 2012 allocated P 10 million each
to the members of the House of the Representatives P150 million to the
senators for countryside development notwithstanding that the President
recommended its abolition. What remedy can the president employ to refuse
release of the funds?
A. Abolish congress C. Exercise the power of impoundment
B. Exercise his pocket veto D. All of the above
7. A division of the Supreme- Court failed to decide a given case. How shall the
case be resolved? *
A. Raffle the case to anther division -____________ _
B. Decide the case en banc
Competencies:
r *
1. Trace the history of the Philippines
from pre-colonial to contemporary
periods^
Introduction
A Filipino is a mixture of different cultures. His contact with different Asian and
Western countries had contributed much to what he is now. Physically, hejnay-fae,
blending of Asian and western features or characteristics but his ideas are more in
its outlook. Presently, the Filipinos is still searching for his identity.
ife£
A. THEORIES ON THE EARLY PEOPLE 1
Jocano Theorizes that the proof of early human existence in the Philippines
dated as early as 21,000 to 22,000 years with the discovery in Tabon cave in
I
%
1962 of a skull cap and a portion of javO)resumecuo_Dje_mose-or numan being'.
This discovery shows conclusively that human came earlier to the Philippines
than the migrant people of the Malay Peninsula.
B. THEORY OF MIGRATION
4
'A
■}?
> Pygmies
n
Came from Borneo and other parts of South Asia and walked through land
bridges. They have vertical body length that reaches only up to 1.5 meters
hence they .are referred to as pygmies. They appear to be dark-skinned,
kinky haired, have thick lips, have wide noses and have short limbs. They
used tools made from sharp rocks and pieces of wood in hunting, fishing,
and finding plants and crops sustainable for consumption.
> Indonesians
They used boats for travelling the sea in order to reach the Philippines.
They knew how to plant crops, to hunt and to fish. Their tools were made
up of rocks and metals that enabled them to build houses and to create
tools that make their everyday activities less strenuous.
> Malays
--------- They are brown-skinned, have average height, flat nose and straight, black
hair. They have had the most sophisticated and highly developed civilization
among the varieties of people that came to the Philippines. They are divided
into three groups. The first group of Malay had traveled to the North of
Luzon and became known for their practice of beheading people. The
second group started to use alphabets and archeologist believed that they
are ancestors of the Muslims in Mindanao.
> Arabs
It is widely believed that the Arabs had first set foot on the country in the
1st century A.D. The relationship was purely about trade and they bought
products such as metals and cloths jn exchange of pearls, gold, and shells
from the natives of the Visayas and Mindanao. The Arabs are believed
to be the ones who bring the products of their country and other nearby
countries in Europe and China, India and some Southeast Asian countries.
The Philippines have had a purely trading relationships with the Arabs until
when they started to preach the theories and principles of Islam in the 12th
century A.D.
India
The people that we know today are shrewd and very business-minded.
Today, the most common business relationship the Filipinos have-with them
is borrowing money known as 5-6. Ourcontacr witn tnem started wajT"
back in 700 A.D., the time when the Madjapahit Empire was at its peak.
India, during that time, was under a powerful and sturdy domain. This made
them capable of conquering countries nearby, the Southeast Asian region
inclusive. They had first landed in Sulu and used it as their gateway to a rich
and favorable Filipino trade. They brought tin products, gold and exquisite
Hindu cloths, so famous for their high quality, grandeur and awe-striking
features. The Philippines was not colonized by the Madjapahit Empire
although this rich commercial relationship flourished and continued for
centuries and has influenced Filipino lifestyle in may ways.
China
The early relationship between China and the Philippines started before the
10th century.A.D. between the Tang Chao or Tang Dynasty (618-906 A.D.)
and the Sung Dynasty (1127-1180 A.D.) as evidenced by artifacts and
Chinese porcelains found in some-parta-of Luzon ancHriindanao. 8aswJ~on—
the Sung Shi, the book of the history of S'ung the people nf Hantnn (ftnang___
Dong) came to the Philippines regularly to trade their merchandise. This
information was supported by an article written by Chau Ju Kua in his book
Chu Fan Chi. He reaveled that the Chioese, and the early Filipinos have had
fruitful and prolific trading ties, both parties trusting each other.
Prof. R em ed ies- C . O n g .
> Japan '
Prior to the Japanese occupation in-the twentieth century, the Filipinos
and 'the Japanese have had a good and beneficial relationship that
continued on for centuries. This relationship started in the 13th century
— AvOr-Aeeeitttriy lu lliy ancient Japanese newspaper Nihongi, Filipinos had
set fpnt nn KmThn tn trnrlr wittr thrrrlafpanpRe They became interested
in trading with the early Filipinos after haying seen the gigantic pearls,
cloths, tropical plant products and never before-seen jewelry and
accessories^ This fostered a peaceful, amiable and a friendly relationship
not only to the two involved parties but also had an affirmative implication
to the whole of Southeast Asia.
bravery. These are very important traits that a datu must possess in order
to carry out the duties of a tribal chief successfully.
> The social hierarchy is divided intoihree: - ---------;
• Nobles or the elite —consisting*of the chiefs and theidarailies-
• Freemen or the Maharlika
- • Slaves or the dependents—acquired their lowstatus insociety by inheritance.
> Judicial process had trials which were held publicly and decisions were'
rendered promptly thereby avoiding what is known as justice delayed.
“Trial by ordeal was adopted to determine the innocence or guilt of party”.
Among the ancient Filipinos the legitimate children automatically inherited
the property of their parents even without a written will. In matter of
succession, the first son of the barangay chieftain succeeded his father.
> Economic Life
The main industry and the main source of income of the early Filipinos is
agriculture. The early Filipinos have started to practice kaingin in order to
make a land suitable for farming out of bushy and grassy land area^Kaingin
is the early practice of setting a fire to burn unwanted grass and plants that
grow over a piece of land ideal for farming. __________—
> Religious Beliefs and Education
The ancient Filipino people were mostly pagans and believed in their
supreme creator, Bathala. Pagan is someone who does not believed in
Christianity, Islam, or Hinduism. The early Filipinos believed not only in
Bathala but also several other gods. These gods are of lesser degree since
Bathala is considered the god of all gods.
I. Political Changes
a. Government was centralized. For 250 years, the country was
administered through the Council of Indies that transmitted to the
Governor-General in the Philippines the royal decrees that served as
guide in the administration of theTdlony.'The governors' overwhelming
authority is indicated by his unrestricted use of the cumplase power
to suspend the implementation of any royal order if in his opinion, the
coixlition in the colony did not warrant its implementation.
3. Rfiliqihus influence---------------"
Christian religion was introduced replacing the paganistic anito worship.
Friar responsible for spreading the Christian reliqioo; Auqustinians (1565):
Franciscans (1577): Jesuitsr(1"581)": Dominicans (1587): and the Recollects
(1606). Early Missionaries learned the dialects of the people and introduced
a highly church oriented literature. Pagan superstitions were utilized to hold
natives to practice the new religion such that folk Catholicism resulted.
4. Social Transformation
a. Manner of dressina-altered-eensiderablv TfTorder to accumulate
Spanish customs as welTasthe new morality resulting from conversion
to Catholicism.
b. The Filipinos accepted the practice of burial in public cemeteries and
embraced the idea of marriages performed in the Catholic Church.
c. 1849 Gorvemor Narciso Claveria .issued a decree which contained
thousands of Spanish family names from which the natives could
choose their own surnames.
d. Adoption of Fiesta is a socio-religious event celebrating the feast day
of the patron saint of a Catholic town.
tfror*. R c m e d io s C . O n g
GROWTH OF FILIPINO NATIONALISM
It was ip the 1'9th century when national consciousness developed the sporadic
uprisings started as early as 1574tsy Lakandula and Sulayman followed by Magalat
(1506). Tamblot, Bangkaw, Palaris, Dagohoy, Diego Silang and many others. It
grew in intensity about 200 years later. Nationalism (devotion to or advocacy
of national unity and independence) developed due to the following factors:
a. Opening of Philippines to World Trade
b. * Rise of middle class
c. Racial prejudice
d. Secularization controversy
e. European liberalism of Carlos- Marie dela Torre
f. Cavite mutiny
g. Execution of Gomez, Burgos and Zamora (GOMBURZA)
Campaigns for reforms started with the formation by the middle class of a
Propaganda Movement 'jailing for tlje assimilation of the Philippines to Spain,
the transformation of the Philippines to a province of Spain, and making
the Filipino fellow Spaniards. As Spanish Citizens the Filipinos would be
represented in the Spanish Cortes and thereby their representative in that
body, could propose and participate in the approval of laws beneficial to the
country. Foremost among them were. Lopez Jaena, M.H. Del Pilar and Rizal.
The movement failed to attain the reforms they demanded. However, their
writings inspired and opened the minds of Filipinos. Andres Bonifacio founded
the Katipunan (Kataastaasan, Kagafanggalangan na Katipunan ng Bayan) in
July 7,1892 on a radical platform to secure Independence and Freedom of the
Philippines by force. Katipunan’s Objectives were:
a: Political— separation of the Philippines from Spain.
b. Moral - revolved around the teaching of gopd manners, hygiene, good
morals, religious fanaticism and weakness of character.
c. Civic- principle of self-help and the defense of the poor and the oppressed.
PMU 1S T R e v i e w e r
S o d a ! Science"- P h ilip p in e H is to r y
The society remained secret until Patinio exposed the society to Fr. Mariano Gil
on August 19,1895. By August 23,1896 at Pugad Lawin, the Katipuneros tore
up their cedulas shouting, "Long Live the.Philippines".
F. AMERICAN COLONIZATION
The Spanish American War erupted in Cuba, another Spanish colony. This
event led to the coming of the Americans to the Philippines. The defeat of
the-Spaniards led to the negotiation, which was concluded by the Treaty of
Paris on December 10,1898. As provided for in the Treaty, the Philippines was
ceded by Spain to the United States: Aguinaldo, the leader of the Philippine
Revolution who was in exile in Hongkong learned about the American coming
to the Philippines. He thought that the US came to liberate-us,-so-on June—
12, 1898, he declared the Philippine Independence and changed our form
of government from dictatorial to revolutionary. After the promulgation of the
Malolos Constitution in January 21,1899 AgulriSKlcnilauyuidtoU the Philippine—
Republic in January 23,1899— . ----------------------------- 1__________
Aguinaldo on March 23, 1901 that the hostilities ended, although pocket
resistance continued in some areas.
General Wesley Merit established the military government and exercised the
powers of government until July 4,1901 when the President of the Philippine
Commission became civil governor in area already pacified by American military.
-------Philippine-Bill of 1902 the first organized act of the Philippines and it provided
for the administration of civil government in the Philippines.
V
William Howard Taft chairman of second the Philippine Commission recogitlzed
the independence of the Philippines.
____ The Filipinization Policy expressed American intention of training Filipinos for
self-government. As early as 1900, Filipinos were allowed to take over positions
in municipal, provincial, and national government. By 1901, Cayetano Arellano
------ was-appoioted-Chief Justice of the Supreme Court. Partial free trade was
established when the United States .Congress approved in August 1909 the
Payne-Aldrich Act. By this law, the American goods of all kinds and in unlimited
quantities could enter the Philippines free of duty.
The promise of independence was contained in Jones Law of 19T6. With the
passage of the Hare-Hawes Cutting Law, a ten-year transition period was
provided. This independence law was later amended by the Tydings-McDuffie law.
Negative Results:
a. The general economic dependence on the United States
b. Partial loss of the racial heritage
c. The continuance of colonial mentality
d. Distorted sense of values
On December 7,1941, Japan bombed Pearl Harbor, the US naval base in Hawaii.
This marked the start of World War II in the Pacific. As early as September 1,
1939, war started in Europe when Germany invaded Poland.
Japan successfully occupied the Philippines after the fall of Bataan April 9 and
fall of Corregidor May 6 from 1942 to 1944. The Filipino experienced the extreme
brutality of the Japanese. Liberation of the Filipinos came with the return of Gen.
Douglas McArthur. Japan finally surrendered after Hiroshima (August 6,1945)
and Nagasaki (August 9; 1945) were destroyed by atomic bombs.
Prof. Rcmcdios C. O n j
The return of the Commonwealth government was established with President
Sergio Osmena who died in Mew Yorkjn 194-4. In 1946, election for republican
government was held and ManueJ_Roxas won as president.
_________ Given "these historical experiences of contact with the Asian neighbors and the
western colonizers, the present Filipino has imbibed both cultures of the east
and the west. Her oriental characteristics are very much manifested in her
-------- strong link to family and the respect accorded to them.
H. POSTWAR ADMINISTRATION r
Pro:'. H -m ed io - C . ’.'ng .
General L Ju cu tto n
1. During pre-colonial period the socio-political unit was the barangay, from the
Malay term balangay, meaning a boat. During colonial period, several forms of
government were established in the Philippines. Which among the following
was not a form of government during colonial pefiod?
A. Puppet C. Military
B. "Democratic RepublicD. Centralized colonial government
Answer: 8
Democratic Republic is our the present form of government.
Option A, C & D were forms of government during colonial period.
Option A. Jose P. Laurel was the President of the Philippines under puppet
type of government.
Option C. The military government was the first government during American period
Option D. Centralized colonial government was established by the Spaniards
r ►
2. The reformist who formed the Propaganda Movement used the pen to expose
the abuses of the Spaniards. The following are reformists except?
A. Dr. Jose Rizal C. Emilio Aguinaldo
B. Marcelo H. Del Pilar D. Graciano Lopez Jaena
LET Reviewer
Sociat Science - P h ilip p in e H is to r y
Option C. President Elpidio Quirino inherited the problem regarding the insurgency of the
Huks therefore he offered this program.
Option D. President Fidel Ramos during his administration wanted to uplift the standard
o f living of the people to improve Philippine economy.
Answer: A
Personal Grievances is one o f the causes of uprising against Spain.
Option B . C & D are the contributory factors of Filipino nationalism.
Option B, is about Secularization Controversy which is a iconflict involving Spanish
regular and secular priests.
Option C. Racial Prejudice because the Spaniards regarded the Filipinos as
belonging to the "inferior races".
Option D. Rise of the Middle Class or the Filipinos who participated in agricultural production
and commerce following the opening of the Philippines to world commerce acquired not
only wealth and property but also improved their social status.
Prof. Rctticdio- C X ) n g
15. Agreement between the U.S. and the Philippines "/herein the former would
withdraw and surrender-all rights and possessions, supervision, jurisdictions,
control or sovereignty over the Philippines
A. Treaty of General Relaiions C.' Treaty of Withdrawal of Authority
------Br—Treaty- of Sovereignty D. Treaty of Surrender
ifi. American Governor-General in whose administration saw the resignation of all
Filipino cabinet members, thus precipitating the ‘cabinet crisis"
A. Cameron Forbes C. Elwell Otis ;
— B. Benjamin Harrison D.'. Leonard Wood.
-17. The Propaganda Movement was'example of the Filipino's expression of
Nationalism. However, most people of today doubt the nationalistic intention of
the propaganda due to its non-advocacy of
A. Assimilation
B. Reform in the administration
C. Generation of the Philippines from Spain
D. Annexation of the Philippines
18. Which of the following was the greatest naval battle in history during Japanese
occupation of the Philippines? -r *.
A; Battle for Leyte Gulf C. Battle of Samar
' B. Battle of Surigao Gulf D. Battle of Cape Engano
19. This law provided that American good of all kinds and in unlimited quantities
could enter the Philippines free duty
',A. Payne-Aldrich Act C. Hare Hawes Cutting Act
B. Tydings McDuffie Law D. Jones Law
20. The conflict among the. most powerful countries gave way to the start of
Japanese period which caused damages to the Philippines. In your own opinion,
how can you prevent conflicts-with other people?
A. Respect Individual differences
B! Believe that you are superior than others
C. Impose your principles in life to others
D. Avoid sensitive topics ;
P8U LET
Social Science - P hilipp ine H istory
Pror. R^metlios C. O n ^ .
Social - Philip p ine H iston
23. What have been the negative effects of the Christian orientation of the
Filipinos by the Spaniards in terms of their attitude towards life?
A. The Filipinos tend to be resigned to fate that befall them.
B. The Filipinos became spiritual.'
G. ' The Filipinos became charitable:— ---------------- ; ' ~"
D.’ The Filipinos became conscious of. theiLmoraLxesponsibilities,-----------
24. Barangay was the unit of government during pre-colonial period. Which of the
following does not describe to the form of government in the colonial period?
A. Centralized government .................................. ........
B. Civil government
C. Puppet government
D'. Democratic Republic government
25. The president famous for the “Filipino First Policy” and Austerity Program is
A. Ramon Magsaysay
_B, Diosdado Macapagal
C. Carlos Garcia
D. Manuel Roxas
P f t U LE T R e v i e w e r
Soda.' Science - Basic Econom ics with A.gtariaD Reform
Basic Economics
with Agrarian
Reform
Prepared in ’:
> P rof. J e r i c t C . Ferrer arTd Dr. Benjam in M , D o m in g d J, J r *
• Competencies:
PART 1- C O N TE N T U PDA TE .
i. ECONOMICS
Assumption: principle that economists use to simplify reality and -make the
world easier to understand One important assumption used in economics is
“ceteris paribus” or “all-other things being equal or constant” it helps us simplify
reality in order to focus on-the relationship that we are interested in..
Variable: a measure that can change from time to time and from observation
to observation, e.g. price, income, inflation, GDP, GNP ____ .
DIVISION OF ECONOMICS
J,). What to produce - The economic system must decide what goods and
services to produce with its land labor and capital.
2) How to produce - The economic system must decide how to produce each
good or service - determining what mix of land, labor, and capital to use in
productton methods to employ.
3) For whom to produce - The economic system must decide which members
of society will receive how much of the goods and services pfoduced - the
prxess of allocating income.
•S o 'aii .>.;icria; - iiuok i^ o jr im ic s . K g r s ir iu ft Reform
Economic Systems
Production; the process of making goods and services to satisfy human material
wants and maximize profits
Factors of Production
1. Land includes all resources found on land, and in the sea.
2. Labor can be (Mined as any kind of work, either mental or manual in nature,
which has the soie purpose of receiving rewards. According to Alfred Marshall,
labor can be defined as any exertion that the mind or body undergoes, either _
partly or totally, with the view of earning some other good other, than the
pleasure derived from work itself.
3. Capital refers to the stock of goods made by the people to help them in the
production of goals and services.
4. Entrepreneurship coordinates all the factors of production to produce goods
and services.
M arket is a mechanism by which the buyers and sellers interact to determine both
price and quantity of goods and services . •
~ 1 “ ....T h u L E T R e v ie w e r
Social Science - Basic Economics with Agrarian Reform
> Demand schedule is a table showing the different amount of a product that
households will buy at all possible prices.
P M ti L E T R e v l e w f e t
G enerd Educatior
> Law of Demand: Ceteris paribus, when price increases, quantity demandei
increases, when price decreases, quantity demanded decreases. Relattonshii
is inversely proportional or negative
- >. Demand Function is a mathematical expression of the law of demand.
Q d = a -b P
Determinants of Demand
1. Price leads to a change in quantity demanded, causes a movement along the
demand curve. ______
2. Non-price leads to a change in demand; causes a change in the whole demand
schedule and.demand curve.
Supply is a market expression of the cumulative willingness and ability of all firms
to sell different amount ot a proouct ardifferentprices over a given period of time.
> Supply schedule: a table showing the different amount of a product that firm
will sell at alf possible prices over a given period of time.
P r o f. J c r i c k C . F e r r e r a n il D r . B e n ia m i n M . D o m i n g e i l . J r .
General Education .
> Law of Supply: ceteris paribus, when price increases, quantity supply
increases, when price decreases, quantity supply decreases.
> Supply function Is mathematical expression ofthe law of supply. Q s=a+bP
Determinants of Supply
1. Price - leads to a-change in quantity supplied, causes a movement along the
supply curve. . •
2. Non-price - leads to a change in supply, causes a shift in the supply curve.
Market Equilibrium
• The objective of the market is to reach a state in which the quantity of goods
that producers are willing and able to supply and the quantity of goods that
buyers are willing and able to buy are equal at the same price.
• Equilibrium refers to a state in which at the one and only price quantity supplied
is equal to quantity demanded. ^ *■
PRICE |
Disequilibrium Condition
1. Excess Demand : Qd > Qs = shortage
• When quantity demanded exceeds quantity supplied, price tends to rise.
When price rises, quantity demanded increases and- quantity supplied
decreases until equilbrium is reached.
2. Excess Supply : Q d< Qs = surplus / glut
• When quantity supplied exceeds quanity demanded price tends to fall.
When price falls, quantity supplied will likely decrease and quantity
demanded will likely .increase until equilibrium .is reached.
Price Elasticity
• ’ Measures the responsiveness of demand and supply, whenever nrice changes."
• Price Elasticity of Demand; The ratio of the percentage change in quantity
demanded to the percentage change in price.
IE? R aview sr
* General Education
* E = % change in Qd
% change in P .
1. nature of the good: If the good is luxury, more elastic; if the good is
" ' necessity,inelastic or less elastic
2. availability of substitutes: More substitute, more elastic, less substitute, less
elastic
. a. snare in the consumer's income: If the share is small, inelastic or less
---------elastic; if the-shafe-is-bkHnore elastic - . -
4. adjustment time available:-If the adjustment time is short, inelastic or less
elastic: if the adjustment time is long, more elastic
General Education
Macroeconomic Studies
Macroeconomic Concerns
• Business Cycle: The cycle of short-term ups and downs of in the economy
• Recession: a period during which aggregate output declines for two
consecutive quarter
• Depression: a prolonged and deep recession *
• Inflation is a sustained and general increase in prices in all or nearly all the
markets in the economy
• Deflation: a sustained and general decrease in prices in all of neariy all the
markets in the economy • • .
P W LET R eview er
....................... ' ■......
S o c ia l S ciSn cc B a s ic Econo u \ !■ i Re/orm
Types of Inflation *
1. Demand-pull inflation - state of excess aggregate demand
2. Cost push inflation - caused by a significant and continued increase in some
. cost of production (labor, raw materials, profit)
• Effects of Inflation - •
1. Decrease in the value of money (Purchasing Power of the Peso)
2. inflation loser
• Fixed salary worker and retirees living on pension
• Creditors and savers
3. Inflation gainers
• Speculators ' -----------------,—
• People with flexible income
• Debtors
TT
E E M p NU LET H e^ew er
General Education
II. ' t a x a t io n
Meaning
• ' It is an inherent power of the state to impose and collect revenues to defray the
necessary expenses of the government.
• It is compulsory contribute imposed by a public authority irrespective of the
amount of services rendered to the.payer in return.
• It is compulsory level on private individuals and organization by the government
to raise revenue to finance expenditure on public goods and services.
PURPOSES OF TAXATION
• collect revenue for the government
• “‘ redistribute income
• correct an adverse balance of payments
v * check consumptions of goods which are considered undesirable
•• protect local/infant industries
• influence population trends of trade
• reallocate resources
• create a sense of identity
Classification of Taxes
As to who bears the burden
• Direct Taxes
• Indirect Taxes
Types of Taxes
• Direct Taxes
• The burden cannot be shifted to the third party.
• Direct taxes areljased on income and wealth.
• In most cases, direct taxes are progressive in nature.
• Direct taxes are compulsory in nature.
• Examples: income tax, residence tax, real state, immigration tax, estate/gifl/
inheritance tax.
• Indirect Taxes
• The tax burden can be shifted to the third party.
• Indirect taxes are based on expenditure and consumption.
• Ail indirect taxes are regressive in nature.
• Indirect taxes are optional in the sense that they can be avoided.
• Examples: sales tax, import tax, VAT/EVAT
• ».
Characteristic of a Sound Tax System ’
• • Efficiency - must generate revenue greater than the amount of money the
government must spend to collect taxes.
• Equity - individual and groups belongingto the same income bracket must be taxed
equally while those belonging to different income groups must be taxed differently.
meaSUres and procedures that (will make it
__ more coweoient for taxpayers to pay--------
• Stability - tax system must not be too often or it will encourage tax payers to
withhold tax payment until a more preferred system is put in place.
Republic Act No. 6657-T h e Comprehensive Agrarian Reform Law of 1988 which
was signed into law by Pres. Corazon Aquino
^ The redistribution of lands, regardless of crops or fruits produced to farmers and regular
farm workers who are landless, irrespective of tenurial arrangement to include the totality
of factors and support services desjaned to lift their economic status of tfie beneficiaries
and all-other-arrangements alternative to physical redistribution of lands, such as
production, profit sharing, labor administration and the distribution of shares of stocks,
which will allow beneficiaries to receive a just share of the fruits of the land they work.
COVERAGE OF CARP
« All alienable afid disposable lands of the public domain devoted to or suitable
for agriculture
• All lands of the public domain in excess of the specific limits as determined by
the Congress
• All other lands owned by the governments devoted to or suitable for agriculture
• . All public lands, devoted to or suitable for agriculture regardless of the
• agricultural products raised or can be raised
RETENTION LIMITS
• Five hectares for land owners
• Three hectares to be awarded to each child of the landowner subject to the
following qualification: .... .r —, _ Z -----
o At least 15 years old
o Actually tilling the soil or directly managing the farm „
BENEFICIARIES
• Agricultural lessees and share tenants
• Regular farm workers
• Seasonal farm workers
• Other farm workers
• Actual tillers or occupants of public lands
• Collectives or cooperatives
• Other directly working on the land
Republic Act 9700: CARP Extension with Reform Law or otherwise known as
CARPER Law was signed on August 7, 2009 to extend the implementation of the
CARP, which ended upon the expiration of R.A. 6657 or the CARL on 2008.
LPT R eview ef
General Educacioi
IV. COOPERATIVES
• A free association of persons voluntarily joined together
• With common bond of interest ‘
.• Legally constituted
• Purpose of conducting an economic enterprise
• Owned, controlled and administered democratically
• Making equitable contributions to the capital required
• Accepting a fair share of the risks and benefits
• Organized in accordance with generally accepted principles
Typologies of Cooperatives -
According to Level of Cooperatives
• Primary - members of which are natural
• Secondary-members of which are primaries
• Tertiary - members ‘of which are secondary upward to one or more apex,
organization *
2. Suppose while walking you found a P1 00.'If you choose to use the P100 to
watch a movie, what is your opportunity cost for watching the movie?
A. Nothing, you just found the money anyway.
B. P100, because you could have used the P100 to buy other things.
C. P100 plus the value of the time you spent watching the movie.
. D. Nothing if you really like the movie that you watched.
Option A, is very limited as it assumes money is the only thing that is scarce. Option B,
the values that people adhere to is not oniy influenced by Economics but by other things
like religion, culture, politics and so on. Option D, may be very timely but is only one
aspect of the concept of scarcity. Option C, is the answer as scarcity created a condition
in which people will have to face tradeoff- that is give up something in order to gain
another- every time they decide or make choices in life. Environment issues, greed and
selfishness are all merely aspects or dimensions of this economic fact.
ft
5. What does the assumption “ceteris paribus” mean? •
A. All other variables are kept constant except the one being measured
B. Some variables.are not included in the study.
C. We assume a perfectly competitive market.
D. Ali variables are kept constant.
6. What is a market?
A. a place where people buy and sell
B. a group of buyers and sellers of a particular good or service
C. a mechanism by which exchanges takes place
0. both b and c
j._j/vhatjldem and?................... —
A. It is a market expression of the cumulative willingness of all household to
. buy different amount of goods and service at different prices.
B It ic the marli’at avprnrrinn nf A p-m mnlatiup ability of all household tO buy
different amount of ooods and services-at different prices.
C. It is the market expression of the cumulative wiliingness and ability of all
household to buy different amount of goods and services at different prices.
D. It is the market 'expression of the cumulative willingness and ability of all
household to buy different amount poods and services at different prices
on a given point in time. •
"H U S & PHtf 1ST R eview er _
je n c r a l E d u c a r io r .
? » ( ) LET f t m i m w e r
Soda] Scicncc- - B a sk Economics with Agrarian Reform
P A R T III - E N H A N C IN G T E S T T A K IN G S K ILLS
Option A forms part of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights embodied in the U.N.
charter optinn.c is a process related to Industrialization of urban centers as a vehicle
towards development and progress and completely a departure from agrarian reform
which usually deals with rural development. Option D is an incomplete answer sfnce it
desctibefonly land reform and not agrarian reform. Option 8 is the most logical choice
as it embraces the state policy on agrarian reform.
Option B, is m t equitable as high income people will pay the same amount as those
with low income. Options C and D, gives unclear and not definitive criteria for taxation
situation in life and can mean many things which might not be applicable to taxati'on
which clearly involves monetary aspects. The status of employment on the other hand
Wes noUetiect the levql of income of the taxpayers; some non-permanent workers
_ ^anLWOtS-than-permanent omsrQptionA is the clear answer as the kind ofprofession
and status in life determines the level of income of the taxpayers that should be the
subject of taxation.
14. The "market basket" on which the consumer price index is based is composed of
A. raw materials purchased by firms. . ...... — :— :------------
B. total current production. . ' ____________
C. products commonly purchased by typical consumers. '
Q, none of the above
15. What is the likely reason why the Philippine GNP is always bigger that it’s GDP? .
A. Foreigners are producing more in the Philippines, than Filipino OFWs are
producing abroad.
B. Filipino OFW are producing more abroad than foreigners are producing in
the Philippines.
C .' Salaries of workers abroad are bigger than in the Philippines.
D. The government is not doing enough to achieved growth in the country.
16. Because of the “substitution effect' on demand, when the price of coffee increases
A. People will use’ less cream and sugar.
B. People will be able to afford less coffee because their buying power has
. . decreased. _ •
C. People will drink tea instead.
D. People will use less costly coffee beans and other ingredients; ' _ ..........
17. When price rises at an extraordinary high rate, it is called
A. Inflation C Hyperinflation
B. Deflation D. disinflation
18. Monopofy results because of
A. Barriers to entry into the industry
B. Greed by the seller
C. Lack of interest by potential competitors
D. All of the above
19. What government agency is to e d to manage the monetary policy of the country?
A. Department of Finance
B. Department of Budget and Management
C. National Economic and Development Authority
D. Bangko Sentrai ng Pilipinas
20. Economics deals with the utilization of resources. How do we describe these
resources?
A. Abundant C. Human
B. Natural D. Scarce
21. The power of taxation is primarily and exclusively exercised by
A. Congress C. Bureau of Customs
B , President D. Senate
22. It is a uniform tax imposed on sale of goods or service as they pass along the
production and distribution chain.
A. Exercise tax C. Inheritance tax
■ B. Value-added tax D. Tariff tax
23. A public market for the trading of company shares and other derivatives is
called
A. Money market ^ C. Stock market
B.'Portfolio market "* ~ D. foreign exchange market
24. Which law extended the implementation of the CARP for five more years?
A. RA6662 ’ C. RA9700
B. RA6654 0. RA9850
25. Which law created the Cooperative Development Authority?
A. R.A.6993 C. R.A.6939
B. R.A.6938 D. R.A. 6983
Family Planning
P repared by:
Prof. M in d a J. C a b ilao Valencia an d Dr. D ion y V’. Varela
Competencies:
P A R T ( - C O N TE N T UPDATE
A. Definition of Sociology 64
The sociological pierspective also invrtves the use of what C. Wright Mills
(1959) called the sociological imagination. For Mills, the sociological
imagination is a "quality of mind - a perspective that enables us to see
ourselves and the society around us from a distinct sociological point of
view.” By this Mills meant that the sociological imagination allows people
to comprehend the relation between Biography and history. It is an
awareness of how events In personal life are often shaped by social forces.
•tfin
C. Early Sociologists
D. Theoretical Paradigms
E. Sociological Investigation
1. Types of Research
a. Basic research - deals with the development of empirically-based
theory.
b. Applied research - deals with evaluation and action.
2. Methods of Research
a. Participant-observation or fieldwork - researcher both observes
and participates in the activities of the community or peopie being
studied! The researcher also spends lengthy periods of time in the
setting1.While fieldwork generates more in-depth information than
other methods, it can only be used to study relatively small groups
or community.
b. Survey research - researcher sends or-gives questionnaires in.
----------------MervieW31o“a group of people or samples of a larger population. .
It allows the collection of data on large numbers of respondents.
s^^s^^sgassss-r-r ■. rar—T~s~iassssssBSBassssatamanacaBagBMBaam
Prof. Min«ia 1 ‘ C abiiao Valencia and Dr. D iony V. Varela
General Education
II. C ultu re
. A. Definition
B. Components
.3) ■Laws are formalized social 'norms enacted by people who are
vested with political and legal-authority,
b. Values include a person's ideas about worth and desirability.
g7 "■Beliefs are a person’s conception or ideas about the surrounding
-------------------: world.
C. Characteristics
1. Culture is learned.
2. Culture is shared.
3. Culture is dynamic.
4. Culture is adaptive.
5. Culture is integrated.
3. Cultural Change •
a. Cultural Lag - time lag between a change or innovation and
accomplishment of the social and cultural adjustments
b. Culture changes by invention, innovation, and diffusion. An
invention is the development of something totally new, while an
innovation is an improvement on something that already exists.
Diffusion is the spread of cultural traits, from one to another.
4. Cultural Relativism, Ethnocentrism, and Xenocentrism (Kottak, 2011)
a. Cultural Relativism - evaluates a culture by Its own standards.
b. Ethnocentrism - evaluates another culture by the standards of
one's own culture. ’ ---------
c. Xenocentrism - refers to preference for foreign things.
f f t S f pHU LET S sv ie w e r
General Education
Types of Society
a. Non-industrial: hunting and gathering, horticultural, pastoral, and
agricultural societies
b. Industrial and post-industrial societies
• Types of group
1) in-group vs Out-group .
2) Formal vs. Informal group
. 3) Primary vs Secondary groups
•4) Gemeinsctiaft vs Gesellschaft
A. Understanding Socialization
B. Socialization Agents
*■ * •
- Family
- School
- Peer groups .
- Mass media
1. Childhood
2. Adolescence
3. Adulthood.
4. OldAge
------------ -Tntai institution - a sfittinp in which oeoole are isolated from the rest o
society and manipulated by an administrative staff. (Ibid)
C. Explanation of Deviance
P ~ N u T sffie v ie w e r M l B
Social Science - Society am! Culture with Family Pisuur.og
3. Symbolic interactionism .
a. Labeling Theory - deviance depends on people’s reaction to a
person's behavior, not in the behavior itself.
b. Edwin Sutherland's Differential Association Theory - deviance
depends on the individual's frequency and intensity of interaction
with others..
4. Social conflict
Based on Karl Marx ideas, deviance reflects social inequality. Laws
and social norms reflect the interests of powerful members of society.
Social injury caused by the latter is less likely to be branded as
criminals or deviants-....................—-------- -
k 1 e ¥ f FNU~LET Review er
General Education
B. Class conflict •
C. Social mobility
D. Social distance
3. Theories of Social Stratification
a. Davis-Moore thesis - social stratification Is universal and important for
the operation of a society.
b. Karl Marx - social stratification causes social conflict.
c. Max Weber-social stratification takes the form of a'multidimensional
hierarchy rather than distinct classes.
VII. Institutions
Institution - pattern of norms associated with major societal goal, value, or need'
VIH.Contemporary Issues
A. Population •
. B. Family Planning
1. Definition
Family planning is a national mandated priority public health program
to attain the country’s national hearth development. It is a health
intervention program and an important tool for the improvement of
the health and welfare of mothers, children, and other members of
the family. The program also provides information and services for
couples of reproductive age to plan their family according to their
beliefs and circumstances through legally and medically acceptable
family planning methods.
2. Basic Principles
a. Responsible Parenthood: each family has the right and duty to
determine the desired number of children they might have and
when they might have them. Beyond responsible parenthood is
responsible parenting which is the proper upbringing and education
of children so that they grow up to be upright, productive, and
civic-minded citizens.
b. • Respect for Life: the 1987 Constitution states that the government
protects the sanctity of life. Abortion is not a family planning
method. — ■- ’
c. Birth Spacing: refers to interval between pregnancies, which is
ideally three (3) years. It enables women to recover their health,
3. Intended Audience
Men and women of reproductive age (15-49) years old), including
adolescents
LET Reviewer
•' i t i i t: n i l E c u c a r i o r *
b. Artificial methods
"* 1) Oral contraceptives or the Pill - use of synthetic hormones
(progesterone and/or estrogen) like those produced by the
body to regulate the menstrua! cycle
2) Male condom - made out of latex (rubber), but polyurethane
and tactylon (both plastic) are also available
3) Female condom - a polyurethane (plastic) sheath with an
inner ring that fits inside the vagina, around the cervix (like
the diaphragm) and an outer ring that covers the outside
labia
4) Intrauterine'device (IUD) - a small plastic devtee-which is-
placed in the uterus by a clinician. It is a reversible method of
birth contro; given only by prescription.
5) Cervical cap - a soft rubber cup like'tfgwcs trarTtirsntrcjcjty
around the Base .of the cervix. .......— -----------------------
6} . Vasectomy or male sterilization - a surgical procedure that
prevents pregnancy by blocking the passage of sperm into the
seminal fluid. .
(Jener-w luit.-c4 ci:>»i
1 . Objective
---------"HT'legislation that provides universal access to quality reproductive
health care services, methods, devices, supplies, and relevant
information and education.
2 . Key Principles
.a . Freedom of choice: respect for protection, and fulfillment of
reproductive health and rights.
b. Right to non-fraudulent information on reproductive health,
including family planning.
c. Abortion is illegal, and is punishable by law. *■ *
d. Partnerships are .ideal for enhanced provision of necessary
reproductive health services.
„ ------- e^—A multi-faceted sustainable development process.
* 3. Relevant'Sections of the Law
a. Hiring of skilled health professionals for maternal health care and .
skilled birth attendance
b. Provision of health care facilities
. c. Access to family planning
d. Reviewof maternal, fetal and infant death
e. Procurement and distribution of family planning supplies
f. Introduction of responsible parenthood and family planning'
component in anti-poverty programs
g. Provision of PhilHeafth benefits for serious and life threatening
. reproductive health conditions'
Pror. M d I. ...b ii:;. Y.tU:-,uri aua i -r D-o.v v ' -u'1.'!
h. Provision of. mobile health care services
L Provision of age- and developmei^appropriati^isaffiductive.
health education--------------------- -- " •
j. Mandatory presentatioo^i-eeftieate-qf tuniurignUe ~~ '
k. Capacity building of barangay health workers
i. Provision of pro bono services for indigent women ________
m. Provision of. sexual and reproductive heaifIT programs for Persons
with Disabilities
Social Science - S.oderv and Culture with Kimiit Planning
PART II - A N A L Y Z IN G T E S T IT E M S
' 1. It refers to everything which is socially teamed and shared by members of the society.
A. Nature C. Culture
B. Material Catture D. Folkways
Answer: C
OptionA or nature refers to all those things which were made by Sod or created without
human intervention. Examples are rivers, mountains, sky, and trees. Option B or material
outturn Is just one of the two main kinds of culture, the other being the non-material
culture. Materia! culture refers to the creations of man that are tangible. Examples
are buHdioas, jewelry, and cell phones. Option C or Culture provides the best answer.
17] It satisfies-the-definition of culture as a complex whole that includes all habits and
capabilities acQUired by man as a member of society. Option D or Folkways is just ong
of the many components of culture. It refers tothe customary ways people do things.
3. Some people argue that individuals with fewer opportunities to achieve success
goals will have greater motivation to violate norms and higher rates of deviance.
This argument is best expressed by
• A. Conflict theory
B. Sub-culture theory
C. Differential association theory '
D. Anomie theory •
Answer. 0
Option A is eliminated. Conflict theory emphasizes the repression of the weak by th8
powerful which leads to deviation. Option 8 orsub-culture theory asserts thatthe motivation
to violate norms depends upon the availability of illegitimate oooortumtie^withirraxertain
subculture. Option C or differential association theory-beiiewsTftat a person may become
deviant depending upon the frequency and interaction with other deviants. Option D or
anomie theory is the correct answer. Anomie theory suggests that persons or gmups with
less opportunity in life are more likely lo become deviants.
Answer: C
Option A or.Gesellschaft refers to a social system-where Telationshiparfiohg people
is impersonal and formal. It is usually found in exclusive enclaves of the rich and the
powerful. Option B or primary group is not a social system but a social group of people
who know one another intimately as inrtMriual.pffrsnnaiitifx Ontm C w gemmehnft-b-
the correct answer. Gemeinschaft is a social system in which people are closely tied by
kinship and tradition. Option D or Caste is-a soGial system that is>i eligiM l? sanctioned a W
hierarchically ranked groupings in which membership is fixed at birth and is permanent.
5. Which of the following statements is NOT true about the Filipino families today?
A. Maje authority has declined. . ■
B. Division of labor has changed.
C. Separation has become more common. •
D. It has ceased to be a socialization unit of society.
Answer. D _______________
'ftte~rrisliuctlijil tells us to pinpoint a statement that does not tell the truth, about Filipino
families today. Option A is 'not the correct answer: Surveys have revealed a growing
number of matriarchal families mainly due to women's call for equal authority in the family
and in the society.-0ptionB-telts~3~truth about Filipino families today. Due to women's
higher educational qualifications and more progressive attitudes, many wives now also
work. It is not unusual now to see husbands tending the children and doing household
chores. Option C is neither the correct answer. Due to a number of factors, church and
government leaders have noticed an increasing number of couples who separate. Option
D is the correct answer. The family, with all its issues, continues to serve as a socialization
unit of society, it is the unit of society where an individual is first exposed to and has-the
most significant influence on the development of his/herpersonality.
17. Social scientists have developed ways to analyze culture and society called
A. Theoretical perspectives . C. Research methods
B. Hypothesis D. Techniques
18. Which process makes a member learn the norms of the group ^nd acquire
a personality? .
A. Accommodation C. Compartmentalization
B. Aggregation D. Socialization
19. What role or status is assigned to-an individual is based on hereditary traits?
A. Achieved C. Master
B. Ascribed 0. Applied
20. Concentration camps, prisons and military schools are examples of
A. Total institutions C. Counterculture
B. Socializing agents ft. Subculture
21. If sociologists were analyzing dormitory life, which of the following aspects of
that topic would they be most likely to study?
A. The rules of conduct that guide how much freedom students have to go
into another's work area
B. How much time an individual student spends in going out with friends
versus studying .
C. How an individual student copes with homesickness after moving in
■ D. Which aspects of a student’s personality are .'most related to academic
excellence
22. When a division chief evaluates the unsatisfactory performance of
her staff members who are also her friends and relatives. She may
experience
A. Roie p l a y ___ ;. C. RoiS strain •
• B. Role conflict D. Role ambiguity
23. Social control is imoosed on deviants or non conformists io maintain
A. social stigma C. social order
B. social strata D. sooia^mobiHty.
S U j J p ’tsy IS : F .e m w - e r
24. Which of the following is not true of deviance?
A. It helps to maintain group unity.
B. It helps to reinforce appropriate behaviour.
C. It is common in developed economies.
D. Tlie deviant behaviour of one-generation may become the norm of the
next generation.
25. Sociologists use the term “cultural relativism" to mean that
A. Other components of culture are more relevant than others.
B. Each culture must be judged Within its own context.
C. Other societies have more cultures than others.
D. Culture is important in dealing-with-flther-people.
PART Hi - ENHANCING T E S T TAKING SKILLS
13. It refers to the movement of people into and out of a specified territory.
A. Fertility C. Demography
B. Mortality D. -Migration ' .
14. The statement "The educational system perpetuates values which protect the
rich gnd powerful” illustrates the
A. Functionalist theory C. Conflict theory
8. Interactionist theory D. Evolutionist theory
15. Research-that investigates a population at several intervals over a relatively
long period of time is called
A. Cross-sectional study C. Secondary analysis —
B .. Residual study D. Longitudinal research
16. Survey-te used when:
A. Other measures do not produce statistical significance
B. The study must be repeatable
C. It is necessary to discover the distribution and interrelations of certain
variables among large numbers of people.
D. It is important to use procedures having cross-cultural applications.
17. The intended audience of the family planning program include
A. Men of reproductive ageonly
B. Women of reproductiveage only
C. Men arid women of reproductive age
•D. Men and women of reproductive age, including adolescents
18. Which of the following is not a group?
A. Board of directors C. University sorority J__________
B. Family D. All football fans
19. What is central to the conflict perspective of deviance? ' "
A. Labelling of deviants ■ " . . :
B. Anomic behavior
C. Dominance and power •
D. Deviant subcultures
20. The process which entails a son's erotic attachment to his mother and his
hostility to his father is called by Freud as
A. Electra complex C. Inferiority complex
B. Oedipus complex ’ D. Xenophobia
21. Questionnaires in surveys may include i
A. Standardized questions
^ B. Open-ended questions
C. Checklist
D. All of the above
is an
example of
A. Xenocentrism ' ' C. Ethnocentrism
B. Culture shock v D. Cultural tolerance
23. Contemporary Filipino culture is influenced by
A. Asian culture
B. Western culture
C. Religion
D. Asian and western culture
24. Which of the following statements about a caste system is not true?
A. It is common in developed economies.
B. There is no social mobility.
c: lfsfiapes a person's life.
D. It is based on ascription.
25. Which of the following statements about culture is not true?
A. Each group needs a culture in order to function.
a number of cultures.
C. Social conflict is due to meeting the expectations of different cultures.
D. Students do not have their own culture but instead practice the culture of
the larger society.
Rizal's Life and
Works and other
Heroines
P rep ared by:
O r. E v a n g e lin e L. M a r t i n
Competencies:
The early Filipino uprisings against the Spanish colonizers were unsuccessful
due to the Filipino's failure to act as a nation. The Spaniards used the divide
et impera (divide and rule) strategy to continue their rule in the Philippines.
They devised ways for Filipinos to fight each other rather than to fight together
against the real enemy.
However, divide et impera failed. The Filipims never stopped fighting for ther
— rights and independence. Through the leadership of well-known heroes, the
freedom-loving Filipinos learned to unite and staged a revolution that eventually
toppled the Spanish government in the Philippines.
In the nineteenth century, nationalism was instilled in the Filipinos as they began
to think of themselves as belonging to one nation with a common origin, set of
customs and traditions, and history. With the growth of nationalism came the
struggle for democracy, human rights, and freedom. From the various abuses
that the Filipinos suffered from the oppressive Spanish colonial government
The most popular among the. members of the Propaganda movement was the'
Philippine national hero, Dr. Jose P. Rizal. According to Prof. Friedrich Ratzel,
a German historian and Rizal's close friend, Rizal was not only the most
outstanding Filipino but also one of the most outstanding representatives of the
Malay race. Rizal’s intellectual legacy includes his two famous .novels, .NolLMe__
Tangere and El Fiiibusterismo. The two novels described tlre'polrticcilrecumjrntv
educational, religious, and cultural situations in the Philippines during the
Spanish period.
While in Hong Kong, Rizal laid down the basis of La Liga Fiiipina, or the Philippine
League, which he planned to establish in the Philippines upon his return. He,
then, drafted the constitution of the league with the assistance of Jose Mariano
Basa. Basa was a businessman who was among those exiled to the Mariana
Islands as punishment for their participation in the Cavite Mutiny of 1872. The
motto of the league was Unus Instar Omnium, or One Like Alt.
LET R eview er
General Education
On November 3,1896, Rizal was then imprisoned for the second time in Fort
Santiago for his supposed involvement with the Katipunan. Gov-Gen Camjlo
de Polavieja sentenced Rizal to death by firing squad. Rizal was shot at seven
o’clock in'the morning of December 30,1896. at Bagumbayan. His execution
embittered the Rlipinos and triggered them to fight with determination.
His novels were not the only key of his success but all his other writings,
letters, diary entries and other works that served as his love for the country
as a profound and effective Great Thinker.
He had shown his fervent love n’e had shared with all by.giving his'own life-
to enlighten the mind of his countrymen. ......... ...............;—
His ability to love without limits, without ever counting the cost is a real
greatness that became the inspiration of this servant-ieadership. This can
be seen in his masterpiece “Mi Ultimo Adtos” which was written shortly
before his execution. , -
r *•
Conceivably the greatest power of our national hero must have come.from__
the power to love with all pure and all-mighty love in which this powerful"
love lived on and triumphed over his death.
> “The education of the Filipino from birth until the grave is a brutalizing*
depressing, and anti-human. For five or ten years the youth comes into
contact with books, chosen by the very sane priests whoboldly declare that
it is an evil for the Filipinos to know Castilian, that the Filipino should not be
separated from jjjs carabao, that he should not have any further ambition,
etc" During these five or ten years the majority of students have grasped
. nothing more that no one understands what the books say, not even perhaps
. their own- professors. During these five or ten years the students have to
contend with the daily prflartiinqjtiat lowers human dignity, gradually or
brutally killing their self-respect - that eternal, tenacious, persistent effort
------- to HUfflDlfc the native, to maKe mm accept the yoke, to reduce him to the ■
level of a beast."
> “I am assiduously studying that happenings in our country. I believe that
nothing can "redeem us except our brains.”
> “A nation wins respect not by covering up abuses, but by punishing them
and condemning them.”
> “People and government are correlated and complementary a stupid
government is an anomaly among righteous people, just as. a corrupt people
cannot exist under just rulers and wise laws. Like people like government,
we will say, paraphrasing a popular adage."
> “We must confess that these (Philippines) indolence actually
and positively exist; but instead of regarding it as the cause of the
backwardness and disorder, we should regard it as the effect of disorder
and backwardness, which fosters the growth of a disastrous predisposition.
5. My Last Farewell
This masterpiece was written by Rizal in Fort Santiago probably a day or two
before his execution on December 30,1896 in Bagumbayan. The poem is
full of the author’s love of country when he uttered this, "It is sweet to die for
you so that you may live. It is sweet to die and sleep under your sky'.”
TheTaft Commission chose Rizal out of several great Filipinos as the number
one hero of his people.
Republic Act No. 1425 (Batas Rizal) mandated the offering of the course
Buhay at Katha ni Rizal to all college students, to provide the models that will
challenge the spirit of nationalism. More recently, the Commission on Higher
Education (CHED) saw the need to strengthen the idealism of college students
by providing the youth with opportunities to examine the -different perspectives
that other Fiiipino heroes and heroines took in building our nation.
There are two kinds of nationalism - active and passive. Active nationalism
is more Aggressive. It involves making threats'against strong forces by
forming organizations, using violent"means, and resorting to rebellion. Passive
• Andres Bonifacio
------- Bonifacio was born in Tondo on'November 30,1863. Theearly death of his
parents forced him to quit school to support hisbrothers and sisters. He
founded the Katipunan on a radical platform - winning the independence
and freedom of the country by force of arms. History recognizes him as the
"Father of Katipunan” because he was its founder and leader.
• Emilio Jacinto
Another leading personality in the Katipunan as he was Bonifacio's right-
hand man. He was known as the “Brains of the Katipuan," Together with
Bonifacio and Dr. Pio Valenzuela, he wrote many of the documents of the
Katipunan which included the famous Kartilla. He edited the Kalayaan,
which was the official newspaper of the Katipunan.
• Apolinario Mabini
He was a Filipino, political philosopheranit re\rolu®hary who wrote .the-
constitution for the first Philippine Republic of 1899-1901, and served as its
first prime minister in 1899. In Philippine history texts, he is often referred
to as “the Sublime Paralytic", and as “the Brains of the Revolution. To his
envious enemies, he is referred to as the "Dark Chamber of the President".
• Lapu-Lapu ■ ‘
The king of Mactan Island, he’s regarded as the first great hero of the
Philippine Islands and he’s credited for the death of Magellari( claimed as
the re-discoverer of the Philippine Islands).
• Gabriela Silang
She was the first Filipino woman to lead a revolt during the Spanish
colonization of the Philippines. An active member of the insurgent force
of Diego Silang, her husband, she led the group for four months after
his death before she was captured and executed. Her ferocity and death
hfirame a sym hnnnrFiliprrio women, their pre-colonial importance
in Filipino society and their .struggle for liberation during colonization.
Because of her bravery, Gabriela Silang was often called the "Joan of Arc
of llocandia." .
• Melchora Aquino
She is now hailed the “Mother of the Katipunan and Philippine Revolution"
for having supported the revolution consistently by curing the Katipuneros
who were hurt during the revolution.
• Hilaria Aguinaldo
The wife of President Aguinaldo, she established the Hijas de la
.....tooIuFcFoTilDaugHters of the Revolution) that became the Asociacion
dela Cruz (Red Cross Association), now known as the Philippine Red
Cross, to help wounded soldiers during the war.
• • Trinidad TecSun ~ : ~
Together with the young Gen. Gregorio del Pilar, she fought and liberated
Bulacari particularly Calumpit. She also fought at Subic in Zambales and
brought the sick and wounded to Biak-na-Batb, even if it meant having
LET R e v i ! ^ e r
G e n e r a l E d u c a tio n
n~ *''" "" " "r »^ in - * .......
to cross the Zambales mountains. Aside from being dubbqd the “Mother
of Biak-na-8ato" for her contribution during the Philippine Revolution of
1896, she was also later called ‘Mother of the Philippine- Red Cross. ”
• Geronima Tomelder-Pecson
In 1947, Geronima Tomelder-Pecson changed political history when she
was elected the first female senator of the Philippines. A well-known
educator, she authored and sponsored various laws and bills that
focused on education during her tenure as a senator. Pecson also held
the distinction of being the first woman in the world to become member
of the executive board of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization (UNESCO) in 1950. ..... f~
Generai Education*
P A R T II - ANALYZING T E S T IT E M S
-Four days after the founding of the La liga Filipina, Rizal was arrested and
imprisoned at Fort Santiago without due process of law. Who was then the
Governor-General of the country who ordered the arrest and banishment of
Rizal in Dapitan?
A. Ramon Blanco C. Camilo Polavieja
B. Eulogio Pespujol D. Emilio Terrero
Answer: B
The statement is about the different Spanish Governor- Generals who played a significant
role on Rizal's life. Option A is not the right choice because it m s Ramon Blanco who
gave Rizal, after the-(our- year exile in Dapitan, the permission to*go to Cubans a
revolutionary doctor. Option Bis the appropriate answer for the reason that on July 7,
1892 Despujol published a decree banishing Rizal in Dapitan. Rizal was detained in Fort
SatitBQo'ffom July 7 to 14, 1892. On July 15, he left for Dapitan and led a fruitful life
there for fouryears from July 1 7,1892toJuly30, 1896. On the other hand, Option C is
not the correct answer because Polavieja approved the death sentence and ordered that
Rizal be executed at 7:00 o'clock in the morning ofOecember 3 0 ,1896, at Bagumbayan
Field,-now Luneta. The same is true with the Option D, because when Rizal returned
in1887, Terrero was the Spanish Governor- General who advised Rizal to return to Europe
because his life was in danger caused by fie publication of his novel Noli Me Tangere.
D r. E v an gelin e L . M artin
S o c i a l S c ie n c e - R iz a /S Lire .;n<J 'X'oriv. a n d .uh-.-r H e r o e s a n d H e ro in e s
C*. Rizal would want to enlighten or open the minds of his fellowmen. ■■■■
D .' Rizal attacked the bad .Spanish officials and priests.
Answer D ' ...............................................................:-------- :---------------------
Option A is not a valid choice, because fiction or not, Hot Me Tangere was written
purposefully to unfold whatis happening m thattlfiWi D/5MW B dntiTJ were not me valid
choices because the characters manifested or showed the traits that Rizal wbuld want
the Filipinos to have. Definitely, Option D is the best answer. What Rizal attacked was the
bad Spanish friars and officiate and not Spain per se or the-ehurch.--------------------- -—
3. According to Rizal himself he took the term Noli Me Tangere, which means
“Touch Me Not" from the Bible. From what Gospel was Noli Me Tangere
taken?
A. St Luke (24:12)C. St. John (20:17)
B. St Luke (24:44)_D. St. John (20; 15)___________________________ _ _
Answer: C
Rizal used the words Afaff Me Tangere because the book contains things nobody in the
Philippines lad dared to speak about because they were delicate matters and could not
be touched hy anyone. Options A and B ara^excludedbecause (Luke 24:12 and.Luke
24:44) am the message of Jesus after His resurrection to help his disciples revive their
faith and hope.
(Luke24:12) ’Then Peter got up and run Wfhe tomb.AIIM-Saw-ttiece-onbending down
were the linen cloths. He went home wondering."
(Luke 24:44) "Then Jesus said to them, “Remember We words I spoke to you when I
was still witti you: everything written about m ein the Law of Moses, the Prophets and
the Psalms had to be fulfilled." ‘Then Jesus said to them, “Remember the words and Vie
Psalms had to be fulfilled."
Options C(Jotm 20:17) is the plausible choice, Noli Me Tangere (Do Not Touch Mej were
the words of Jesus Christ to Mary Magdaiene when she visited the tomb of Christ early
in the morning of Easter Sunday, Jesus said to her, “Do hoi hold to me: you see I have
not ascended to the Father. But go to my brothers antfsay to them. I am ascending to my
Fattier, who is your Father. "Christ must not be touched for He is holy and Mary Magdalene,
was a sinner. Definitely Option D (John 20:15) is not the correct answer, because they were
utterances of the two angels to Mary “Women, why are you weeping?" She answered,
"Because they have taken myLordandfdon't know where they have put Him."
4. The- character in the novel Noli was described by Rizal as a laundry woman
before her marriage to the officer of the Guardia Civil. She was known as the
“Muse of the Guardia Civil.” She pretended to have forgotten Tagalog already
but her use of Spanish was awful. Who was the woman?
A. Dona Consolacion
B. Dona Victorina de los Reyes de Espadafia
C. Sisa. •
D. Paulita Gomez
— AnswenA
I he Question is dbduTThe different characters in Noli Me Tangere. Option A is an explicit
description of Dona Consolacion, who shows the mentality of.the civil guard for being the
mistress of the aUerez. She was vulgar, imprudenl quarrelsome and cruel.-Option Bis A
eliminated because although Dona Victorina de los Reyes de Espadana m s the paragon
of colonial mentality but she was the wife of Don Tiburcio de Espadana, the fake doctor
in the IM . She desdains what was Filipino and imitates what was Spanish. Option C is
not related to the question, Sisa, the mother of Crispin and Basiiio, illustrated the lack
of concern of society in trying to hep her solve the problems_ the maireatment of her
two sons and the indignities she suffered which finally drove her insane. Option Disnot
responsive who yields to the habit of enthico-politico selection in marriage.
Answer: A
Analyze the statement: Blumentritt wrote a letter to Rizal, sometimes in 1867, asking him
•to define the word he could not understand. Option A is the appropriate choice because
it was the period (1872) when the Spaniards used the word filibuster to describe those
whom they suspect of revolutionary activities. At present the word meant: as obstruction
Genera! Education
E M PMU^LET~Revfewer
PART III - EN H A N C IN G TE ST TAKING SKILLS
4. The Katipunan was a secret society founded by Andres Bonifacio and other
patriotic Filipinos on July 7,1892, aimed at attaining Philippine Independence
through the use of force. In what district of Manila was the Katipunan
founded? — ........................................... — :— --------
A. Intramuros C. Tondo
B, Binondo ' ' D. Sampaloc ^
5. She joined the women chapter of the Katipunan in 1895 at the age of 47
and was popularly known as the Mother of Biak-na-Bato. Who was this
Katipunera? .
A. Agueda Kahabagan C’. Teresa Magbanua
B. Trinidad Tecson D. Marina Dizbn
6. The first official flag of the Katipunan was made by Benita Rodriguez upon the
request of the Supremo. She was assisted by a woman very close to the heart
of Andres Bonifacio. Who was this woman who assisted Benita Rodriguez in
making the first official flag of the Katipunan?
A. Marina Dizon C. Catalina de Castro
8. Gregoria de Jesus D. Espiridiora Bonifacio
7. Who was this Filipino hero who wrote in his last will: “Should I be killed,
enshrine me in a Filipino flag with the same clothes in which I died and bury
me in the ground." _..... ... ~ ~ .
A. Juan Luna C. Apolinario Mabim
B. Antonio Luna D. Andres Bonifacio
8. What was Dr. Jose Rizal’s educational philosophy?
A To create in th§ youth an innate desire to alleviate his intelligence that will
lead him to eternal life.
B. -To see improvements in the school and in the methods of teaching.
C. To form the nucleus of an unfavorable- opinion of imperialistic
administration of his country and people.
- D. T o te able to contain if not eliminate, social evils like inferiority complex,
camaraderie, timidity, and false pride. . *
LET Havlewer
Social Science - Rizal's Life and Works and ocher Heroes and Heroines
15. When Rizal was in trial, who was the defense counsel assigned to him?
A. Luis Taviel de Andrade . C. Camilo de Polavieja
B. Nicolas dela Pena " D. Martin Constantino
16. Who gladly agreed to finance the printing cost of the book Noli Me Tangere
when Rizal was having problems with the expenses?
A. Ferdinand Blumentritt C. Antonio de Morga
B. Hans Meyer ' D. Maximo Viola
17. Rizal was able to finish his studies and performed excellently in all subjects in
Ateneo. He was later coined as the “pride of the Jesuits" but he pointed out
that if it weren’t for this education, he. wouldn’t have achieved those goals.
Who was this educator?
A. Father Sajichez C. DonSaez
B. Maestro Aquino "* D. Don de Jesus
18. Below are four statements about the Philippines during Rizal’s time. Which
statement is false?
A. The system of government was called frailocracy.
B. The Philippines was represented in theSpanish Cortes.
C. The big plantations were owned by religious organizations.
D. The justice system served the interests of the Spanish colonial government.
19. Who ordered Jose Rizal to be shot in Bagumbayan on the morning of
December 30,1896?
A. Governor-General Ramon Blanco
B. Governor-General Eulogio Despujol
C. Governor-General Camilo Polavieja ________
D. Governor-General Rafael de Izquierdo
20. Jose Rizai and other mestizos and pensionados in Madrid formetHhe—
Propagandists Movement to appeal to reformers in the Spanish administration
in the Philippines through periodicals and pamphlets. Which of the following
was not .a product of the Propagandists Movement?
A. Sol _ . C. Kalayaan _
B. Fray Botod ’ D. Dasalan at Tocsohan
21. If Gregorio del Pilar was the hero in the Battle of Tirad Pass, then who was
the leader in the Battle of La Loma? '
A. Antonio Luna ' , C. Emilio Jacinto
B. Mariano Sakay ' D. Miguel MSIvar
22. Who led the longest revolt in Philippine history?
A. Andres Malong C. Francisco Dagohoy
B. Diego Silang D. HermanoPule
23. In 1872 the martyrdom of Gomburza truly inspired Rizal to fight the evils of
Spanish tyranny and redeem his oppressed people. The governor-general
____ who ordered the-execution of Gomburza was
A. Governor-General Rafael de Izquierdo
B. Governor-General Fernando Primo de Rivera
C. Governor-General Ramon Blanco
D. Governor-General Camilo de Polavieja
24. How did Rizal describe his novel, El Fiiibusterismo in terms of treatment,
style, and content?
A. El Fili is a romantic novel; it is a work of the heart, a book of feeling; it
has freshness, color, humor, lightness, and wit.
B. El Fili is a political novel; it is work of the head, a book of thoughts;
containing bitterness, hatred, pain, violence, and sorrow.
C. El Fili is a novel about Filipino ethics, a book of Filipino habits and
-isagt^gnri«EgT»Bmor,‘witrb^emess. and .pain
D. None of the above
25. Af the start, there were two rival factions of the Katipunan in Cavite: one was
the N/lagdalo faction led by Boldomero Aguinaldo with headquarters at Cavite
— Viejo (now Kawit) and the faction led-by~Mariano Alvarez, uncle-in-law of
■ Bonifacio. Where was the headquarters of the Magdiwang faction in Cavite?
A. Imus C. Binakayan
B. Naic ' D. Noveleta
General Education
Prepared by:
Prof. M ichael M , Nael
j Competencies:
PA R T I - C O N T E N T U P D A TE
— t^W-ATURE OF PHILOSOPHY -
a. Philosophy (from the Greek words, “Philia" and "Sophia," meaning "love
------- of wisdom") - is defined technically as the science of beings in their
ultimate reasons, causes and principles, acquired by human reason alone.
In brief, it is the field of reason.
b. Philosophy is the Science and Art of all things naturally knowable to man's
unaided powers in so far as these things are studied in their deepest causes
and reasons. It is humanity’s attempt to think.speculatively, reflectively, and
systematically about the universe and the human beings’ relationship to
the universe. It is humanity's communal search for the ultimate explanation
of the realities of life. . *-
_2._B R A N C H E S OF PHILOSOPHY
2.1 METAPHYSICS- What is reality? (Teachers must teach the realities of life,
especially the essential and the relevant realities.)
2. Causality -Causality is the Law of Identity applied over time. It is the identity
* of actions. Action is a'Change in the identity of an entity.
3. Every effect must have a cause. That cause, however, is an effect of a
previous cause. Causality is the law that states that each cause has a specific
effect, and that this effect is dependent on the identities of the agents involved.
4. Nothing. Nothing, or non-existence, is that which doesn't exist. It is not a
metaphysical entity. It doesn't exist. It has no identity.
5. Contradiction-Contradictions don't exist in reality because reality simply is
as it is and does not contradict itself.
6. An Entity is the Sum of its Parts -Assuming there are basic building blocks
of the universe, it is conceivable that these entities have a fixed identity,
except location. They do not change. They act, and interact, but do not ever
actually change their identity.
1. IDEALISM
a. believed that the physical world around us is not real; it is constantly
changing and thus you can never say what it really is,
b. There is a world of ideas which is a world of unchanging and absolute
truth. This is reality for Plato.
c. Whenever we grasp an idea, or see something with our mind's eye, we
are using our mind to conceive of something in the Ideal world.
d. Since concept could not come from the physical world, it must come
from an ideal world.
2. DUALISM -
a. Dualism is the philosophy that there are two kinds of reality; material.
5 and Immaterial. ’
b. There is a physical world as well as a non-physjcafor spiritual world.
c. Ideas in the mindcome fromthe physical world as experienced by'the senses.
d. Truth can be verified through its existence in the. natural world.
Gencrni Education
3. MATERIALISM
a. On this view only the world of matter is- real.
• b. Thoughts, ideas, and other non-physical things are merely, movements
of physical matter or chemical reactions. __ _______
c. There is no reality beyond the physical.
2.2. EP1STEM0L0GY- What is truth? ( Teachers must teach the truth, its criterion
and .grounds and the ability to fearn to know)
Epistemology. it is the theory of knowledge. Its major concerns are the nature of
knowledge itself and the grounds for its validity.
PMU t £7 R eview er
S o d a ! Science - Philosophy
1. Empiricism
a. Empiricists claim knowledge is a product of human experience.
b. Statements of observations take pride of place in empiricist theory.
c. Naive empiricism holds simply that our ideas and theories need to be
tested against reality and accepted or rejected on the basis of how
well they correspond to observed facts.
d. For any knowledge -to-6e-properly-infereed-or-deduced,. it is to be
gained ultimately from one's sense-based experience.
3. Naive realism -
a. there exists a world of material objects.
- - J>. Statements about these objects can be known to be true through
sense-experience.
c. These objects exist not only when they are being perceived but also
when they are not perceived.
d These objects are also able to retain properties of the types we
perceive them as having^even wherkthey are not being perceived.
Their properties are perception-independent.
e. Bymeans of our senses, we perceive the world directly, and pretty much
as it is. In the main, our claims to have knowledge of it are justified.
4. Phenomenalism
a. Phenomenalism is a development from- George Berkeley's claim that
to be is to be perceived.
b. When you see a tree, you see a certain perception of a brown shape,
when you touch it, you get a perception of pressure against your palm.
c. One shouldn't think of objects as distinct substances, which interact
with our senses so that we may perceive them; rather we should ;
conclude that all that really exists is the perception itself.
. .. . .'
5. Pragmatism • |
a. ft holds that what is important about knowledge' is that it solves i
certain problems that are constrained both by the world and by human ; f-
purposes. • * -;i
6. Rationalism
a. Rationalists believe that tlw e are a priori or innate ideas ttiat are not
derived from sense experience.
b. These ideas, however, may be justified by experience.
c. These ideas may in some way. derive from the structure of the human
mind, or they may exist independently of the mind.
d. If they exist independently, they may be understood by a human mind
once it reaches a-necessary degree of sophistication.
7. Representationalism
. a. Representationalism or Represestative realism, unlike Naive Realism,
proposes that we cannot see the external world cfirectty, but only
through our perceptual representations of it
b. The objects and the world that you see around you are not the world
itself, but merely an internal virtuai-reatity replica of that world.
c. The veil of perception removes the real world from our direct inspection.
8. Relativism
a. Protagoras maintains that all things are true and in a constant state
of flux, revealing certain aspects of truth at one time while concealing
them at another.
b. Relativism claims that there is no objective truth, it also holds that
anything which a man can perceive is true, but not necessarily true to
the next person. • .
2.3. ETHICS - What is the good life? (Teacher must teach the good, to value the
good and moral life and to actually live the good life. Learning to
be, to do and to live together.)
1. Platonism
a. If a man knows what the good life is, he will not act immorally. Thus evil
is due to lack of knowledge.
b. Absolutism-there is fundamentally one and only one good life for all
men to lead- the objectivity of Moral Principle.
2. Aristotle- Nicomachean Ethics
a. The doctrine of the mean- in order to achieve happiness, men must act
moderately, they must act so as to be striving for the mean between
two extreme.
b. The good life is a life of happiness.
c. Happiness is an activity not a goal.
d. Men ought to- behave so as to achieve happiness.
3. Epteurus-Hedonism
a. Pleasure is the sole good - to live pleasantly without suffering from any
of the undesirable effects of such living
. -br-Dynami&^leastife-pleas«fe-aGGempanied by pain
c. Passive pleasure-pleasure not accompanied by pain
1. Psychological Hedonism- aaloctrine that states that men pursue
’ pleasure and only pleasure in their lives.
' 2. Ethical Hedonism- the view that men not only seek pleasure but
that they'ought to do so since it is the only good.
4. Cynicfem-Diogenes
a. Holds that all fruits of civilization are worthless.
b. If salvation is to be found, it is in the rejection of society anda return to
simple life, to a life of ascetic living.
c. The world was fundamentally evil;Jn order to live properly aman must
withdraw from participation in it.
d. Man must find it with-in itselfJhis is what virtue consists of.
6. Christian Ethics
a. The view that there is a divine being who has laid down certain
rules for moral behavior and that correct conduct consist in acting in
accordance with these rules and incorrect conduct consists in violating
them. — -
b. Authoritarianism-the church regards the moral code as an objective
* and infallible guide to correct behavior.
e. On duty
1. Common necessity never exempts from duty.
2. No necessity exempts from a negative natural duty.
" " ..3. Extreme or grave necessity'exempts from affirmative natural duty,
provided there is no involved violation of negative natural law.
4. Extreme or grave necessity exempts from the prescription of positive
law, provided there is no involved violation of negative natural law. *
f. On contract: The matter apt; the person fit; consent and a formal note of it
2.4. LOGIC - What is correct thinking? Teachers must develop the mental faculty of
students, to reason out critically, creatively andstrategically.
a. Logic is the science and art of correct thinking and right reasoning.
b. Logic is the study of univocal terms and precise ideas that constitute
'propositional judgment in order to determine the validity and soundness of
syllogisms and arguments.
c. Logic is a tool of knowing and understanding and thus a tool of Philosophy,
Science and Education. The wisdom that philosophy discovers through
correct reasoning is taught and transmitted through logical educative
processes. The collective wisdom of the human race is verified byscience
which employs logical processes and methodologies and made applicable
and relevant through technology.
d. Immediate Inferences
1. "immediate Inference is a kind of inference by which the mind directly
draws the implication of one proposition to arrive at a new proposition
without the use of a mediuni.or a third idea. • . . ._________
2. Types of Immediate Inference .
2.1. Oppositional inference is a type of immediate- inference—that—
proceeds from the relationship between propositions with the
same subject and predicate but different quantities and/or
qualifies. Oppositional inference is the process of determining the
truth or falsity of an opposite statement from the truth or falsity of
a given statement.
2.2. Types of Categorical Propositions
Categorical Propositions are statements of direct claim of
relationship or non-relationship. They are either true or false. They
are classified into four types, namely A, £, 1,0 propositions:
1. .A propositions- propositions.that are Universal/Singular in
quantity and affirmative ir> quality
E& All men are rational;-Cathy is a student; Every citizen is
free to own properties
2. E Propositions-Those that are Universal/Singular in-quantity——
and negative in quality ......
Ex. No man is an island; All students are not teachers; Every
dog is not a cat
3. I Propositions-Those that are particular in quantity and
affirmative in quality
Ex. Some politicians are liars; Many countries are for peace;
Filipinos are Christians.
4. 0 Propositions-Those that are particular in quantity.and
negative in quality. .
Ex. Some civilians are not responsible people; Many are not
in favor of war; Not all Filipinos are not rich.
^ ^ Ravj^Wfif
Social Science - PhilosopRy
f e W im i
2.4 Square of Opposition
A Proposition E Proposition
Universal affirmative Universal Negative
Ex. All humans are free. Ex. Ato Humans are free.
No humans are not free. All humans are not free.
I Proposition 0 Proposition
Particular affirmative Particular Negative
Ex. Some humans are free. - -Ex. Some humans are not free.
iVoK. Miciuici M
2.6 Truth-Vatue Table of Opposing Propositions
L " F F ■ - '■ 9
F I ? .F
_
1. 1
T F ? T F T T ?
?
F F T F T F
>
I ' ' ? E T ? I T £
1ST R eview er
Social Science • P h iiosop.";
□ A O C 3 Z ^ IZ D
Subject copula Predicate = Predicate copula Subject
To illustrate: I proposition converted to another I Proposition
Shortcut:
Contraposition Process
Contraponend = All nurses are health providers.
Step 1: Obvert * All nurses are not non-health providers.
Step 2: Convert = All non-health providers are not nurses. = Partial Contraposit
Step 3: Obvert_= All non-health providers are non-nurses. = Full Contraposit
Ex. All Nurses are role models, = All non- role models are non-nurses
Fvp.rv imis is not a bacterium. = Some non-bacteria are not non-virus.
Shortcut
n y x ■ '■ O
Subject copula . Predicate Predicate copula Subject
.Negative Positive Negative
Shortcut:
Categorical Syllogism -
A Categorical Syllogism is a mediate inference that is made up of
categorical propositions. The two propositions, called premises, are
related through a middle term. These result into a third proposition, called
conclusion, whictt flows necessarily from such relationship.
PWtfliT Reviewer
General Educacion
5. The Major and the minor terms may only be universal in the conclusion
if they are universal in the premises. The violation of this rule is known
■ as the fallacy ofextensbn of the major or the minor term. ■
6. Two affirmative proposition results into an affirmative conclusion. The
violation of this rule is called the fallacy of negative conclusion.
7. Two negative premises cannot have a valid conclusion. The violation of
this rule is known as the fallacy of negativepremises,
8. One affirmativeand one negative premises result into a negative conclusion.
Violation of this rule is called the fallacy ofaffmative conclusion.
---------9. The premises must be universal at least once. The violation of this rule
' is known as the fallacy of undistributed premises.
10. One universal and one particular premise results into a particular
coTidusion. The violation of this rule is known as the fallacy of universal/
or extended conclusion:
11. Two particular premises cannot have a valid conclusion. The violation
of this rule is called the fallacy of undistributed premises.
12. Never claim something in the conclusion something that was not
claimed and proven in the premises. This is the General rule in any
syllogism. The violation of this rule is called the fallacy of lack of
sequence.
2. CELARENT .
E- All X are not Y; E-All spiritual are not immortal;
A- but all Ware X; A -but all human souls are spiritual;
E- Alt W are not Y E- Thus, all human souls are not immortal.
3.DAR1I
A -A llX are Y; A- All spiritual are imrrortal;
I-b u t some W are X; I-bu t some human souls are spiritual;
/- thus, some W are Y. I- thus, some human souls are immortal.
Prof. M id ia c l M . N a d
4: FERIO
E-N oX isY; . E- No spiritual being is immortal;
I- but some WJsJL. '-t-butsom W m an'souls are spiritual;
0 - thus, some W are Y. (kJtsus, some human souls are immortal.
2. CAMESTRES
A -A ll Y are X; A- All manuals are newspapers;
E-but no W Is an X; E- but no Bulletin Today is a newspaper;
E- thus, noW Is an Y. E- therefore, no Bulletin Today is a manual.
3. FESVNO
E -A IIY arenotX E- All manuals are not newspapers;
— t-b o H w m W a rs J I- but some Bulletin Today are newspapers;
V thus, some Ware Y 0 - thus, some Bulletin Today are not manuals,
4.BAROCO
A- All Yare X; A~ All manuals are newspapers;
■ O-but some W are not X; 0 - but some Bulletin Today are not newspapers;
0 - thus some Ware not Y. 0 - thus, some Bulletin Today are not manuals,
2. DISAMIS
/- Some X are Y; I-Some transparencies are plastic;
A- but allX are W; A- but all transparencies are instructional materials;
I• thus, some W are Y A thus, some instructional materials are plastic.
3. D A W
A-AH X are Y; A -A ll transparencies are plastic
I- but some X are W; ' l-butsome transparencies are instructional materials
I- thus, some W are X. I- thus, some instructional materials are plastic.
4. FELAPTON ..____________
E-NoXisY; E-Nchtranspareneies-m-piastici— ---------------
A- butallXare W; A-but all transparencies are instructionalmaterials;
0 - thus, some Ware not Y. 0 - thus, some instructional materials are not plastic.
5. BOCARDO
0 - Some X are not Y; 0 - Some transparencies are not plastic;
A-but all X are W; A-butall transparencies are instructional materials;
0- thus, some Ware not Y. 0 - thus, some instructional materials are not plastic.
6. FERISON
E-AllX are not Y E- All transparencies are notplastic;
1- but some X are W ...J-butsmgtransjiarencresmiOstmtionalmaterials;
n. thus, someWare not Y. 0- thus, some instructional materials are not plastic..
2. CAMENES '
A-AIIYareX; A-Education is an investment of humqp capital;
E-but no X is W; E- but no investment of human capital is precious;
E- thus, noWisY. E- thus, no precious thing is education.
3. DIMARIS
I- Some Y are X; I- Some Education are investment of human capital;
A- but all X are W A-butall investments ofhuman capitalare precious;
I-thus some W are Y I-thus, some precious things are education.
4. FESAPO
E- No YisX E- No education is an investment of human capital;
A -butailXareW . A-butall investments ofhuman capitalare precious;
0-thus, some Ware not Y 0- thuspsome precious things are not education.
5. FRESISON
E- No YisX E- No education is an investment of human capital;
1- but some X are W l-butsomeinvestmentsofhumancapitalareprecious;
0- thus, some Ware not Y 0- thus some precious things are not education.
B Hypothetical Syllogism
B. 1 Rules for the Validity of Conditional Syllogism (Cause and effect Relation
introduced by" If.. .Then.
1. There must be sequence. The consequent must necessarily flow from
the antecedent.
2. Posit or assert the truth of the antecedent in the minor, posit or assert.
the truth of-the consequent in the conolusion.
3. Sublate or deny the truth of the consequent in the minor premise,
sublate or deny the truth of the antecedent in the conclusion. •
* • ..
b. It is invalid .to posit one alternative in the -miner premise then
sublate the othet in the conclusion.
Examples: Either the answer is correct or it is wrong;
• But the answer is not correct;
: Therefore, the answer is wrong, ■
B.3 Rules for the Validity of Conjunctive Syllogism (introduced by" One
cannot be... and be... at the same respect")
1.Posit one alternative in the minor premise then sublate the other in the
conclusion.
2. It is invalid to subfate one alternative in the minor premise then posit
the other in the conclusion.
Examples: Youcannotbe in Baguio and in PNUat the same time;
But you are in Baguio;
Thus, you are not in PNU.
2.3.4 Fallacies
A. Nature of Fallacy
Fallacy refers to errors in the reasoning process or an argument that has
insufficient evidence or warrant for its conclusion.
Example: He was not guilty since no one saw him commit the crime.
6. Argumentum ad populum or the appeal to people-when the popular
sentiments of the majority or those that counts are made the basis of
the conclusion. This makes use of the bandwagon argument.
Example: Since milk from China causes health problems then we must
avoid buying any product coming from China,
7. Petitjo Pricipii or Begging the question/ Cireulus in probando or arguing
in circles -when one makes use of an uriproven assumption to prove
yet another assumption or the use of an unproven assumption to prove
another assumption that proves the first assumption.
Example: Order is indispensable to justice because justice can be .
achieved only by means of social and legal order. ........ —
8. Ignoratio elenchi or ignoring the issue- when the issue Is set aside and
an^nrelated fapt is presented or an irrelevant conclusion is made.
Example: Question: Do you love me? Answer: Let us eat you must be
hungry.
9. Fallacy of false cause-when an effect is attributed to an unrelated
cause simply because the perceived effect took place after the
perceived cause.
Example: We are pox'because the government is not concerned with
providing us the basic services.
10. Hasty Generalizatton-When the argument concludes even if there is
insufficient data to establish a valid sequence when what is true to a — j
. few- is made true to all.
' Example: Since I saw them together then they must be lovers.
11. Special pleading-when the argument uses only favorable truths-and--------f
disregards other truth that will not serve the ouroose of the one
arguing. When partial truths are presented as the whole truth. • j
Example: If- you love your friend then you must be willing to give i
everything to him for love is giving everything without expecting 1
anything. _ . j
- P r o f . M ichstei M . N aci
. General Education
3.1. Naturalism.
1. te a doctrine denying anything in reality that has supernatural
significance
2. Truth can be discovered'only though nature. MAN is a product of
NATURE
'3 . Nature is the be-all and end-all of rpaiity it<^_antitfafisis-fe-
supernaturalism. Nature is the aggregate of thrngVaroundus.
4. 8s educational theme is harmony with nature and the hedonistic
principte of pleasure in the educative process.
5. Its chief educational spokesman is Herbert Spencer who believes that
the goal of education is complete living.
6. The child (pupil) is viewed as a child of nature and so is inherently good.
7. There is only one reality, and that reality is nature.- Leucippus,
Democritus, Epicurus, Lucretius and Spencer
8. Reality is composed of bodies moving in space.- Democritus, Epicurus,
Lucretius and Hobbes
9. Force or energy is the ultimate reality.- Spencer
...... ~ ....
Social Scjencc - Phifusophy
10. Keeping close to the dominant and peaceful ways of nature is the
most acceptable way of adhering to the demands of day-to-day life.-
Leucippus, Democritus,/Epicurus and Rousseau
11. Cosmic reason is the governing principle of all things.- Epictetus
Aim -of Idealist Education:. to contribute to the development of mind and self.
The school should emphasize intellectual abilities, moraljudgments,aesthetics,
■ self-realization, individual freedom, individual responsibility.and self- control.
8. Realism believes that things exist independent of the mind. Its origin is
. traced to Aristotle's doctrine of particulars.
9. It has greatly influenced the socialistic (communistic) educational philosophy.
10. John Amos Comenius, a great realist, believes that education is formation
and that the school is the true forging place of man.
11. It believes in determinism (man is not free because he is governed by
laws or forces of nature beyond his control). One of the primary goals of
education is habit formation.
12. The teacher is the key figure, a master teacher; one who transmits
knowledge to his pupils (an authority).
U P p f f t T L E T R e v ie w e r
General Fducation
considered “good” and the’ students’ heads should be filled with "factual
truth” so that they do nof come to a ‘bad end* •
Perennialist Curriculum
• The perennialist view education as a recurring process based on eternal
truths; thus, the school’s curriculum should emphasize the recurrent
themes of human life. *
P ro f. M ic h a d M . N ael
S o c k i Science - P hilosophy
• It should contain cognitive subjects that cultivate rationality and the study of
moral, aesthetics, and religious principles to develop the attitudinal dimension.
- • The perennialist prefers a subject matter curriculum, which includes history,'
language, mathematics, logic, literature, the humanities, and science. *
Perennialist’s Methodology
• As for the methods of teaching, the curriculum of a perennialist education
would be subject-centered, drawing heavily upon the disciplines of
tjterature, mathematics, language, history, and the humanities.
• The perennialists suggest that the best means to attaining this enduring
knowledge is through the study of great books of Western Civilization.
• The method of study would be the reading and discussion of these great
works which, in turn, discipline the mind.
Aims of Essentialism
• The essentialist have as their ultimate aim " to fit the man to perform
justly, skillfully and magnanimously all the offices, both private and public,
of peace and war”.
• The indispensable cultural objectives of humanity, the essentials, are goals
that must be achieved -sometimes incidentally- but more often by direct
instruction. Informal learning helps, but this should only be supplementary
and. secondary.
• The essentialist believed that the essential skills, knowledge, and attitude
needed by the individual in making has adjustment to the realities of
life should be systematically "planned so ttiat these essentials will be
recognized.
Essentialist Curriculum
• The essentialist emphasizes the need for a curriculum that transmits
significant race experiences and the need to present this racial experiences
through organized subject matter courses. • *
General Ediicarior
Essentialist Methodology
• The essentialist method emphasizes habituation more than experience,
guidance more than incidentalism, discipline more than freedom, effort
more than interest, and self-examination more than expression.
• Essentialists do not believe in building up generalization by the slow
method of induction, but rather in properly guiding pupils in a few hours or
days in the acquisition of general laws and principles then using them in
. the solution of immediate and pressing problems.
• " The essehtiaTsts are concerned M h the most effective method of forming
habits and developing skills; thus, drill has a definite place in the classroom.
• The~essentialists emphasize the necessity of teaching pupils how to think
systematically and effectively.
\ i . N ad
• During the immature years of childhood and youth there is a need for
competent, sympathetic and firm teachers to help them see the truth and
to help them adjust themselves to inexorable facts..
• -• In this view, teachers should be restorerUojflstru&ieflal-atttbefify:-----:—
• They must be we'll prepared and held accountable for the children's failure
to learn. Instruction should be geared to organized learning.
• The method of instruction should center on regularassignments,
homework, recitation, and frequent testing and evaluation------------------ -
• They believe that effective thinking cannot take place by looking at the
world en masse, or by picking up knowledge piecemeal.
• Methods of systematic analysis and systematic synthesis must be used;
the essential elements of knowledge must be separated from the worthless
chaff, and these essentials must be organized into meaningful wholes, with
close attention to the interrelationships of each of these entities.
• The essentialists recognize that interest is a strong motivating force
of learning. Learning however, that is not immediately appealing and
interesting to the child should not be totally eliminated from the child’s
education.
• The more valuable and more permanent interests may grow out of efforts
that are at first disagreeable and monotonous?' ' . ..,------
Methodology • ■* , .
• Social communication, social cooperation, and social science were the •
methods used in teaching the child to adjust to life.
Social Science - Philosophy
• The teacher worked with the social interests of the child in mind to develop
social consciousness.
• Student's participations in school activities and school government were
effective methods of teaching leadership and responsibility.
• Students were taught cooperation rather than-competition; to face the
class rather than the teacher; and to deal with small groups for cooperative
effort.
LET Review er 1
General Education
4. The teacher must convince his pupils of the validity and urgency of the
reconstructionist solution, but he must do so with scrupulous regard for
democratic procedures.
5. The means and ends of education must be completely re-fashioned to
meet the demands of the present cultural crisis and to accord with the
findings of the behavioral sciences.
6. Society has to reconstruct its values, and education has a major role to play
in bridging the gap between the values of culture and technology.
7.---It is the task of the school to encourage the critical examination of the
-------------- cultural heritage and find the elements that are to be discarded and those
that have to be modified.
8. The Curriculum should include learning to live in a ^global miljgu.
Reconstructionism proposes educational policies related to national and
international problems as a means of reducing world conflict The school
becomes the center of discussions of controversies.
P ro f. M ic h a e l M- Nael
. General Education
Content
• Progressive education was not interested in a prepared, prescribed
curriculum to transmit knowledge to students. ______ — -— -— “
• Curriculum must come from the'child so that learning wnulrl he actiua.—
. exciting, and varied.
• The contents of the subject are done by the teacher and the students as a
' . group project or a cooperative effort. The teacher served as facilitator.
■ NATURS
* Focuses on the experiences of the individuals.
• Offers individuals a way of thinking about the meaning of life.
EXISTENTIAL THEMES
1. Existence precedes essence
2. Anxiety and anguish
3. Absurdity
4. Nothingness
5. Death .................................___ ________ _
EDUCATIONALAIM
• To train individual for significant and meaningful existence. v
• Synthesis and Implications to Education:
- The classroom is a free market of ideas and as such it must guarantee
complete, freedom of thought for the individual.
- The student is encouraged to make independent decisions to guarantee
authentic existence.
CURRICULAR EMPHASIS
• Subject-centered
• Literature .............. ...... ......................... ............. •____
• History
• Arts for aesthetic expression
• Humanities for-efticaLualues----------- .------ ;— ;— -------------------------—
LET R e v isw e -
Genera! Education
ROLE OF.TEACHERS •
•' Good provider of experiences
« Effective questioner
• Mental disciplinarian
ROLE OF SCHOOL
• Create an atmosphere for active interaction.
• Plan better solutions to their everyday problems
• Discuss the different situations based by an individual
3.10 BEHAVIORISM
A. B.F. Skinner. ’
1. Learning is manifested by a change in behavior.
2. The environment shapes behavior.
3. The principles of contiguity (how close in time two events must be for a
bond to be formed)
4. Reinforcement (any means of increasing the likelihood that an event will be
repeated) are central to explaining the learning process.
5. Learning is the acquisition of new behavior through conditioning.
HINDUISM
1. Brahman, the eternal trimutri, or the three in one GOO: Brahma, the creator;
Vishnu, the preserver; and Shiva,Ihe Destroyer
2. The Caste System, determined by the laws of Manu
3. Submission to Fate, since man is not outside, but part of Brahman
4. lire law of Karma that tow good must-come goddam) from
5. Reincarnation as a chain of rebirths in which each, soul through virtuous
living, can rise to a higher state
6. Nirvana, the final stage reached upon the emancipation of the soul from the
chain of rebirflis
7: Yogas, the disciplines which enable the individual to control the body and
the emotions,
8. Dharma, the law of moral order, which each individual must find and follow
to reach nirvana
BUDDHISM
1. From good must come good, and from evil must come evil. This is the First
Law of Life ' ................
2.__Prayers and sacrifices to the gods are useless only understanding the
___ eightfoi(i-path1-aFiet--praefeing^ttTr Buddhist ten commandments and
rarfertinns lead fri pflrtert wisdom— .— ---------------------- -
3: TheVedas are not sacred books since they teach that people should pray
and offer sacrifices. -
4. The world always was and-always will-ber----------
5. Brahma did not create people into castes out of Manu. There are only two
kinds of people: those who are good and those who are bad.
6. The aim of life is not pleasure or happiness but the end of individual
existence through the practice of the ten perfection.
7. He who attains perfect wisdom enters Nirvana and for him the chain of
reincarnation is broken.
CONFUCIANISM
1. Humari nature is good and-evil is essentially unnatural.
2. Man is free to conduct himself as he wills and he is the master of his choice.
3. Virtue is-its own reward. Five constant Virtue
R T ^ I p n u LET R e v ie w e r
General Education
P A R T II - ANALYZING T E S T IT E M S
Practice test no 1. Which Chinese word is the basis of the Golden Rule?
A. Ren - B. Yi C. Ch'i D. Li • .
Tfiislypeof Question tests your qiemory and association stalls. You have already learned
__ {jbaLCoaiutianism teaches us to develop virtues, to become a sage within and a king
without and to be a man of human heartedness. Human-heartedness- REN or GEN
involves the value of Yi, Li and Chi. The Golden Rule encourages us to become a noble
man-a man with compassion, a man who is benevolent, a man with a heart. Ran- letter
% therefore, is the correct answer.
The key term in this question is sense perception. A simple analysis of the different
choices will reveal the correct answer. Eliminate immediately letter $ for intuition is
internal and does not w ed the senses. Letter Bean be eU nated next for authority
simply uses expertise andcredibility. Lastly, letterA cannotbe the correct answerbecause
it involves inherent ideas that may not pass through the senses. Letter C-Empirtcal is,
therefore, the correct answer.
Practice test no 3. What valid conclusion can be derived from the premises below?
“Whoever is an industrious person is energetic";
"but all athletes are energetic";
A. Thus, all energetic persons are industrious
B. Thus, all athletes are industrious
C. Thus, some industrious persons are athletes
0. None of the above
This question asks us to know the rules of valid categorical syllogism. Letter A wrongly
restates thermajor premise through an ipvaiid conversion. Italsouseserroneo
middle term in the conclusion. Letter 8 is the most logical conclusion; it-is'however an
invalid conclusion. Letter C is simply the converse of letter Bwhich is invalidand since it is a .
logical equivalent of letter B, Cis also invalid. ThecorceclansweHsiettsrtt: Tfiissvlloaism
violates the rule that the mkkHeleim must be Universal at least once, firm e r - ■ ■
middle term are bothparticular,_The.syllogismrtherefors; cannot have a valid conclusion.
This question asks us to have knowledge of the major tenets of the differentphilosophical
positions. Pragmatism believes in the utility, workability and functionality of an individual.
Idealism contends Oiat truth is the mind. It is more concerned with the mental/moral
development of an individual. Realism is concerned with the body/soul aspects of the
individual. Existentialism- letter D is the correct answer. According to this philosophy,
individuals create their own essence through,their own individuality and subjectivity.
Ad Bacuium is toe use of force, violence, or threat Ad hominem is attack against the
person andAd populum makes use of the popular sentiments in arguments. These were
notresorted to in the argument above. A, C, orO, therefore, cannot be the correct answer.
LetterB, on the other hand, makes use ofpity which is irrational in this case for the basis
of grading is academic performance and not charity. It also violates the requirement of
love/charity which is justice, h r before one can take pity, one should first be just. Ad
Misericordiam-ietter B is the correct answer
?m LET R ev iew er j C B M
Social Science - Philosophy
5. In Ethics, Immanuel Kant divided actions into two: acts done from inclination-
non-moral and acts done from a sense of duty-moral. For him morality is
closely bound up with one’s duties and obligation. He also proposed the
Categorical Imperatives: a. act only on the maxim that you can will that it
should become the universal law and b. act as to treat humanity as an end
never as a means. Which one below applies Kant's moral philosophy?
A. One must search for knowledge for immorality is caused by ignorance.
B. \ One must resolve before acting if one wants others to do the very action
- that one is about to do.
C. One must see to it that one's action serves a particular purpose.
D. One must make sure that his action results into pleasure and avoidance
of pain. _• .......
6. How do philosophers explain the existence of change and permanency?
How is it that in spite of the changes there is something that remains to be
permanent? This is due to the principle of ■ .
A. Act and potency
8. Essence and existence
C. Cause and effect
D. Hylemorphism
7. Which view about truth is common to all pragmatists?.
A„ Truth is what all investigators will ultimately agree to.
B .1 Truth is relative to place, time, and purpose,
c: Truth is what works for the individual.
D. Truth is unchanging. ~
8. This is the systematic consistent explanation of all the facts of experience. Its
technical term is reason. It is considered as the best criterion of truth_______
A. Pragmatism .
B. Consistency * t --------------------------------------- -— ... .—
C. Conespontfence
D. .Coherence .
r-i-oh M ic h a e l M . N a d
General Education
9. "Every non-man is immortal since every mortal beings is man,” Suppose the
premise is true, the conclusion of this immediate inference will 6e
A. True ' '
8. False _______■ _____ _— ■
C. Doubtful
------ rmratid “
10. To develop creative thinking skill the teacher asks "What if... “ questions. To
what metaphysical principle is this grounded?
A rprim acydf existence
B. consciousness
G. identity
D. causality
11. What is the specific role of a teacher’s philosophy of education in the
teaching-learning process?
A. It determines the aims, mission, and vision of the educative process.
B; It influences the professional development that the teacher undertake.
C. It qualifies the objective, the content, the methodology and the context
of the teaching process.
D. It identifies what kind of learners the teacher is going to teach.
_J2Jbis-Mesephy-posits1he knowability of the world and everything in it as they
' ''p in'tfiernselves and their existence is independent of the human mind.
A. Existentialism
B: Idealism
C. Materialism
D; Realism . .
13. What type of error in reasoning is found in this argument?
- "This medicine works with rats; thus, it must surely work with human be
A. Fallacy of Accident'
B. A Fortiori . ■
C. Ad Ighorantiam
. D. False Cause *
14. Why is it that a teacher should address the uniqueness of each pupil, cater
to individual interest, and adapt the lesson to the experience of the leams c l-
A.’ Because of the axiom of causality
* B, Because of the axiom of consciousness'----- ---------------------------------'
C. Because of the axiom of identity
D. Because of the axiom of supremacy of existence _______
15. In the argument, ”We cannot punish this man because lie is the only one
that supports his family", what is wrongly appealed to?
A. People
B. Ignorance
,C. Advantage
D; Pity
16. Aristotle contended that the good life is a Fife of happiness. Happiness is an
activity not a goal and men ought to behave so as to achieve happiness. Thus
men must act moderately and they must act so as to be striving for the mean
between two extremes. As a teacher how are you going to interpret this?
*" A. Yc® will provide your students moral dilemmas.
B. You will develop a sense of duty in your s tu d e n ts .-------— ' ~
CL. You will develop the cognitive ability of your students.
D. You will provide your students opportunities to develop virtues’.
17. If the statement “Some philosophies are irrational" is true, what statement
below will be false?
A. Some rational things are not philosophies.
B. Some irrational things are philosophies. •
‘ -G, No irrational thing is not philosophies.
0 .! No irrational thing is a philosophy.
18. “Some scientists are religious" is false then it follows that
A. All scientists are religious is true. ' .
j} .' No sclentist is religious is false. _ '.
C.r Some scientists’are not religious true.
D. Some non-religious people are non-scientists is true.
19. What kind of opposition exists between the propositions "No man is above the
law" and “Some men are not above the law”?
A. Contraries
B. Sub-alternates
C. Contradictories
. D. Sub-contraries
20. What logical equivalence exists between the statements "All books are
reading materials” and “Some non-books are non-reading materials*?
A. Converse
B. obverse
C. contraposit
D. inverse
21. John Locke contended that the mind is a “white paper” or “tabula rasa" void
of any characters and without any ideas and ajl things anybody knows comes
from experience. What would be the logical implication orthis tenet?
A. There is no inherent idea.
B. We can only know our perception of reality and not reality itself.
C. Reality is in the mind.
D. Reality is what it appears to be.
22. What is the contraposit of the-contradictory of the statement "Life is precious"
and what is its truth value?
A. Some precious things are life, false
B. Some non-precious things are not death, false
C. Some non-life is not precious, true.
D. Some life is not precious, true
23. In the argument," Some people are angry is true thus Some angry beings are
not people is false." What kind of immediate inference exists here?
— -'A. Valid conversion :------- '
' B. Invalid conversion . • '
C, Valid conversion of the. sub-contrary
D. Invalid conversion of the sub-contrary
24. "My grades should be high for I got high grades in the firfal exam" What
Fateeies are present in this argument?
1. DMrion
II: Composition
III. False Cause . .
IV. A fortiori . . • .
V. Hasty Generalization
P ro t. M ic h a e l M . N ae»
G«nerar Education
9. “They are often seen together, they must be lovers." This is an example of
what fallacy?
A. Hasty Generalization
B. Composition • '
C. False Cause
D. A Fortiori
10. "To be repaired: a VHS of an old'man with a broken head." What fallacy was
committed?
A. • Equivocation
B. Composition
C.- Amphiboly
D. False Analogy
11. "My teacher said that I should marry Richard, therefore, I w i|" The fallacy
committed in this argument is?
A. AdAuthoritatem
* B. Ad Populum '
C. Ad Vericundiam
D. Adlgnoratiam
12. "Why will I trust him, he didn't even have a master's degree." This argument is
A. Valid
B. Ad Populum
C. Ad Hominem
D. Ad Baculum
13. A paper when burned becomes ash. Why is it that a four year old child when
taught Algebra may not learn it?
A. Because learning should concentrate on the basic knowledge.
B. Because learning must be useful and relevant.
C. Because learning is the actualization of the child's potentials.
D. Because learning must be.based on actual experience. ----------
14. "I'll pay for your tuition provided that you'll be my mistress." Why is this
argument wrong? . •
A. Appeal to Advantage
B. It's practical though immoral
■C. Equivocation
D. a fortiori
15, What situation/s show/s why naive realism cannot be the sole criterion of
truth?
A. What looks like an apple, taste like apple, smells like apple feels like
'• apple is an apple,
B. What looks like a girl, acts like a girl, feels like a girl is a girl.
C. What the majority thinks and feels to be the truth must be true.
D. What is learned by-doing is better than what is learned from books.
16, "if teacher AW uses the showing methodology, then she is a traditional
teacher; but she is a traditional teacher; therefore, he uses the showing
methodology.” What type of inferentiarthinking is this?
A. Valid Conditional
B* Valid Disjunctive
C. Invalid Conditional
D. Invalid Disjunctive
17. The Ethical theory that holds that pleasure is the sole good and that to live
pleasantly without suffering from any of the undesirable effects of such living
is the sole purpose of life according to
A: Utilitarianism
- ;Br-Hedonism-----------------
C. Platonism
D. Cynicism
18' The view that an action is right in so far as it tends to produce the greatest
happiness for the greatest number and that the consequence of a given
action determines the rightness or the wrongness of an act not the motive for
which itwas done comes to rn -------------- — ■—
A. Utilitarianism _______________-
8. Hedonism • •—
C. Platonism.
0. Cynicism ___ _...................
19. As a teacher, you believe that good preparation leads to efficient and relevant
learning. From what metaphysical axiom is this based?
A. The whole is the summation of all its parts
B. The law of Identity
G. The law of causality
D. The law of potency and act
20. In this conditional syllogism, ’if the dentist is not skillful, he will cause his patient
much pain", what minor premise is needed to have a valid conclusion?
A. But the dentist is skillful.
B. But the dentist did not cause his patient much pain.
C. None. Every possible premise is invalid. . _____
0. But the dentist caused his patient much-pain: " H Z - - ~
21. "The order in the world owes its origin either to mere chance or to an
intelligent designer: but the order in the world is not due to mere chance;
therefore, it must be due to an intelligent designer."
This syllogism is
1. Valid Conditional
II. Vafid Disjunctive
III. Invalid Conditional
IV. Invalid Disjunctive
V. An argument for God’s existence
VI. A self defeating argument
rn m m LET R e v ie w e r
j^neral Education
Introduction
to Humanitiesr
Appreciation
o f the Arts
P rep ared by:
D r. A n ita M . N avarro
Competencies:-
PART I - C O N T E N T UPDATE
Introduction
The Humanities are-the sum of the best that was thought and said and
artistically rendered.
--Paul Obfer
The Humanities Include literature, philosophy, religion, the arts, and all of
man's varied efforts to understand and improve his own experienee.
-James Bugental
What is art?
* May refer to any skill or mastery
May aiso refer to a process or a product of a creative skill.
As a process - it.is.tha. arrangement of aesthetic elements in an appealinj
anOitereitingmanner.
As a product -it includes human creation, different activities and forms
of expression such as Painting, sculpture, architecture, music, literature,
dance and theater.
Artis imitation-a representation of reality
Art is-expression- expresses the feelings and ideas shared by all individuals
regardless of culture. It also expresses the way of life of the creators of the
product ' •
Because art expresses the sentiments and temper ef thfe artist as well as
the times, it also communicates. .
Composition of Art
Subject: What is it about9
Content: What is expressed/what- is being communicated?
Medium: What is it made of ^
Visual Arts
• Refers to the artworks perceived by seeing which are shown in 2 — 3
dimensionalformsrefiectingthecultural.socialandreligioustemperoftheera.
• Designs are influenced by the demands from nature, man and the medium
of materials available
A. Painting -* ^
• The Art of putting together the elements of Art on canvas, wood, •
plastic, metal paper and glass.
B. Sculpture
. • The art of adding or subtracting to any materials to form a new design,
object, project or concept.
C. Architecture -
• The art of designing and constructing buildings and structure to
answer functional demands of man.
A. Lines
• The most ancient and universal means of creating Visual Arte.
• It is a prolongation of a point that feature the shape and form of any
piece of Arte.
Kinds of Line-maybe:
• Broad
• Thin
• Fine
• Jagged
D r. A n ita M . N a v a r r o
Social Science - Introduction to Humanities. A poredation o f tile Arts
B. Value
• Relative degree of lightness and darkness of colors that gives
impression of solidity, distance and depth illusion.
• Tints are values above normal while shades_are values below normal.
• KindsofVafuesTTTayDa:______
• Light
• Medium
• Dark
E. Color ' _
• The most important element of Visual Arte which is the easiest to
notice.
• Primary Colors:-
o Red .
o Yellow
o Blue
• Secondary Colors:
o Orange
o Violet _______ ________
......— o— Qreen----------------- ---------------------
• Tertiary colors:
o Red Violet
o Blue Violet
o Red Orange .
o Yellow-Orange
o Blue Green
o Yellow Green - '
Color Harmonies
Related
-.Monochromatic...............................
o One color tint with shades or values.
• Analogous
a — 3 - A neight)orin§-cotoa-*^ossesges one color in all mixtures
« Contrasting - found to be opposite they.contrast each other strongly
• Complimentary - any 2 opposite colors
• Split - any 3 colors with Y guide
• Double - any 4 opposite colors '
• Double Split-any 6 colors with 2 Yguide
General Education
Properties of Colors
• Hue-identify or the names of colors
o Cool-dominance of blue
Warm 5 dominance of red and yellow
• Value - lightness or darkness of color
• Tints are values above normal while
• Shades are values below normal
F. Texture
• Deals more directly with the sense of touch
• Best appreciated when felt by hands.
• The surface characteristics of an object - smooth, glossy, shiny or dull,
fine or coarse, plain or irregular, dirty or dusty, rough etc.
G. Volume
• The solidity of an object which enable us to know its thickness, length
and height.
H. Perspective
• The position of an object in space.
• This refers to the location and distance upon the appearance of an
object by which the eye judges spatial relationships.
Or. A n ir a M . N a v a r r o
*G en a ra.1 £ a ucu ii o n
1. Harmony
• A sense of belonging together of the various parts of the design that
gives unity, which is essential to beauty
2. Balance
• A feeling of ability and equilibrium of parts distributed around a central
point.
3. Rhythm
______ -The continuous use of colors, patterns, objects that carry our attention
from one part to another.
4. Proportion
• Gives the eye the right and proper relationship of one object to the
other.
5. Emphasis . . ■
• The focal point that rests on the subordinate part or space and easily
attracts the attention of the on - looker and enhance the beauty of the
object.
A. Painting
•. Subject: what it is about :_______
. o Landscapes, seascapersnTcffyscapes"" '
o still fifes - — ----------— — ;
o Animals
o Portraits ______.......
o Figures ---- -------------
o Everyday Lite
o History and Legend
o Religion and Mythology
o Dreams and Fantasies
• Medium:
o Fresco
o Watercolor
o Oil
o TempSra
o Encaustic
o Pastel ______________ —— — — 7
° Crayons '
o Acrylic
. o Pencil
'o Charcoal
o Pen and Ink
• Styles in Painting:
o Realism are! Naturalism - real objects, scenery,”aetivities sea
. and experienced
• o Impressionism - goes' beyond what is real. May use distortion ti
form and color to interpret inner sensation and emotion
— 6 — Sculpture
Types
• Free - standing •**
• Relief
1. High Relief
2. Low Relief
• Kinetic
• Processes or Techniques.
• Additives
1. Assemblage and Construction
2. Casting Negative and Positive)
3. Welding / Fabrication
- ...- — 4 ...Mobile'
5. Body forms
6. Modeling
*" * subtractive r ......
—— -------- 1: Carving----------
• Material of Sculpture
o. stone
o wood
o Metal
o Bone and Ivory
o Jade‘and other Crystals
. o Clay
° Wax ■ '
o Cement.
o Sliell
o Glass
o Plaster .
o Plastics
° Fiberglass and Resin .............. ................
° Electronic Lighting Devices — -— — ------------~ ~
C. Architecture
• Styles and designs depends on climate, geographical location, aspects
of life as social, economic, spiritual, political, technological and
ideological.
• Types of construction
• Materials:
V. Mortar construction
- cement
- gravel
- rocks ............... ................
• sand
2. Highbred
- adobe .......................................;----------------------
- ’bricks _____________ ____________ _
- tiles ‘
marbles -
3. Organic
- wood .
4. Metal
5. Reinforced Bars
6. High Tech Sjeel fof Skeleton and Cantilever
7. Synthetic
- plastic
- glass
— V lr M t/s ic —
MEDIUM: Sound/Tones
Elements of Music
1. Rhythm-the movement characterized by the regular recurrence of pulses.
that can be a contrast of strong and weak pulses.
• Beat - the regular, recurrent pulsation that divides music into'equal
units of time.
• Meter - the regular occurrence of accented and unaccented beats
-------------- — Reltted-concepts:— .........
Simple meter, Compound Meter, Polymeter III
Time Signatures/// Rhythmic Pattern III
Syncopation III Accent
2. Melody - that part of music which we can sing. It is a .series of notes
arranged in a particular rfiythmic pattern and divided into smaller units
called phrases. It is the horizontal structure of music. •
D r. A n ita M . N a v a n p
i o c u i l S c ie n c e - I n t r o d u c iio n "o H iu n a n i ii s s : A t> p r«c t»c iw i ot'civ: Arc-;
Related concepts:
Pitch-the highness or lowness of a sound _ .
Key Signatures-consists of sharps and flats
Scale-agroupofmusicalnotecollectedinascendingordescendingofder
3. Tempo - the rate of speed in music
Tempo Markings” ' — - .------- - ' ~
Adagio - * very slow
Andante - moderately slow
Allegro - fast
Moderate - moderate
Accelerando - gradually becoming faster
Ritardando - gradually becoming slower
Presto - very fast
Vivace - lively
4. Dynamics-the volume or loudness of a tone'
Kinds:
Fortissimo (ff)-very loud
Pianissimo (pp)- very soft
Mezzo Plano (mp)- half soft _ . * .
r Mezzo«Forte(mf) - half loud
Crescendo - gradually becoming louder .— -—
Decrescendo -gradually becoming softer .......
5. Form -The overall plan or structure of a musical piece that helps a musician
put together a credible performance or a listener to enjoy the music even more.
• Tone-the smallest unit of a composition
• Figure- the smallest characteristic group of a tone
• Motive- a tone group identified with a particular composition
• Phrase- a succession of tones arranged to. give a musical thought
r Period- complete musical thought made of two phrases in question
and answer format
• Section-is a combination of periods . •
PN ulgT Sevtewerl c ^ i
Social Science - Introduction to Humanities: Appreciation o f the Axts
E S S p u LET Review er
■ General Education
Kinds of Dance
• Communal Dance - In early cultures, dance was a wa^ of life, magic
methodology for survival. Confronted by an environment- that could be
neither rationally controlled nor evaded, members of the tribe consciously
invented dance as a strategy for transcending the consciousness of self by
achieving an ecstatic state.
• Ritual Dance - is a conscious dance organized volitionally in its design,
purpose-and meaning. It celebrates mythology rather magic.
• Folk Dance - developed from the racial or regional memories of older
dance motifs in communal dance but reflecting social and recreational, an
expression of the peasantry in feudal society ....................
• Social Dance - this dance form is exemplified by the coupled dance which
emerged in 15th century Europe in a variety of vigorous styles which
The theater combines all the other art forms. It makes use of dramatic literature
for script; architecture, sculpture, painting, and its mlatfiri arts fo^set design:
costumes & make-t^ask/facgpaifiting; and music for setting the mood of
the audience orjoclieigbteaipg-the-efflotionaf impact 61 a paTiiailar scene.
Cinema or Film
The projection of an object on the retina for a split second longer than its is
actually there, causing the images to blur into the illusion of motion.
Elements of Cinema . *
• Im age-the series of still photographs rapidly projected on screen.
• Time - has two types: 1) the actual duration of the films; 2) the diegetic
time or the time that is the result of the story or narrative.
• . Motion - the illusion of movement of the many still frames through a
projector. .
• Sound - refers to the aural element which could include the dialogue of the
. characters, sound effects, music scores, narrations, and voice over.
• - L ig h tin g th e manipulation of light and dark which helps achieve the
• effects being created.'
• Sequence - the continuity of events, using the visual language of film. It is
the interesting ordering and arranging of shots to tell a story.
• Composition - pertains to the use of visual elements and principles to
create a frame that is artistically interesting, engaging, and inconsistent
with the overall picture the film is creating.
The three main types are often used to categorize film genres; setting, mood
and format. The film’s location fe defined as the setting. The emotional charge
carried throughout the film is known as its (flood. The film may also have been
shot using particular equipment or be presented in a specific manner, or format.
The following are some examples of well-established genres in film. They are
often further defined to form subgenres, and can also be combined to form
hybrid genres. . •
According to Setting.
• Grime - places its -character within realm of .criminal activity, or within
organizations attempting to prevent said activity (or sometimes both).
• Fantasy - speculative fiction outside reality (i.e. myth, legend)
• Film noir - portrays its principal characters in a nihilistic and existentialist
realm or m^pner. .
• History - taking place in the past amidst notable historical circumstances.
• Music - about musicians, music and their instruments, not to be confused
with musicals.
• Prison - story is about life in prison, the guilty and the innocent
• Sci-Fi - defined by the effects of speculative (not yet existing) technology •
(i.e. future space travel, cyberpunk, time travel).
. • Sports - snorting events and locations pertaining to a given sport.
• War - battlefields and locations pertaining to a given sport.
• Western - wilderness on the verge of civilization, usually in the American
West.
According to Mood
• Action - generally involves a moral interplay between “good” and “bad”.
• Adventure - involving danger, risk, and/or chance, often with a degree of
fantasy.
• Comedy - intended to provoke laughter
• Drama - depends mostly on in-depth character development, interaction
and highly emotional themes.
• Horror - intended to provoke fear and/or revulsion in the audience
• Mystery - not understanding in full the plot of the movie until the end.............
• Romance - dwelling on the elements of romantic love. .
• Thriller - intended to provoke excitement and/or nervous tension'Tnto
audience. • ' -
* -Jfc-. nUi.. '" f ill iTTn P ' ' ■>' wHiii ^ --■
G e n e ra l E d u c acio n
a 'r « iiM j 't / t * i i i m i 'I'jw . . "n*.*.1. 11 ■■ i ',i '■ .11 ,r : r ■ ■ m w i m 1e a , ini-u... it 'ir iif f " " tA m 1■ s r —»
• •
According to Format
• Live A ction-the most common formats films
• Animation - the rapid display of a sequence of.2-D artwork or model
positions'in order to create an illusion of movement.
• Biography - also known as “biopic”, a format that telis the story of an
historic figure or an inspirational story about real people. This genre is
arguably the most controversial, because the majority of biopics show
fictionalized eyents.
• Documentary - a genre that portrays reality
• Musical - songs are sung by the characters andinterwoven into the
narrative._________ ______
D r. A n i t a M . N a v a r r o
General Education
PART II - A N A LYZIN G T E S T IT E M S
The correct answer is C - because the woodcut prints the protruding part white the
cfflers print the depressedparts.
D r. A n ita M . N av arro
■Social Science - iacro Jn c tio n to Hum an uses; A ppreciation 'at'the Arts
3. .When the pigment or color is applied on a surface, the resulting art work is a
a. photography c. tapestry
b. - mosaic ( 3 * ' Pa,nt'n9 • '
4. Curve lines can beflexible, graceful and joyous which curve line best suits the
' ^mentioned qualities?
— -£5?-concave c. spiral '
b. convex d. scroll
5. Colors can be cool or warm. What color dominates the cool colors?
- a. yellow' blue
b. green a red
6. The element of art that signifies the solidity of an object and enables us to
know its thickness, length and height is ~_____________.
a. form x . space
b. value G P volume
7. This principle of design that gives the parts a sense of belonging together is
known as
rhythm. c. balance ' r ■
harmony d. proportion
8. We like to see things having the right and proper relationship with each other.
-_____This principle referred to is _______ .
rhythm c. balance
(jo J ) proportion d. harmony
9. A type of construction which consists of a beam supported on only one end
is called —.
a. • post and bites cantilever ' *
b. truss d. arch •'
10. This construction enabled the development of tall skyscraper.
a. truss /jP 's te e l ca9e
b. cantilever d. arch •
PNU UET «3 v ie w e r W E
Socjal.Sciencc - Introduction to Humanities: Appreciation o f the Arts
D r. A n i t " M . N a v a r r o
General Education
P A R T III - E N H A N C IN G T E S T TA K IN G SKILLS
D r. A n ic a M . N av arro . •
7. Which of thes^ process in sculpture does not belong to the category
a. costing c. welding
'7W /carving d. modeling
3. m iis is an expression of the way of life of its creators
a. because it deoicts important.events in the life of a people
b. because it uses materials that were abundant at the time of Creation
------- c.— because it represents significant human experience and personalities
/S ty because of all of the above
9. '^ g rap h ic image that is a resulp^duplicating process is called
"a. photography ( jj/p r in t
b. image . d. copy
10. When we refer to a color value that is darker than the hue, we call that its
'" ^ a ? shade ' c. saturation
b. tint d. intensity
11. Orange are called ________________colors
a. monochromatic c. split
vrtP('analogous d. triad
2. when
12. whenwe demand that the things we use in our daily lives must be beautiful
we fulfill the________________function of art.
a. social c. personal
— ^ — 77— d- religious
T 3 '7 d f extreme long camera shot of a movie is often used as a
a. panorama shot
^^establish in g shot
c. dialogue shot
d. character shot
14. When we refer to the material out of which the art is mde of eve means its
. 15.* When we refer to the manner in which an art work is organized, we refer to '
its
a. subject c: medium
/ft? style d .. content
16M tie relative lightness arid darkness that gives impressioo of solidity and
illusion of depth.
a. hue c. intensity
b. chiaroscuro value
17. This type Of dance developed frW social or regional memories of older dance
motifs but are social and recreational in purpose
a. ritual dance c. socialdanee .........
b. art dance /c P folk dance
18. The visuals that we witness in a^freatrical performance is called v
plot c. property
f b J spectacle d. set ■
19>-Which among the following film genres does not belong to the group?
a. action' c. mystery
b. adventure F & Western
20^jjfais film belongs to a game thaiportrays reality. It is called a
| ajp documentary c. history
w l biography d. sports
(G e n e ra l E d u c a t i o n
Psychology
P repared by;
D r. T e rc sita T abfoada-R ungduin a n d Dr. P risciU B. D izon
j Competencies:
Goals of Psychology
The goals of psychology are to describe, explain, predict, and control behavior
and mental processes
4th and 5ft Century BC Psychology has itajDOts-in many disciplines, datinq
baek-to-the"views of'Aristotle, Socrates and Plato
who studied the nature of the mind, the soul, the
body, and human experience
17th Century Rene Descartes supported the nativlst view that
some ideas are innate
John Locke advocated the empiricist view that
knowledge is acquired through experiences and
.interactions with the world
1869 Sir Francis Galton studied individual differences
leading to the development- of intelligence tests
Historical accounts of psychology in the country indicate that the subject was
probably taught as early as the 17th century in two Philippine Universities, namely,
University of Santo Tomas and the University of San Carlos in Cebu •
. Perspectives in Psychology
The conceptual approaches define 'points of view and sets of assumptions that
influence both what psychologists will study and how to study it. Although each
perspective represents a different approach, psychologists borrow and blend
concepts from more than one of these perspectives.
..The- research process in psychology can be divided into two major categories
that usually occur in sequence; forming an idea (discovery) and then testing it
(justification). In the initial phase, observations, beliefs, information, and general
knowledge lead to a new ideas and theories. A theory is an organized set of
concepts that explains a phenomenon or set of phenomena. Hypothesis will be
derived from the theory and then will proceed to the second phase which rely on
the scientific method.
Heredity_and Behavior
......Researches in human behavior explore the link between the genes people
inherit and their behavior.
The most significant figure here is German physicist Gustav Fechner (1801 -
1887), He coined the term psychophysics and provided a set of procedures to relate
the intensity of a physical stimulus - measured to physical unite - to the magnitude
of the sensory experience - measured in psychological units.
LET Reviewer
G eneral Education
3. Constancy: keeping the appearance of the objects the same even if their image
in the eye are changing ____ _____ ___
Identification and recognition involve both Bottom-Up and Top Down Processes,
which work together to provide a coherent understanding of the world.
Bottom-up processing: Taking sensory data in from the environment and
sending ittofrie brain for extraction and analysis of relevant information
Top down processing: involves your past experiences, knowledge, and cultural
background in perceiving the world. Higher mental functioning influences how
you understand objects and events.
William James: one of the earliest psychologists who dealt with consciousness.
Consciousness andAttepiion-------------------
Selective attention: The cognitive mental process that toils the amount of
— “ -information aiiowed tnroconsciousness is known as selectiveattention.The process
of selective attention is illustrated in our everyday experiences in the classroom.
Sleep is not a single, continuous state. It's a complex combination of states. Actually,
several states of conscious awareness are a part of the sleep process. We pass
through the stages of the sleep cycle. The different levels of steep are defined on the
basis of electroencephalogram (EEG). It is a machine that measures electrical brain
activity. Each of the stages has specjfic characteristics. Sleep is made up of two
_distinctstaiesr|w jtorF^idTye“Movement (NREM) which contains four stages,
ranging from lght to deep sleep, and the Rapid Eye Movement (REM) sleep which
occurs periodically through the night.
Dream Theories
Sigmund Freud was the first modern theorists to consider seriously the.
psychology of dreaming. To the followers of Freud, dreams are the royal road to
the unconscious, They believe that dreams are derived from the unconscious
drives or wishes. These wishes or drives:are.usually repressed-dtirtng-tReBay; ~~
but during sleep, the repression is relaxed and unconscious.:wisties-are*{nefe—
likely to emerge into consciousness, thus manifest in our dreams.
Seeping and dreaming seem important to health, and extended periods of sleep
deprivation have been shown from researches to cause fatigue, inefficiency,
and irritability. • <
Sleep Disorders __ -
Normal patterns of sleep and waking can be disturbed for many reasons. The most
common sleep disorder is insomnia. Other sleep disorders include sleep walking,
sleep talking, narcolepsy, and steep apnea.
Insomnia
Insomnia is the long-tenp inability to obtain adequate sleep due to lengthy time
' to steep onset, frequent wakening during the night, and /or very early morning
wakening. People with insomniaare usually mildly depressed or anxious. During
the day/they tend to internalize their worries, concerns, and feelings rather than
expressing them outwardly. At night, as external distraction wane and attention '
. is directed inward, these concerns enter consciousness. This mental-aleitness
p iu T g T la v ie w e r j c g f l
Social Science - Psychology
blocks sleep, causes muscular tension and physiological arousal that leads to
an escalating pattern of fearing to go to bed because of expected, insomnia.
Sleep walking
Sleep walking occurs primarily during the deepest parts of noo-REM sleep.
Sleepwalkers rise from bed and carry on complicated activities, such as walking
from one room to another, even though they are sound asleep. This is common
in children before the age of puberty, but is not particularly unusual in adults.
Sleepwalking is not an abnormal behavior. It usually reappears in adults only
during periods of stress.
Learning Memory
F O T pW le T Reviewer
■T— liifcr'Aw..ISK
G e n e ra l E d u c a tio n
Cggnitive Learning .
Gestalt Psychology
Wolfgang Kohler, Max Wertheimer, Kurt Koffka studied on how organisms
perceive relationships among ideas and the effect those relationships have on
memory and learning. • -
Kurt Lewin developed the Field Theory or his concept of life space -
psychological environment that influence a person's learning.
Ausubels Meaningful L e a r n i n g . *•
Meaningful Learning wiiroccurwhen me m atMrtoT5eleamed are related
to what students already know. It will also be helpful if there is an advance
organizer that will give an overview of the new information before actual
learning is expected,
Information Processing
The human brain is compared to the computer--the ways in which sensory input
is processed in the working memory and later retrieved for new interpretation
and application. .
Motivation _
Motivation refers to an internal state or condition that activates behavior arid gives
it direction.
Functions of Motives
Motives have three important functions in behavior. First, they energize the
person. The motivated person is active and his activity is maintained at
relatively high levels until relevant goals or rewards are attained. Goal refers to
a substance, or object capable of satisfying'a need. Aroused motives will make
the individual more alert in general.
Theories of Motivation
Instinct Theory
People act the way they do because of their instincts. An instinct is an innate
or generally predetermined disposition to behave in a particular way when
confronted with certain stimuli.
Instinctual behavior follows an inborn plan that allows for substantial flexibility
in the course of development. For example, infants have the tendency to form
a strong emotional bond with their biological mother, but an infant can form a
bond with a substitute mother. Instinctual behavior, then, is viewed as innate
or pre-programmed but is subject to modification in the face of environmental
demands.
r ►
Drive Theory
Clark Hull (1943) believed that organisms are motivated to eliminate or reduce
bodily tension. Drive is the term used to define the state of tension that occurs
when a need is not met Hull believed that drives motivate organisms to reduce
tension. Organisms with high state of arousal are motivated to engage in the
process of drive reduction, a set of behaviors designed to reduce or eliminate
bodily tension.
Drive theory states that the potential level of any response is a joint function of
the response habit, strength, and the person’s level of drive. High drive facilitates
performance on'simple or pver-learned tasks but hampers performance on
complex or novel ones. .
P N u T s f R eview er f e & c !
Social Science - Psychology
• •
Arousal Theory .
Arousal theory, which arose partly as an alternative to drive theory, stipulates
that a moderate level of stimulation is reinforcing. An increase in the level of
tensions or excitement is referred to as arousal.
The theory proposes that moderate level of stimulation is the most pleasant and
that both higher and lower levels are relatively aversive.
Some contemporary examples of activities that suggest-a need to increase
arousal are roller rides, sky diving, and horror movies.
incentive Theory
External goals motivate organisms to perform certain actions. The external
stimuli in the environment that “pull" the organisms in certain directions are
called incentives.
The basic assumption of incentive theory is that if a desirable goal can be
anticipated following the completion of a particular action, the organism is
motivated to perform that action.
Classification of Motives
lif ^ e v ie w e r
G eneral Education
rest and sleep, protection frem heat and cold, avoidance of pain and so on.
Sexual motive is also considered to be a primary motive because the species
would not be able reproduce if the sexual motive is not satisfied. •
Psychological Motives
Psychological motives are needs in the sense that individual's happiness and
well-being depend on these motives. Though psychological needs are as
powerful as physiological needs, often they are less easily identified such as
needs for approval, affection, affiliation, achievement, power, prestige, and so on.
Emotions
Ptutchik (1984) identified eight basic emotions: fear, anger, joy, sadness, acceptance,
disgust, anticipation, and surprise. These emotipns.are-assoGiate4eftonneaeirwifFr"
each other. For example, the emotion of fear is tho ^hgujnr-pattocB—
of protection. Likewise, anger is related to the behavior pattern of destruction.
Motivation and emotion are closely related concepts for three reasons;.......-...........
1. The arousal of emotions activates behavior as motives do.
2. M o te are accompanied by emotions.
3. Emotions typically have motivational properties of their own.
Theories of Emotions
James-Lange Theory
William James believed that the emotional stimulus is routed (by the sensory
‘ relay center known as the thalamus) direcfly to the hypothalamus, which
produces the bodily reaction (fear or other emotion). Tiie sensations from this ,
bdcJity reaction are then sent tack to the cortex which produces what we feel is—
the conscious experience of emotion. According to James,we cry because w e ..
feel sorry, strike because we are angry, tremble because we are afraid..
Cannon-Bard Theory
Walter Cannon did not just criticize the James-Lange theory. He proposed •
an alternative theory of his own. The theory states that conscious, emotional
' experiences and physiological reaction and behavior are relatively independent
events. The theory was later revised by Philip Bard aid is known as the Cannon-
Bard theory of emotion.
Cognitive Theory
The more'contemporary theory of emotion-views the cognitive interpretation
of emotional, stimuli or events in the outside world and. stimuli within the body
as the key elements in emotion. According to this theory, there are two steps
1— ITTffle process of cognitive interpretation in emotions: (1) the interpretation of
' stimuli from the environment and (2) the interpretation of stimuli from the body
resulting from autonomic arousal.
Principles of Emotion
1. Emotional needs express themselves one way or another.
2. Anger is an expression of need.
3.Our feelings and needs are not wrong or bad.
4.Emotions are the gateway to vitality and feeling alive.
5.We can address emotional issues and still save our true face.
6.Immediate reactions to problem often disguise deeper feelings.
a. Running away. A frequent response to. intense feeltffgs is to remove
ourselves from the situation by avoiding others, not talking to them,
acting like they are not there, and pretending the event never occurred.
— b: Getting angry. Anger, although it appears direct, is one of the strongest
avoidance function we have because it keeps us away from our deeper
emotions. Anger frequently masks feelings of being haunted.
c. Denying importance. When we are hurt, we may attempt to diminish
our strong feelings by rationalizing.
d. Addressing the situation. Identifying real feelings and then addressing
‘ the situation is the best, but possibly the most difficult way to respond.
Solutions based on surface reactions never satisfy os because they do
not respond to the heart of our concern. True satisfaction comes when
we identify, accept, and respond to our deeper needs. . .
7. We must clarify individual needs before solving problem with others.
. 8.- We need to express positive feelings and communicate negative ones'.
Mental Processes ‘ •
From the above definitions, we can deduce that mental processes can be categorized
Into forming concepts, solving problems, and making judgments or plans or what
they call metacognition.
Mental Processes
Major Decisions Thinking Processes Thinking Skills
.O f Thinking Involved in each Dimension
I. Concept critical thinking/analysis i . seeing relationship
Formation logical reasoning -....— -
b. deduction
G eneral E ducation
Critical Thinking
- • Critical thinking has been defined as “principled thinking" (Siegel, 1980)
ffinvolves the correct assessing of statements using analysis and logic. It
serves as the foundation for evaluation and decision-making. It is therefore a
. nScessaryskill to develop. Ennis*(1962) suggested the following twefoe aspects ■
o critical thinking:
1. Grasping the meaning of a statement
2. Judging whether there is ambiguity in a line of reasoning
3. ■Judging whether certain statements contradict each other
4. Judging whether a conclusion follows necessarily
5. Judging whether a statement is specific enough
6. Judging whether a statement is actually the application of a certain principle
7. Judging whether an observation statement is reliable
8. Judging whether an inductive conclusion is warranted
9. Judging whether something is an assumption
10. Judging whether a definition is adequate
— rrdodglng whether a statement by an alleged authority is acceptable
One wouldobserve that knowledge stored in the long-term memory has influence
on the quality of information perceived, encoded, stored, and transformed. The.
more information a person has, the more accurate his transformation will be.^
Problem-Solving
Problem solving is the cognitive process through which information/concepts
. are used to reach a goal that is sometimes blocked by some kind of obstacle
^ (Sdorow, 1980). It is synonymous to synthesis (Bloom, 1956), which is putting
• together the elements and parts so as to form a new whole. Guilford refers to
___ jL5S4JroAictw^thiRl<ingrltis1hg "production of new information from a given
informationTEdward’de Bono (1979) calls it generative thinking.
Creative Thinking
Problem-solving challenges one’s creative thinking. The quality of the solution
to a problem is an outcome of one’s creative thinking.
Torrance (1974), an authority on creativity, defines creativity as “a process
of becoming sensitive to problems, deficiencies, gaps in knowledge, missing
elements, disharmonies, searching for solutionsrmaking guesses, or formulating
a hypothesis about deficiencies, testing and retesting this hypothesis - possibly
modifying and retesting them - and finally communicating the result.”
1. Saturation v
2. Deliberation
3. Incubation
4. Illumination
P N jJ LET R e v i e w e r
G eneral Education
Intelligence -
-• -A
Nickersen, Perkins, and Smith (1985) in Solso, 1988 have compiled a list of abilities
with they befieve represent human intelligence that would be required of a computer
to act “Humanly * intelligent:
The ability to classify patterns. All humans with normal intelligence seem able
to assign.non-identical stimuli to classes.
Tlx ability to reason inductively and generalize. Todiscover rules and principles
from specific circumstances makes an intelligent person go beyond the
information given. ■
David Wechsler
Oavid Wechsler (1958, cited in Sdorow. 1990) believed that intelligence is
the capacity to understand the world and the resourcefulness to cope with
the challenges. He further suggested that it may include the capacity to act
purposefully, to think rationally, and to deal effectively with the environment
(Wechsler, 1975), He constructed an intelligence test with subscales
measuring those abilities. He developed versions of his test for use with
According to Gardner, the extent to which a person will succeed in life depends
on, the extent to which he develops the kind of intelligence that are needed
in one's culture. For example, for most people especially in the urban areas,
success depends more orf linguistic intelligence than in any other. One has to
learn to process information in print, or otherwise organize and use them to
act communicate effectively. One who liye in another culture, like in a fishing
or farming village, will have to depend on their spatial and bodily-kinesthetic
intelligence to live productively. Somewhere in the readings of the author, she
encountered an additional intelligence which is the naturalistic intelligence.
People who are very keen observers of tlie elements of nature so that they
can predict what is to happen from their observations are examples of this
type. Another’ book cited moral intelligence an ability to decide on which is
more appropriate behavior as another kind of intelligence. Perhaps as long
as there are psychologists trying to understand human^behavior, there wilt be
additional human capabilities that will be studied and haroessed to improve
'. human society.
D r . T e r e s i ta T a b b a d i i - R n r s d u i n a n d D r . P r is c i h i B- D i z o n *
G e n e ra l E d u c a tio n
EmotionaUntelligence
Recently, Goteman (1994) revived the notion of emotional intelligence. It
refers to the. ability to use one's emotions, as conceptualized by Saiovey,
in order to succeed. Actually, it can be’synonymous to Thorndike's earlier
formulation flf-sociai-intellioence. It involves being aware of one’s feelings and
mood, managing one's mood..motivating oneself, and being able to maintain
— — rnterpSfsonai^ relationships. Researches are being conducted to harness
emotional intelligence for one's success.
■Human Relations
Interaction with others add meaning to one’s life. Living is worthwhile as long as
we learn to live life for what it is. What is life for? It depends on one's experiences
and thoughts. But to live life meaningfully is to be able to say that one has done
something for himself and for others. In Erickson's psychosocial stages of life, one
who is in his retirement age should be able to look back and claim he contributed
to the betterment of another's life. r
You can observe how these two. kinds of personal orientations differ as to
attitudes towards others and their work. While one who has high self-concept
usually volunteers to do something, the one with low self-concept will shun
responsibility because of lack of a sense that he can do it. It is self-efficacy in
the language of Social Learning Theory. Thus, one who has low self-concept
is usually shy acid withdrawn while the other is open to experience and is
outgoing.
The feedback one gets from peers, significant others Or even new
acquaintances continue to form the self-concept of an ^adolescent. The
comments she receives define her identity which influences her reactions to ■
other events. It (feedback) is also the basis for future plans and goals in life.
Attribution Theory
Another belief that affects one’s interpersonal behavior is attribution. It
refers to the perception of the cause of a person's behavior. If a person
attributes the outcomes of his action to his personal efforts, characteristics
or attitudes, he has internal orientation. How do you think will this affect
his attitude? How about when one sees that-others, luck or circumstances
beyond his control, are responsible for his outcomes? How will he behave
in future projects? Having external orientation usually draws little or no
effort in doing something better. People who have internal attribution are
perceived to be more self-reliant, more persistent, and more .persevering.
I hey" are more likely to succeed specially in academic situations. Perhaps
—tt-ean also improve-our interpersonal relations. When we risk something in
somebody whom we like to be our friend,-a friendship might develop. Taking
responsibility for the direction and qualify of the relationship will result in‘a
more active and responsive interpersonal relations. Heider suggests: "The
greater the personal force contributing to the production of an outcome, the
greater the actors’ responsibility for the occurrence of that effect."
ESEIPNU LET-Reviewer
Genera! Education
We judge situations and other people on the basis of our own perceptions,
expectations, experience, motives, and feelings. We fail to consider the
other person’s concerns and mptives. It will help if we find out first the other
person’s thoughts and feelings. We will achieve better relationship if we
check our perception and our communication. Take care not to be biased or
too emotional. Being considerate of the other person’s thoughts and feeling
can make a difference in our expressions.
using ourselves (Rogers, 1995). it Is also the most potent factor in bringing
about changing and learning. Listening to feelings and reflecting them are
important aspects of empathic understanding, “It is an experiencing of the
consciousness1behind ‘ another^ outward communication, but continuous
The recipient feels valued, cared for, and accepted as the person he is which
later facilitates to listening more to himself and understanding himself better.
By letting the other person know “where you are" emotionally, being able to
communicate clearly or what we term congruence is the basis for building a
relationship. The three of them-congruence, empathy, positive regard-provide
illumination and healing, our precious gifts to the other person.
How does it feel to help others do a taskofjust lift their hopes or spirits!___
How does it feel when someone says I was motivated, by your concern for
me?
There are many things that we do for ourselves and for self-respect. We
change our lives and others' lives too, because we believe we can or we have
to. The sense of confidence in our capacity to do something is self-efficacy.
Self-resRect is the feeling we develop from trying to give our best to what we
think we can and ought to do. These two components make up self-esteem.
What is Communication?
Types of Communication
Nonverbal Communication
While we do transmit a great deal of information to others through words, we
also communicate with them non-verbally through an unspoken languages
of gazes, expressions, and body movements. The distance we kept from the
other person or the way we use physical space gives non-verbal cues. The
manner and style of personal grooming are also channels for non-verbal
communication.
ig f~ W f8 w a r'
General Education
or the caregivers who would not want their client to feel embrrassed. One !
who would want to read a person through his facial expression can detect;
concealment by the timing of: ' [
I
Gazes and Stares: the Language of the Eyes _ <
The eyes are the windows of the soul. They transmit eloquently a great deal [
of our thoughts and feelings. Have you seen a smile that seems to be iacking :
in genuineness because the look in the eyes of the person seems to say he j
is not really happy? j
CanyoO"tell the difference between the casual look and the look full of love?
Have you been alarmed by the stare of another person?
• 'V
Body Language: Gestures, Movement, and Postures
Another interesting mode of communication is the use of body language.
Gestures, movements, and postures convey as many messages as there are
symbols one can think of and can be understood in return. What does a
thumbs up sign mean? When one cannot sit still or when he paces a room
back and forth, how does he feel? How do you sit when you are alert and want
to participate in a discussion? What does a person who looks at his watch
want to say or unconsciously feel? What would you think of people who are
weil mannered, polite,-and respectful?- •
Physical-Appearance
— Itfy fa m s rw d to narrate hirexpwiErrce-atiout grooming, He was bidding
— for the- construction of-tew -door-apaflment-lauilding. He came en a friend’s
invitation. There were three o? them who. met the owner. He won the bidding
not on the basis of the lowest bid but on the basis his good grooming. He
learned 'he was trusted the project because the owner thought he must be
responsible because he'cared for his appearance. He showed concern not ;
only for himself but for other who he was going to inte/act with.
As you might imagioe, people really care about appearance. There are^nany
good things about being properly groomed.
Psychological Disorders
There are many ways we can influence our psychological well being. By trying
to analyze our actions and feelings we can enhance our capacity to remain
psychologically healthy.
PMU LET ( r e v i e w e r
General Education
3. Karmi was able to achieve her goal of a college degree despite her family's
financial difficulties. She supported herself by taking student - friendly
work schedules. Her determination to change her future succeeded. Which
statement describes her personality development?
A. Personality is a product of heredity.
B. Personality is shaped by one’s environment. .
— &—PefswalftyHs-shaped by the person's decision.
D. Personality is a product of the reactions of people in one’s environment.
The, cortect answer is C. The rest of the answers are half true. Karmi is mature enough to
be productive and to make decisions and her decisions shape her personality.'
G e n c r a i E d a c a c io n
C. Ivan Pavlov
0. James B. Watson
12. Psychology not only seeks to scientifically study behavior and mentaV-
processes, but also attempts to
A. Understand why people do the things they do.
— B. Provide continuity between scientific disciplines.
C. Combine sociological and psychiatric constructs.
■ 'fib Apply that knowledge to the service of human welfare.
13.Tuihough psychologists study many different topics and use many kinds of
methods, there is unity within the field since most psychologists
A. Work in more that one subfield. .
'f it y Emphasize empirical research.
Publish articles on their research.
D. Engage in speculative.research. ' •
14. These psychologists believed that perception depends on the patterns formed
by the stimuli and on the organization of experience.
Behavioral
iB . /Gestalt .
^ Humanistic • -
D'. Psychoanalytic
15. He established the first psychological laboratory in Germany in 1879. His
interests were on the senses, especially vision.
A. Charles Darwin
B. Ivan Pavlov .............. ........
vQ. Kurt Koffka ..... — ----------------------------;------ :-----------
Wilhelm Wundt
16SWhfch would be a logical sequence for solving a problem? . ■*
1.. Making Conclusion
2. Defining the problem
3. Gathering relevant information
4. Generating Hypothesis
5. Testing the Hypothesis
A. 1 2 3 4 5 -^.12354
B. 2 3 4 1 5 | D. 2 3 4 5 1
'17- This perspective understands oenaviorin.terms of unconscious processes.
A. Behavioral
ijL Cognitive • .
(c\/ Psychoanalytic------ ----------- --------------- ;------------------:---------------------
Subjective ■ ■ -______________ •____________ _
18. All behavior is a result of conditioning and the environment shapes behavior
by reinforcing specific habits according to:
A. Structuralism' /^C 7 Behaviorism
B. Functionalism ■ * ■ l). ^Humanism
19. This is the subfield of psychology which conducts research in teaching and
learning to influence development of more effective ways in facilitating learning.
A. Experimental Psychology .
^-Developmental Psychology
/u yrd u ca tio n a l Psychology
M l Organizational Psychology
20. Which process is involved in integration and meaningful interpretation of
^-information received by the stimuli?
Perception
B. Sensation
C. Elaboration
D. Generalization .
21. The most common sleep disorder characterized by long term inability to
jebtain adequate sleep due to late onset of sleep or frequent wakening is
(3/insom nia
B. Sleep Apnea
C. Sleepwalking
D. Nightmare
22. This is a kind of talking to oneself which helps the individual to know what
to do, what tools to use, what consequence will be acceptable. What kind of
thinking is this? ' .
/"A ? Metacognitive
'-'■B. Analytical Thinking
C. Logical reasoning
- D. Creative Thinking -
23. What kind of thinking do we engage in when we Categorize or organize into
tegories, or analyze materials by establishing relationships or patterns in them?
y Critical Thinking
B. Creative Thinking
C. Generative Thinking
D. Reflective Thinking
C. characterization
D. critical thinking
3. Which learning recognizes that organisms have the ability to represent
aspects of the world mentally and then operate these mental representations
rather than on the world itself? — :— -
A. Behavioral...............~ ..................." '7
R social learning
cognitive
humanistic
4. By adolescence one must develop a sense of self-worth in major areas of life.
Which of the following is not self-enhancing? . ■
A, Engaging and exploririg experiences
Being over dependent on significant adults .
3 Joining peer group activities
D. Cooperating and striving witfi schoolwork
Social Science - Psvchoiogy
5. Pia noticed that her new friends are fond of computer games and spend
most of their time in the computer shop. They have little time for school
assignments and are sometimes reprimanded. What should Pia do?
Engage in computer games to be with her new friends
Encourage friends to balance studies and leisure
Stop playing computer games
D. Stay away from her new friends
6. Which of the following areas of identity development needs to be resolved
/ fifet? ____________
fA!) gender------ ------------- —— - — -
'B / career direction
C. social affiliation v
D. ideological view
7. Which is a good way to interact with person we have conflict with?
A. Avoid encounters with them
/ jjv Ignore or deny their presence
' f c ] Negotiate your ideas and feelings with, them
N / Talk negatively about them
8. Filipinos are admired for their capacity for smooth interpersonal relations.
Which Filipino value should be controlled so it will be positive for the individual
and for others? _ ____
A. pagbibigay-galang •
B. mabutingpagtanggap
..-^ / i -PwyanllMn ______ _________________
j- pakikisama ■ ' .
9 \_ X person with a healthy sense of selRisteefti.'self confidence, and self
- respect is not likely to
• A. Establish healthy social relationship.
Stay away from others. . •
Work well with others.
D. Share little to others. . ' •
^ F i M PWlI LET B a t f is w e r • !
10. A group of students were watching the cheering competition, during the
conversation after the demonstration each of the group of friends pointed out
a different aspect of what they saw. What explains this?
active perception
selective attention
divided consciousness
D. subconscious process
11. Chemicals produced in the brain that make communication between nerve
■jails possible are called
VIV. neurotransmitters
MB. hormones
C. neurobiology
D. electro chemicals'* .
12. It is the brain’s stress center, responsible for activating tbe inner core of the
adrenal glands to release the hormones which help the body to adjust to
emergency situations.
L cortex
m 3 / hypothalamus
M i. cerebrum
0. medulla
13, What is the label for all the strategies used to organizeinformation in ord
---------- - .— " ti easily?
C. keyword ----------
D. loci . . . .....................
14. Sternberg believes that individuals-can be more successful if they are given
training in improving their capacities for componentiai, experiential, and
contextual intelligence: How is this theory known?
4jener.il Education
D r . T e r e s i ta T a b b a d a - R a n g d u i n a n d D r . P r is c i la B, D i-co n
S o c ia i S c ie n c e - P s y c h o lo g y
19. Aside frpm setting goals, planning action, and acting on your goal, what else
will ensure achievements of goals? These are so easy to say but will require
a lot o f_______ _ to achieve.
A planning _______ ;_______ -
((B^ goal setting . ----------------------------- - ' •
acting ' ......... _ , -----------------— '
D. discipline
20. What needs are satisfied 'Mien a person feels he belongs to a group, trusted
he can contribute, and that his effort are recognized?-......-
_ A, physiological
\ J y psychological
C. self actualization
0. self regulation
21. What would be possible if an acquaintance tells you that you look like
someone who had a significant role in her past?
A. Be happy of the association
Be wary of transference
M r Be confident of your appearance
0. Be anxious to please
22. Thisischaracterizedbylongstandingpatternso^nraiadaetryeJaetiaviocthatcoRstitute-
immature and inappropriate ways of coping with otherrand'solving problems.
A. anxiety disorder
mind disorder
[ d j personality disorder
v. Schizpphrinia
23. Which is the least helpful way of coping with negative emotions?
Engage in physical exercise
Push the emotion out of conscious awareness
"C. Seek emotional support from others
D. Talk about/Analyze Negative emotions.
( N i l LET R e V ie w e r
Introduction
'Dr. Wlice D . D to q u in o
Com petencies:
H ISTO R Y O F COMPUTING
"Who invented the computer?" is not a question with a simple answer. The real
answer is that many inventors contributed to the history of computers and that a
computer is a complex piece of machinery made up of many parts, eacfcof which
can be considered a'separate invention.
Historical records show that man has invented three age group of devices to assist
him in calculating and processing data.. These devices are classified as: 1) manual-
mechanical device 2) electromechanical and 3) electronic
m i S m i LET R eview er
— —~ -T-—fUB- T>vaf iTftitTOMt
G e n e r a l E d u c a tio n
> Electronic Devices - are devices which use electrical switches and circuitry.
• Atanasoff-Berry Computer - invented by John Atanasoff in 1942 and
was the first digital computer that used binary logic circuitry and had
regenerative memory.
• Electronic Numerical Integrator'and CalculaWlENlAC) - was invented
*
• Electronic Discrete Variable Automatic Computer (EDVAC) - was invented,
by John Von Neumann in 1945. This was designed as a stered-program
computer. •
G E N E R A T IO N S o f c o m p u t e r s _____ _— ---------------
Dr. Alice 0 . O i o q a m o
computers to become smaller faster,'cheaper, more energy-efficient and more .
reliable than their first-generation predecessors' Though, the transistor still •
■ generated a great deal of heat that subjected the computer to damage, it was
a vast'improvement over the vacuum tube. Second-generation computers still
relied on punched cards for input and printouts for output.
The first computers of this generation were developed for the atomic energy
industry.
Instead of punched cards and printouts, users interacted with third generation
computers through keyboards and monitors and interfaced with an operating
system, which allowed the device to run many different applications at one
time with a central program that monitored the memory. Computers for the first
time became accessible to a mass audience because they were smaller and
cheaper than their predecessors.
In 1981 IBM introduced its first computer for the tome user, and in 1984
Apple introduced the Macintosh. Microprocessors also moved out of the realm
of desktop computers and into many areas of life as more and more everyday
products began to use microprocessors.
As th«se small computers became more powerful, they could be linked together
to form networks, which eventually led to the development of the Internet.
Fourth generation computers also saw the development of GUIs, the mouse
and handheld devices.
CLASSIFICATIONS OF COMPUTERS
* Computers are available in different shapes, sizes and weights, due to these
different shapes and sizes tbeytwrform different sorts of jobs from one another.
G eneral Education
• They can also‘be classified in different ways. All the computers are designed
by the qualified computer architectures that design these machines as their
requirements.
• A computer that is used in a home differs in size and shape from the computer
being used in a hospital. Computers act as a server in large buildings, while
the computer also differs in size and shape performing its job as a weather
. forecaster.
Mainframes ;
•• Another giant in computers after the super computer is the Mainframe, !
which can also process millions of instruction per second and capable of ;
accessing billions of data.
• This computer is commonly used in big hospitals, air line reservations '
companies, anOiranyother huge companies prefer mainframe because of
~ ~its~capatiility-Qf-retrieving data oh a huge basis.f
• This is normally to expensive and out of peach from a salary-based person!
whp wants a computer for his home. ' .
■ Minicomputer
• ^ This computer is next in the line but offers less than mainframe in work and
' performance: These are the computers, which are mostly preferred by the
small type of business personals, colleges, etc;
Laptops/Notebooks/Netbooks
• Having a small size and low weight the notebook/netbook is easy to carry
, to anywhere. A student can takeit with him/her to his/her school in his/her
bag with his/her bopk.
• Jhis is easy to carry around and preferred by students and business people
to meet their assignments and other necessary tasks._______ _ _ _ ____
• The approach of this computer is also the same as the Personal computer
It can store the same amount of data and having a memory of the same
size as that of a personal computer. One can say that it is the replacement
of personal desktop computer.
One of these more popular wireless and handheld clevices are the tablet PCs
which- dominated the market in 2011. Tablets of different brands, kinds and
sizes were launched following the first series of the iPad sold in the market
early in 2011. Tablet PCs are known as wireless, portable personal computers
with a touchscreen interface. The tablet form factor is typically smaller than
a notebook computer but larger than a smartphone. This form of device was
initially developed to replace the bulky and heavy laptops and immobile desktop
computers. Tablets offered mobility and faster connectivity in a single touch of a
finger.
Mobile Phones
On the other hand, mobile phones which have considerably larger screens that
also functions as a personal computer gained popularity in theTecent years. A
number of mobile phone brands developed their own smartphones that are said
to be at par or a better choice over a tablet PC. Smartphones have functions
-and features similar to a tablet PC, only integrated in a mobile phone.
The computer is a system which consists of the hardware, software and the
peopleware. Without each one the computer cannot function at air The term,
"computer hardware" refers to all the parts of the computer that you can touch.
’ Computer software" generally refers to those computer related things that you
can't touch.
HARDWARE COMPONENTS
The hardware components are further categorized as input and output devices.
An input device is any peripheral (piece of computer hardware equipment)
' used to provide data and control signals to an information processing system
(such as a computer). Input and output devices make up the hardware interface ‘
between a computer as a scanner or 6D0F controller.
Pointing, devices, which are input devices used to specify a position in space,
can further be classified according to:
• .Whether the input is direct or indirect. With direct input, the input space
coincides with the display space, i.e. pointing is done in the space where
visual feedback or the cursor appears. Touchscreens and light pens involve
direct input. Examples involving indirect input include the mouse and
. trackball. ........... " ' .. .... .
» Whether the positional information, is absolute (e.g. on a touch screen) o r.
relative (e g. with a mouse that can be lifted and repositioned)______
• A pointing device is any human interf&e device that allows a user to input
. spatial data to a computer. In the case of mice and touch screens, this is
usually achieved by detecting movement across a physical surface. Analog
devices, such as 30 mice, joysticks, or pointing sticks, function by reporting
their angle of deflection Movements of the pQinting. device are echoed on the
screen by movements of the cursor, creating a simple, intuitive way to navigate
a computer's GUI. Other pointing devices are:
• Trackball operates with a rotating metal ball inset in a small boxlike device
and does not require a desktop
• Touchpad a pressure sensitive pad that is smaller, more accurate, thinner
and is less expensive to build than a trackball
• Trackpad a small, touch- sensitive pad, usually a couple of inches square
v which acts as an alternative to a mouse on^ome notebook/palmtop
computers. It works by sensing fingertip pressure
• Joystick a manual control consisting of a vertical handle that can move
freely in two directions; used as an input device to computers or to devices
controlled by computers. •
• Touch Screen a type of display screen that has a touch-sensitive transparent
panel covering the screen. Instead of using a pointing device, .you can use
your finger to point directly to objects on the screen. This is used nowadays
in tablet pcs. television sets and even cell phones.
• Light Pen utilizes a light-sensitive detector to select objects on a display
screen
•--- Stylus a pointing device shaped like a pen. You use this with a digitizing
-------—tablet or touch screen.
Output Devices
An output device displays information on a screen, .creates printed copies or
generates sounds A monitor, printer and speakers are examples of output
devices.
D r. A lice D. D io q u in o
Ln£r..;'.ia‘:iiOi. co O>oipucers
Input/Output Devices
These are pieces of hardware that is used for both providing information and
receiving information.
• disk Drive reads and writes information on it
• Hard Disk Drive a rigid magnetic disk mounted permanently in a drive unit
• Optical Disk a direct - access<iisk which has recorded informationon it with
a laser beam that bums pits into its surface.
• Modem modulates the computer output to an acceptable signal for
transmission and then demodulates the signal back for computer input
Speakers
• Used to output sound.
Central Processing Unit (CPU) - is the central electronic chip that determines
the processing measured10hertz (one cycle
per second), it has three basic parts:
• The Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) -does all the arithmetical and logical
operations df the computer
« The Control Unit - directs the flow of information into the CPU and or/
memory or storage and controls the instructions the CPU wili do next.
• Registers - used to store data and instructions inside the processor.
Memory - consists of silicon chips, usually uses either VLS or VLSI technology
to create the chips. There are two forms of memory:
• Read Only Memory (ROM) - stores information which is used by the CPU.
o it can also hold programs that are directly accessed by the CPU,
o The instructions cannot beerasednor altered,
o These instructions are built into the. electronic circuits of the chips and
^ ■called firmware. ________
o The instructions in the ROM are nonvolatile. They stay'there even
wlien the computer is Wrt§3T5ff:~’ — ~----------------
o Access to information is either random or sequential access:
• Randonraccess means that any piece of information in the ROM
can lie accessed at any given time without accessing other
informati&n first.
G enera! E ducation
Communication Devices
’ For communication to take place between two people from widely different
countries or cultures, an electronic or human translator is required to act as-an
interface between them. Similarly for a computer to communicate with another
completely different system, this will also require an interface of some kind.
An interface Is usually provided by a card which contains ports for .input and
output devices, plus processing and memory microchips. In effect it translates
one form of communication from an external input device into that which can
be understood by the computer and then, if necessary, into another that can
be sent to any special output device, oranoBier computer. An interface card
may be inserted in one of the slots provided inside the computer or it may
be external with its own power supply and plugged into the computer's serial
communication port.
Types of Software .
System software
System software helps run the computer hardware and computer system. It
includes:
• device drivers
• operating systems
• servers
• utilities
• windowing systems,
Programming software
Programming software usually provides tools to assist a programmer in writing
computer programs, and software using different programming languages in a
more convenient way. The tools include:
• compilers
—... • debuggers- ...
• interpreters
-* linkers
------ •— texfedttore------------------- ::
Application software
Application software allows end users to accomplish one or more specific (not
directly computer development related) tasks. Typical applications include:
• industrial automation
• business software
• computer games
• telecommunications, (ie the internet and everything that flows on it)
• databases
• educational software
• medical software
public domain software are programs that are uncopyrighted because their
authors intended to share them with everyone else are in the public domain.
Programs in the public domain can be used without restriction as components
of other programs. Wlten reusing such code, it is good to understand its history
so that you can be sure it. really is in the public domain'
•A I
Commercial software requires payment before it can be used, but includes all
the programs features, with no restrictions or time limits. Commercial software
programs typically come In a physical box. which is what you see displayed in
retail stores. While it's trye that the software boxes are not-as big as they used
to be, they still contain the software CD or DVD and usually a "getting started".
— manoaTaiong with a registration key used for registering the product. Most
rnmmaic ioi .p.nftw wfff mnramt; ask that the user to register the program so the
company-can keep track of its authorized users. Some commercial software
programs, such as newer versions of Microsoft and Adobe programs, require
the user to register the programs in order to continue using them after 30
days. While most commercial software programs are sold in the physical box,
many software titles are now available as downloads. These downloads are
typically made available from-the company's website. The user pays for the
program directly on the website and instead of receiving the software in the
mail, the user downloads it to his computer. Another popular-way of purchasing
commercial software online is simply paying for a registration key, which
unlocks the features of a shareware program. This upgrades the shareware
program to the commercial version, which removes any feature limitations fsem
the shareware version.
- A computer security risk is any action that could cause lost-of information,
software, data, processing incompatibilities, or cause damage to computer
hardware, a lot of these are planned to do damage. 'An intentionaLlaeact-ifl-—
computer security is known as a co m p iM T jffi^h ich is slightly different
from a cybercrime. A cybercrime is knownasillegaftictrbasecron the Internet. 7
There are several distinct categories for people that cause cybercrimes, and
they are referred as hacker, cracker, cyberterrorist, cyberbully, cyberextortionist,.....
unethical employee, script kiddie and corporate spy......
' The term hacker was actually known as a good word but now it has a very
negative view. A hacker is defined as. someone who accesses a computer or •
computer network unlawfully. They often claim that they do this to find leaks
in the security of a network. The term cracker has never been associated
with something positive this refers to someone who intentionally accesses a
computer or computer network for evil reasons. They access, with the intent
of destroying, or stealing information. Both crackers and hackers are very
advanced with network skills.
The typical network attacks that puts computers at risk includes viruses,
worms, spoofing, Trojan horses, and denial of service attacks. Every
------ unprotected computer is’vulnerable to a computer virus which is a potentially
Harming computer program that infects a computer negatively and altering
the way the computer operates without the user's consent. Once the virus is
in the computer it can spread throughout infecting other files andpotentially
damaging the operating system itself. It’s similar to a bacteria virus that infects
humans because it gets into the body through small openings and can spread
to other parts of the body and can cause some damage. The similarity is, the
best way to avoid is preparation.
A computer worm is a program that repeatedly copies itself and is very similar
to a computer virus. However the difference is that a virus needs to attach itself
to an executable file and become a part of it. A computer worm doesn’t need
to do that. It sends copies to itself and to other networks and eats up a lot of
bandwidth. A Trojan Horse named after the famous Greek myth and is used
to describe a program that secretly hides and actually looks like a legitimate
------- progranrbut is a fake. A certain action usually triggers the Trojan horse, and
____ iM ie m is e s and worms they don’t replicate itself. Computer viruses, worms,
and Trojan horses are all classified as malicious-logic programs which are just
programs that deliberately harm a computer. You know when a computer is
infected by a virus, worm, or Trojan horse if one or more of these acts happen:
LET R eview er
G e n e ra ) E d u c a tio n '
j l ---------------- ■
Computer viruses, worms, and Trojan horses deliver their payload or instructions
through common ways. _______ -___ —
• when an individual runs an infected program so if you download a lot
of things you should always scan the files before executing, especially
executable files.
• when an individual runs an infected program.
• when an individual boots a computer with an infected drive
• when it connects an unprotected computer to a network.
• when one opens an unsecured email attachment.
Intellectual Property
• Intellectual property refers to creations of the mind: inventions, literary and
artistic works, and symbols, names, images, and designsjjsed in commerce.
• Intellectual property is divided into two categories: Industrial property, which
includes inventions (patents), trademarks, industrial designs, and geographic
indications of source; and Copyright, which includes literary and artistic
works such as novels, poems and plays, films, musical works, artistic works
Computer Ethics • . _ .
Ethics is a set of moral principles that govern the behavior of & group or
individual. Therefore, computer ethics is set of moral principles that regulate the
use of computers. Some common issues of computer ethics include intellectual
property rights (such as copyrighted electronic content), privacy concerns, and
and multilayered. Teachers can tieip society by practicing e'thical computer use,
avoidingToffware piracy, and providing direct instruction on ethical computing
practices.
INTERNET
The Internet, sometimes called simply "the Net,” is a worldwide system of computer'
networks - a network of networks in which users at any one computer can, if they
have permission, get information.from any other computer (and sometimes talk
directly to users at other computers).
A Web browser, is a software application used to locate and display Web pages."
The two most popular browsers are Microsoft Internet Explorer and Firefox. Both of
these are a graphical browser, which means that they can display graphics as well
as text. In addition, most modern browsers can present multimedia information,
including Sound and video, though they require plug-ins for some formats.
Directories - like yaboo, uses human editors to place the site into a hierarchy or
outline of topics so that users can find it by selecting the appropriate category.
' The first part of the address is called a protocol identifier and it indicates what
protocol to use and the second part is called a resource name and it specifies
the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. The protocol
identifier and the resource name are separated by a colon and two forward
slashes.
Laptops
I
Phones
Cloud Computing .
fje n e ra i E d u c a tio n •
Cloud Computing _ r
Google Apps is a cloud-based productivity suite that helps you and your team
connect and get work done from anywhere on any device. It's simple to setup, use
and manage, allowing you to work smarter and focus on what really matters.
World Wide Web (www) - refers to al? the publicly accessible web sites in
the world, in addition to other information sources that web browsers can
access. These other sources include FTPsites, USENET-newsgroups and a few
surviving Gopher sites.
What is a network? .
Disadvantages:
• Violation of Privacy
• Irrptct on the labor Force
• Health Risks
• Impact on the Environment ' '
PS I^ L e7 Re v ie w e r
General Education
■v *
'•«:,VW£*-y-'V‘
Direction: Read eacn item carefully then choose the letter of the best of-the
answer. ------- —----------—
D r. Alice D. p:oqt>Mi>>
f ! r ; \ > J a c T .o n C ^n i p p e r s
• *
5. What movie die Apple use to'hype its new Quick Time4 format, sparking a
net-clogging 25 million downloads of the trailer?
A. Star Wars Eoiscde i: Tne Phantom Menace
6. Superman -
C, Extra Terrestjal _ '
D." Twilight Saga
^r-W ta tT ra sT rirfir§ f fast-food restaurant to offer patrons free-20 minutes of
Internet time?
A. Burger King
■ B. J6!ibee
C. McDonald’s
D. Starbucks
7. What do you cail the board that forms the foundation of your computer?
A\ motherboard
B. ROM
C. main memory
D. RAM
8 .. How is RAM speed measured? ■ . <
A. bytes
8. megabytes
— Cr-hertz— .■
D. gigabytes
9. The word processor is an example of what types of software?
A. application software
B. operating systems software
C. systems software .
D. utilities •
P'JU ISTSevievi/er HE
in tro d u ctio n to Computer:-:
10'. Which of the following hardware devices acts as the intermediary between a
computer arid the phone system?
A. modem
B. speaker
C. keyboard
D. hard disk
11. Which is the standard input device that accepts letters, numbers and
commands from the user?
A. keyboard
B. digital camera ...... ...."•................ '
C. scanner
D. mouse
12. Which of the following refers to the transmission of messages over
communications networks?
A. email
B. WAN
• C. LAN
D. networks
13. Fourth generation computing devices, are based on what?
A. IC
B. vacuum tubes
C. LSI ..... .......... .............
D. transistors
14. Which of the following enables the computer to communicate with other
computers linked together by cable through the interface?
A. network card • ----------------------=----- :------------------------------------------
8. internet
C. LAN.
D. intran.et
G eneral Education
15. This is the biggest in size, the most expensive in price tnan any other
computers. Different industries also use this huge computer for designing
their products. Which classification of computer is referred to?
A. minicomputers . . .
B. super computers
C. personal computers
D. mainframe computers
16. Which of the following is equivalent to one character?
A. kilobyte
B. byte
C. megabyte
D. gigabyte _ „
•17. What software helps run the computer hardware and computer system? •
A. operating system
B. utilities
C. application software
D. system software
18. What do you call someone who accesses a computer or computer network
unlawfully?
A. hacker
B. unethical employee
C. cyber extortionist '
D. script kiddie
19. What is the latest portable storage device which can have as much as 8
gigabytes memory?
“ A! "'thumb drive
B. CD '
C. floppy drive
D..DVD
20. Which program repeatedly copiesitseifandisvery similar to
virus? ' .
A. trojan horse
B. virus . •
C. computer worm
D. freeware '
21. Which electronic machine cantakeinstructions,andperform compu
........ basedon those instructions?
A. PDA
8. computer
C. cell phone
D. ipad .
22. What do you call the set of moral principles that regulate the use of
computers?
A. ethics
B. professional ethics
C. code of ethics
0. computer ethics ■
23. Which printer uses metal pins to strike an inked ribbon to make dots on a
piece of paper?
A. ink jet printer *• *.
B. dot matrix printer
C. laser printer
D. matrix printer
• 24. Which of the following instances would NOT spread a computer virus?
A. When an individual runs an infected program.
B. When someone sneezes in front of the computer.
C. When someone opens an unsecured email attachment.
D. When an individual boots a computer with an infected drive.
P A R T ill - E N H A N C IN G T E S T TA K IN G S K IL L S
12. Which of the following refers to the physical components of the computer system?
• A. software
B. hardware , •
C. firmware • -
0. central processing unit
; 13. Which is a permanent output?
_ _ _ _ A —seft-eepy-’ —
B. hard c o d v ....... ..........
C. ^output displayed on the monitor •
D. texts and graphics
14. Sending a_file from your computer to another computer is called
A. ■emulation
B. uploading .
C. downloading . -
D. freeloading .
15. Which of the following is a true statement?
A. Web sources must always he cited in your report.
B. You are free to copy information you find and include it in your report.
C. it is just alright to distribute copies of your newly bought original DVD to ,
your friends.
D. You do not have to cite the web sources you use in your research report.
16. http://www.classzone.com is an example of what?
------- •ff^aU ftL '
8. a directory
C. an access code
D. a server
17. What does a word that looks underlined on a webpage usually mean?
A. a very important word . '
"8. a link to another web page
C. the web address
D. a mistake •
D r. A lice D . D io q u in o
in tro d u c tio n v ; C om puters
18. What program searches documents for specified keywords and returns a list
of the documents where the keywords are found?
A. search engine '
B. browser '________
C. crawler -------- -------- - ' ~"r "
0. Uniform Resource Locator i t i R t _________ _____ — ~ ~ "
19. What do you call the worldwide system of computer networks - a network of
networks in which users at any one computer can, if they have permission,,
get information from any other computer? -------- --
A. WAN
B. internet
C. LAN
0. intranet
20. Which of the following refers to creations of the mind: inventions, literary and
artistic works, and symbols, names, images, and designs used in commerce?
A. Intellectual Property
B. Copyright
C. Intellectual Property Rights ^
D. Inventions *
21. Which one does not belong to the group?______ ■ ----------- - — —
A. hacker --------- ----------- --
B. cyber extortionist
C. cyber terrorist
D. programmer
22. What do you call the software that is distributed free on a trial basis with the
understanding that the user may need or want to pay for it later?
A. freeware -
B. public domain software
C. shareware
D. firmware . •
23. Which type of computer is very useful for mobile computing nowadays?
A. Tablet pc
B. desktop
C. laptop f notebook
D. wireless computer
24. Which software allows end users to accomplish one or more specific (not
directly computer development related) tasks?
A. application software
---------B. utilities
Cooperating systems software
D. systems software
25. Which is NOT an application of ICT in education? -* .*
A. learning and instruction
B. management
C. auto CAD
D. research' .
M a th e m a tic s -C o n te m p o ra ry M a th e m a tic s
Social S c ie n c e - Social S c ie n c e -
Philippine H istory Basic E c o n o m ics
with A grarian R e fo rm
Part II Part III Part II Part III
1. B 1. C 1. A 1. B
2. C 2. A 2. C 2. A
3. B 3". B 3. C 3. A
4. B 4. D 4. C 4. B. ..........
5. A 5. C 5. A . 5. A
6. -* c _« 6. D 6. D 6. C
7. D 7. D 7. D 7. A
8. C 8. D 8. D 8. A
9. B 9. C 9. B 9. C
10. B 10. B • 10. B 10. B
11. C 11. 0 11. D 11. A
12. D 12. B 12. A 12. A
13. B 13. C 13. B 13. A
14. C 14. C 14. •C 14. C
15. A 15. D 15. B 15. B
16. D ' 16. B 16. D 16. c - .
17. D 17. A 17. B 17. C
18. A 18. B 18. A 18. D
19. A 19. C 19. D 1£L__D ..
20. A 20. C 20. B 20. D
21. A 21. A. 21. A ' ........ 21. "A....
22. B 22. C ' 22. C 22. B
.23. D 23.. A • 23. . A 23. C
24. C 24. D 24. C 24. C
25. B 25. C 25. B . 25. t C -
Social S cience- IC T -
Psychology Introduction to C o m p u ters
M Reviewer 429